Eeg1100 Om-e Book

ELECTROENCEPHALOGRAPH

EEG-1100

0614-004761E

EEG-1100AEEG-1100JEEG-1100KEEG-1100G

Model: EEG-1100

Manual code no.: 0614-004761E

Reader Comment Card

We welcome your comments about this manual. Your comments and suggestions help us improve

our manuals. Please circle the number for each of the following statements corresponding to your

evaluation and add comments in the space provided.

Fax or send your completed comment card to:

Fax: +81 (3) 5996-8100

International Div., Sales Promotion Section, Nihon Kohden Corp., 1-31-4, Nishiochiai Shinjuku-ku,

Tokyo 161-8560, Japan

Strongly Agree Neutral Disagree StronglyAgree Disagree

This manual is organized. 1 2 3 4 5

I can find the information I want. 1 2 3 4 5

The information is accurate. 1 2 3 4 5

I can understand the instructions. 1 2 3 4 5

The illustrations are appropriate and helpful. 1 2 3 4 5

The manual length is appropriate. 1 2 3 4 5

Comments:

Thank you for your cooperation. We appreciate it very much.

Name:

Occupation/Position:

Hospital/Company:

Address:

Phone:

Cutting line

CONTENTS

Operator's Manual EEG-1100 C.1

ContentsGENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS ....................................................................... i

WARRANTY POLICY ................................................................................................... ii

Conventions Used in this Manual and Instrument ....................................................... iv

Warnings, Cautions and Notes .......................................................................... iv

Explanations of the Symbols in this Manual and Instrument ............................. iv

Precautions for Input Jack Use ................................................................................... vii

Section 1 General....................................................................................1C.1Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 1.1

General Safety information ................................................................................................. 1.2

Features .............................................................................................................................. 1.9

General Functions and Screens ....................................................................................... 1.13

Disk Capacity .................................................................................................................... 1.16

Composition ...................................................................................................................... 1.18

Panel Descriptions ............................................................................................................ 1.19

Component Example .............................................................................................. 1.19

Main Unit ................................................................................................................. 1.20

PC Unit ................................................................................................................... 1.22

JE-425A Electrode Junction Box ............................................................................ 1.24

JE-207A/209A/JE-212A Electrode Junction Box (Option) ...................................... 1.25

JE-210A Electrode Junction Box (Option) .............................................................. 1.26

JE-208A Electrode Junction Box (Option) .............................................................. 1.27

JE-213A/214A Mini Junction Box (Option) .............................................................. 1.28

PV-102A Control Panel Unit (Option) ...................................................................... 1.29

How to Use Windows ........................................................................................................ 1.31

Using the Mouse ..................................................................................................... 1.31

Basic Screen Explanation ....................................................................................... 1.32

Using a Menu.......................................................................................................... 1.35

Using a Button ........................................................................................................ 1.36

Using a Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 1.36

Section 2 Installation ..............................................................................2C.1Instrument Location ............................................................................................................ 2.1

Setting the Components on the Cart ................................................................................... 2.3

Cable Connection ............................................................................................................... 2.4

Connecting the PC Unit to the Main Unit .................................................................. 2.6

Connecting the MO Disk Drive (Unit) ........................................................................ 2.6

Connecting the Display ............................................................................................. 2.6

Connecting the Electrode Junction Box .................................................................... 2.6

Connecting the Flash Lamp Assembly ..................................................................... 2.7

Connecting the Laser Printer .................................................................................... 2.7

Connecting the Power Cord ................................................................................................ 2.8

Connecting the Power Cord ...................................................................................... 2.8

CONTENTS

C.2 Operator's Manual EEG-1100

Equipotential Grounding ........................................................................................... 2.8

Connecting to a Local Area Network................................................................................... 2.9

Backing Up and Restoring the Settings in the System Program............................. 2.10

Enabling the Network Interface Controller ............................................................... 2.11

Setting the Network Identification Settings ............................................................. 2.12

Windows Network Settings ..................................................................................... 2.14

Opening the Local Area Connection Properties ............................................ 2.14

Installing the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks ...................... 2.15

Installing the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) ....................................................... 2.16

Uninstalling the Network Component ........................................................... 2.16

Setting the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) .......................................................... 2.17

Sharing Drives for Data Storing .............................................................................. 2.18

General Requirements for Connecting in Medical Electrical Systems .............................. 2.20

Section 3 Preparation .............................................................................3C.1Power On Procedure .......................................................................................................... 3.1

Opening the EEG 1000 Program .............................................................................. 3.4

Closing the EEG 1000 Program ............................................................................... 3.5

Power Off Procedure .......................................................................................................... 3.6

Changing the Settings before Measurement ...................................................................... 3.8

Setting Date and Time .............................................................................................. 3.8

Changing the Settings in the System Program ......................................................... 3.8

Changing the Display Settings .................................................................................. 3.9

Setting the Default Settings of the Search Items ..................................................... 3.11

Setting a Keyword Default Setting ................................................................. 3.11

Setting the Searching Range for the Examination Date ............................... 3.12

Backing Up the System Files .................................................................................. 3.13

Importing System Program Settings and Patient Files from an EEG-2100/2110

Electroencephalograph ........................................................................................... 3.15

Importing the System Program Settings ....................................................... 3.15

Importing the Registered Patient Files in the Database................................ 3.16

Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk ................................................................................... 3.17

Disk Capacity .......................................................................................................... 3.17

25 Electrodes and 2 Mark Channels ............................................................ 3.17

64 Electrodes and 2 Mark Channels ............................................................ 3.17

192 Electrodes.............................................................................................. 3.18

Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk ......................................................................... 3.19

Assigning a Volume Number to a Magneto-optical Disk ......................................... 3.20

Setting the Properties for 5 inch Magneto-optical Disks ......................................... 3.22

Checking for Disk Damage Using Check Disk .................................................................. 3.23

Preparing the Electrodes .................................................................................................. 3.25

Guidelines for Input Jack Use ................................................................................. 3.25

<When the JE-425A Electrode Junction Box, or Optional JE-208A, JE-210A

Mini Junction Box is Used> .......................................................................... 3.25

Required Electrodes ..................................................................................... 3.25

Input Jack Z .................................................................................................. 3.25

Input Jacks C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4) ......................................................... 3.25

Input Jacks A1 and A2 (or FP1 and FP2, JE-425A only) .............................. 3.25

CONTENTS


<When the Optional JE-213A Mini Junction Box is Used> ........................... 3.25

Required Electrodes ..................................................................................... 3.25

Input Jack Z .................................................................................................. 3.25

Input Jacks A5 and A6 (or A3 and A4) .......................................................... 3.26

Input Jacks A11 and A12 .............................................................................. 3.26

<Checking Original Electrode Potentials for All Active Electrodes> ............. 3.26

Introduction to Electrode Position, Derivation and Montage ................................... 3.27

Electrode Position ......................................................................................... 3.27

Derivation ..................................................................................................... 3.27

Monopolar Derivations (Referential Derivation) ............................................ 3.27

BN (Balanced Noncephalic Reference) Derivation ....................................... 3.28

Bipolar Derivation ......................................................................................... 3.28

T1 and T2 Electrodes ................................................................................... 3.28

PG1 and PG2 Electrodes ............................................................................. 3.29

Montage (Pattern) ......................................................................................... 3.29

EEG Scalp Disk Electrodes .......................................................................... 3.30

Electrode Positions ....................................................................................... 3.30

Attaching the Electrodes to the Patient ................................................................... 3.31

Earlobe Electrodes ....................................................................................... 3.31

ECG Electrodes ............................................................................................ 3.31

Connecting Electrode Leads to the Electrode Junction Box ................................... 3.32

EEG Electrodes ............................................................................................ 3.32

ECG Electrodes ............................................................................................ 3.32

Respiration Pickup........................................................................................ 3.33

Section 4 System Program ....................................................................4C.1General ............................................................................................................................... 4.1

Opening the System Program ............................................................................................ 4.2

Closing the System Program .................................................................................... 4.2

Explanation of Each Function ............................................................................................. 4.3

Menu Bar .................................................................................................................. 4.3

File Menu .................................................................................................................. 4.3

Load................................................................................................................ 4.3

Save As .......................................................................................................... 4.3

Initialize........................................................................................................... 4.3

Close without Saving ...................................................................................... 4.3

Close .............................................................................................................. 4.3

Junction Box Menu ................................................................................................... 4.3

JE-425A (10-20 System) ................................................................................ 4.3

JE-208A (10-20 System)/JE-210A (10-10 System)/JE-213A, 214A (Matrix) .. 4.3

EEG-2100 Compatible Mode .......................................................................... 4.3

Help Menu ................................................................................................................ 4.4

About .............................................................................................................. 4.4

Icons ......................................................................................................................... 4.4

Pattern ............................................................................................................ 4.4

Photic ............................................................................................................. 4.4

Table ............................................................................................................... 4.4

System ........................................................................................................... 4.4

CONTENTS


Electrodes ...................................................................................................... 4.4

Auto Record.................................................................................................... 4.4

Programming Patterns ........................................................................................................ 4.5

General ..................................................................................................................... 4.5

Opening the Pattern Table ........................................................................................ 4.5

Selecting the Pattern ................................................................................................ 4.5

Changing the Pattern Name ..................................................................................... 4.5

Changing the Montage ............................................................................................. 4.6

Selecting or Deleting Electrodes for AV Derivation ................................................... 4.7

Changing an Amplifier Setting .................................................................................. 4.8

Displaying/Not Displaying a Waveform ..................................................................... 4.9

Changing a Waveform Color ..................................................................................... 4.9

Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform ................................................. 4.10

Annotating a Channel with a Comment ................................................................... 4.11

Changing the Channel Spacing ............................................................................... 4.11

Selecting the Item Displayed on the Extended Channel Bar ................................... 4.11

Changing the Conversion Range of the DC Input Signals ...................................... 4.12

Programming Automatic Photic Stimulation Modes .......................................................... 4.14

Editing the Waveform Annotations and Patient Information Items .................................... 4.15

Changing the Settings in the System Setting Dialog Box ................................................. 4.17

General ................................................................................................................... 4.17

Opening the System Setting Dialog Box ................................................................. 4.17

Settings in the General Page .................................................................................. 4.18

Selecting Storage Drive ................................................................................ 4.18

Changing Montage Description .................................................................... 4.18

Selecting EEG Sampling Frequency ............................................................ 4.19

Select the Number of Dots to Display the Waveforms .................................. 4.19

Automatically Saving the Waveforms ........................................................... 4.19

Selecting AC Line Frequency ....................................................................... 4.19

Selecting Reference Electrodes for Skin-Electrode Impedance Check ........ 4.19

Selecting Reference Electrode for Saved EEG Data ................................... 4.20

Displaying the Patient Image ........................................................................ 4.20

Changing the Settings for Long Term EEG Waveform Monitoring ................ 4.20

Settings in the Junction box, operation, display Page ............................................ 4.24

Resetting the Settings When Pattern Changes ............................................ 4.24

Selecting the Pattern Number When Another Pattern Group is Selected ..... 4.24

Selecting the Limitation of the Skin-electrode Impedance Check Time ........ 4.24

Selecting the Electrode Junction Box Time Constant ................................... 4.25

Selecting the Operation Mode of the Impedance Preset Key ....................... 4.25

Selecting the Time Interval of the HV Timer and Post HV Timer Event ........ 4.25

Selecting the Page Display Time .................................................................. 4.25

Selecting the Operation Mode of the Reset Button/Switch .......................... 4.25

Selecting the Time Constant Display Format ................................................ 4.25

Selecting the Range of Selectable High Cut Filter Frequencies ................... 4.25

Substituting the Sensitivity 2.5 for the Sensitivity 3. ..................................... 4.26

Entering the Event Name for High Speed Review ........................................ 4.26

Settings in the Standard Page ................................................................................ 4.27

Selecting the Pattern .................................................................................... 4.27

Selecting the ACC Amplifier Settings ............................................................ 4.27

CONTENTS


Selecting the Calibration Mode ..................................................................... 4.27

Selecting the Recording Mode...................................................................... 4.27

Selecting the Impedance Threshold ............................................................. 4.28

Selecting the Photic Stimulation and Hyperventilation Settings.................... 4.28

Selecting the Paper Speed ........................................................................... 4.28

Selecting Whether or Not to Record the Calibration waveform .................... 4.28

Selecting the AC Filter Setting ...................................................................... 4.28

Selecting Whether or Not to Display the Patient Image ................................ 4.28

Settings in the DC input/output, pen recorder Page ............................................... 4.29

Selecting the DC Output Sensitivity .............................................................. 4.29

Selecting the DC Input Sensitivity ................................................................ 4.29

Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition........................................ 4.30

General ................................................................................................................... 4.30

Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition ................... 4.30

Selecting and Saving the DC Input Channels ............................................... 4.31

Programming Automatic Recording Modes ...................................................................... 4.33

Saving the System Program Settings in a File .................................................................. 4.35

Calling Up Saved System Program Settings .................................................................... 4.36

Resetting All System Program Settings to the Factory Default Settings ........................... 4.37

Changing the Electrode Junction Box ............................................................................... 4.38

General ................................................................................................................... 4.38

Sampling Frequency and Number of Electrodes that are Used for

Waveform Acquisition ............................................................................................. 4.39

JE-207A Electrode Junction Box and JE-208A Mini Junction Box ............... 4.39

JE-209A Electrode Junction Box and JE-210A Mini Junction Box ............... 4.39

JE-212A Electrode Junction Box .................................................................. 4.40

Selecting the EEG-2100 Compatible Mode ...................................................................... 4.41

List of Factory Default Settings ......................................................................................... 4.42

Patterns .................................................................................................................. 4.42

Automatic Photic Stimulation Settings .................................................................... 4.46

System Setting Dialog Box Options ........................................................................ 4.47

Section 5 Acquisition Program ..............................................................5C.1General ............................................................................................................................... 5.1

Flowchart of Acquiring EEG Waveforms ........................................................ 5.2

Opening the Acquisition Program ....................................................................................... 5.3

Acquisition Screen .............................................................................................................. 5.4


Menu Bar .................................................................................................................. 5.5

File Menu .................................................................................................................. 5.5

New ................................................................................................................ 5.5

Close .............................................................................................................. 5.5

Patient ............................................................................................................ 5.5

FFT setup ....................................................................................................... 5.5

Exit ................................................................................................................. 5.5

Display Menu ............................................................................................................ 5.6

Display Control ............................................................................................... 5.6

5 s/page .......................................................................................................... 5.6

CONTENTS


10 s/page ........................................................................................................ 5.6

15 s/page ........................................................................................................ 5.6

20 s/page ........................................................................................................ 5.6

30 s/page ........................................................................................................ 5.6

60 s/page ........................................................................................................ 5.6

5 min/page ...................................................................................................... 5.6

Even Layout .................................................................................................... 5.6

Channel Layout .............................................................................................. 5.6

Superimpose .................................................................................................. 5.6

Tool Bar .......................................................................................................... 5.6

Event Bar ........................................................................................................ 5.6

Amp Bar ......................................................................................................... 5.6

Tool Menu ................................................................................................................. 5.7

Timer .............................................................................................................. 5.7

Camera ........................................................................................................... 5.7

Voltage Cursor ................................................................................................ 5.7

Time Cursor .................................................................................................... 5.7

Ruler ............................................................................................................... 5.7

Standard ......................................................................................................... 5.7

Auto Record.................................................................................................... 5.7

Long term ....................................................................................................... 5.7

FFT Map ......................................................................................................... 5.7

Digital Video ................................................................................................... 5.7

Control Menu ............................................................................................................ 5.8

Activation ........................................................................................................ 5.8

AC Filter .......................................................................................................... 5.8

ECG Filter ....................................................................................................... 5.8

BN Balance..................................................................................................... 5.8

AV Delete ........................................................................................................ 5.8

Pattern Table .................................................................................................. 5.8

CAL Control .................................................................................................... 5.8

Option Menu ............................................................................................................. 5.8

Help Menu ................................................................................................................ 5.8

About .............................................................................................................. 5.8

Amp Bar .................................................................................................................... 5.9

Sens (Sensitivity selection button) .................................................................. 5.9

TC (Time constant selection button) ............................................................... 5.9

HF (High-cut filter selection button) ................................................................ 5.9

Pat (Pattern selection button) ....................................................................... 5.10

Ref (Reference electrode selection button) .................................................. 5.10

Clock ............................................................................................................ 5.10

Elapsed time ................................................................................................. 5.10

Tool Bar ................................................................................................................... 5.11

AC Filter On/Off button .................................................................................. 5.11

Display Pattern Table button .......................................................................... 5.11

CAL Signal button .......................................................................................... 5.11

EEG Signal button ......................................................................................... 5.11

Impedance Check button ............................................................................... 5.11

Reset button .................................................................................................. 5.11

CONTENTS


Freeze button ................................................................................................ 5.11

Display Patient Information button ................................................................. 5.11

Display Activation Control button ................................................................... 5.11

Start/Stop Filing button .................................................................................. 5.11

Event Bar ................................................................................................................ 5.12

Starting and Ending EEG Measurement ........................................................................... 5.13

Starting Measurement ............................................................................................ 5.13

Ending the Measurement and Saving the File ........................................................ 5.14

Closing the File Without Saving .............................................................................. 5.15

Entering Patient Information and Other Data .................................................................... 5.16

General ................................................................................................................... 5.16

Opening the Patient Information Dialog Box ........................................................... 5.16

Patient Information Dialog Box Options .................................................................. 5.17

Entering the Patient Information ............................................................................. 5.18

Checking the Skin-electrode Impedance .......................................................................... 5.19

Setting Impedance Threshold ................................................................................. 5.19

Checking Skin-electrode Impedance ...................................................................... 5.20

Displaying the Calibration Waveform ................................................................................ 5.21

Displaying and Saving the Calibration Waveform ................................................... 5.21

Changing the Calibration Waveform ....................................................................... 5.21

Changing the Pattern ........................................................................................................ 5.22

Changing the Measurement Settings ................................................................................ 5.23

Changing Amplifier Settings for All Selected Channels ........................................... 5.23

Setting ACC .................................................................................................. 5.23

Changing the Amplifier Setting ..................................................................... 5.24

Changing Amplifier Settings for Individual Channels .............................................. 5.25

Changing Amplifier Settings for One Channel .............................................. 5.25

Changing Amplifier Settings for Two or More Channels ............................... 5.25

Changed Settings and ACC Marks ......................................................................... 5.26

Changing the Montage ........................................................................................... 5.27

Changing the Reference Electrode ......................................................................... 5.29

Selecting or Deleting Electrodes for AV Derivation ................................................. 5.30

Adjusting BN Balance for BN Derivation ................................................................. 5.31

Changing the Waveform Display ............................................................................ 5.32

About Display Control Dialog Box ................................................................ 5.32

Displaying the Derivation (Montage) and/or Comment

Beside Each Channel ................................................................................... 5.32

Displaying the Time Scale ............................................................................ 5.32

Displaying the Extended Channel Bar .......................................................... 5.32

Displaying the Vertical Lines for the Events ................................................. 5.32

Displaying the Montage Map Window. .......................................................... 5.32

Changing Waveform Display Positions ......................................................... 5.34

Displaying/Not Displaying a Waveform......................................................... 5.34

Changing the Waveform Display Speed ....................................................... 5.35

Changing a Waveform Color ........................................................................ 5.35

Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform ....................................... 5.35

Returning All Waveforms to the Baseline ..................................................... 5.36

Using the AC Filter .................................................................................................. 5.36

Using the ECG Filter ............................................................................................... 5.36

CONTENTS


Changing the Various Settings to the Default Settings ........................................... 5.38

Annotating EEG Waveforms ............................................................................................. 5.39

General ................................................................................................................... 5.39

Manually Annotating the Waveforms ...................................................................... 5.40

Adding a Registered Annotation ................................................................... 5.40

Entering an Annotation with the Keyboard .................................................... 5.40

Using the Annotation Dialog Box .................................................................. 5.40

Adding a Screen Comment .......................................................................... 5.41

Using the Timers ............................................................................................................... 5.42

About the Timer Bar ................................................................................................ 5.42

Manual Timer .......................................................................................................... 5.42

Record (Recording) Timer ...................................................................................... 5.43

HV and Post HV Timer ........................................................................................... 5.43

Measuring Amplitude and Time with the Cursors and Ruler ............................................. 5.44

About Cursor Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 5.44

Using the Voltage Cursor ........................................................................................ 5.44

Using the Time Cursor ............................................................................................ 5.45

Using the Ruler ....................................................................................................... 5.46

Photic Stimulation and Hyperventilation ........................................................................... 5.47

About Activation Bar ............................................................................................... 5.48

Photic Stimulation ................................................................................................... 5.50

Automatic Photic Stimulation ........................................................................ 5.50

Manual Photic Stimulation ............................................................................ 5.51

Single Photic Stimulation .............................................................................. 5.51

Hyperventilation ...................................................................................................... 5.52

Creating the FFT Data for DSA Trendgraph ..................................................................... 5.53

Automatic EEG Waveform Recording ............................................................................... 5.54

Long Term EEG Waveform Monitoring ............................................................................. 5.56

Setting Example...................................................................................................... 5.56

Procedure ............................................................................................................... 5.57

Displaying the Patient Image ............................................................................................ 5.58

Keyboard Operation .......................................................................................................... 5.59

Recording Marks ............................................................................................................... 5.61

Section 6 Review Program .....................................................................6C.1General ............................................................................................................................... 6.1

Flowchart of Reviewing EEG Waveforms ....................................................... 6.2

Opening the Review Program ............................................................................................. 6.3

Opening the EEG Data File ................................................................................................ 6.5

Opening the EEG Data File in a Drive ...................................................................... 6.5

Selecting the EEG Data File in a Folder ................................................................... 6.6

About the Open File Dialog Box ............................................................................... 6.7

Menu Bar ........................................................................................................ 6.7

Tool Bar .......................................................................................................... 6.9

Searching for a File .................................................................................................. 6.11

Searching for a File by a Keyword ................................................................. 6.11

Searching for a File by the Examination Date .............................................. 6.12

Reviewing the Patient History ................................................................................. 6.12

CONTENTS


Reviewing the Patient Information .......................................................................... 6.13

Backing Up the Database ....................................................................................... 6.13

Review Screen.................................................................................................................. 6.14

Explanation of Each Function ........................................................................................... 6.15

Menu Bar ................................................................................................................ 6.15

File Menu ................................................................................................................ 6.15

Open ............................................................................................................. 6.15

Save ............................................................................................................. 6.15

Export ........................................................................................................... 6.15

Patient Information ....................................................................................... 6.15

Print .............................................................................................................. 6.15

Printer setup ................................................................................................. 6.15

FFT setup ..................................................................................................... 6.15

FFT reanalysis .............................................................................................. 6.15

Delete FFT data ............................................................................................ 6.15

Exit ............................................................................................................... 6.15

Display Menu .......................................................................................................... 6.16

Display Control ............................................................................................. 6.16

5 s/page ........................................................................................................ 6.16

10 s/page ...................................................................................................... 6.16

15 s/page ...................................................................................................... 6.16

20 s/page ...................................................................................................... 6.16

30 s/page ...................................................................................................... 6.16

60 s/page ...................................................................................................... 6.16

5 min/page .................................................................................................... 6.16

Zoom ............................................................................................................ 6.16

Even Layout .................................................................................................. 6.16

Channel Layout ............................................................................................ 6.16

Superimpose ................................................................................................ 6.16

Impedance Check ......................................................................................... 6.16

Tool Bar ........................................................................................................ 6.17

Jump Bar ...................................................................................................... 6.17

Amp Bar ....................................................................................................... 6.17

Page Control Bar .......................................................................................... 6.17

Jump Menu ............................................................................................................. 6.17

Event ............................................................................................................ 6.17

Time .............................................................................................................. 6.17

Tool Menu ............................................................................................................... 6.18

Wave Select ................................................................................................. 6.18

Voltage Cursor .............................................................................................. 6.18

Time Cursor .................................................................................................. 6.18

Ruler ............................................................................................................. 6.18

Modify Event ................................................................................................. 6.18

Copy Page .................................................................................................... 6.18

Video Link ..................................................................................................... 6.18

Show DSA in Jump Bar ................................................................................ 6.18

Note Waveform ............................................................................................. 6.18

Control Menu ......................................................................................................... 6.19

AC Filter ........................................................................................................ 6.19

CONTENTS


ECG Filter ..................................................................................................... 6.19

BN Balance................................................................................................... 6.19

AV Delete ...................................................................................................... 6.19

Pattern Table ................................................................................................ 6.19

CAL Control .................................................................................................. 6.19

Help Menu .............................................................................................................. 6.19

About ............................................................................................................ 6.19

Amp Bar .................................................................................................................. 6.20

Sens (Sensitivity selection button) ................................................................ 6.20

TC (Time constant selection button) ............................................................. 6.20

HF (High-cut filter selection button) .............................................................. 6.20

Pat (Pattern selection button) ....................................................................... 6.21

Ref (Reference electrode selection button) .................................................. 6.21

Clock ............................................................................................................ 6.22

Elapsed time ................................................................................................. 6.22

Epoch ........................................................................................................... 6.22

Tool Bar .................................................................................................................. 6.23

AC Filter On/Off button ................................................................................. 6.23

Display Pattern Table button ......................................................................... 6.23

Display Voltage Cursor button ...................................................................... 6.23

Display Time Cursor button .......................................................................... 6.23

Display Ruler button ..................................................................................... 6.23

Display Patient Information button ................................................................ 6.23

Print Current Page button ............................................................................. 6.23

Video Link button .......................................................................................... 6.23

Zoom button ................................................................................................. 6.23

Screen Comment button ............................................................................... 6.23

Select Displayed Page and Advance button ................................................. 6.24

Display Note Waveform button ..................................................................... 6.24

Page Control Bar .................................................................................................... 6.25

Rewind button ............................................................................................... 6.25

Fast Forward button ..................................................................................... 6.25

1 Page Back button ...................................................................................... 6.25

1 Page Forward button ................................................................................. 6.25

1 s Back button ............................................................................................. 6.25

1 s Forward button ........................................................................................ 6.25

Centering button ........................................................................................... 6.25

Stop button ................................................................................................... 6.25

Play button.................................................................................................... 6.25

Jump Bar ................................................................................................................ 6.26

Time (Beginning/Ending Time of File) ........................................................... 6.26

Previous/Next Section button ....................................................................... 6.26

Previous Event button .................................................................................. 6.26

Next Event button ......................................................................................... 6.26

Select Event button ...................................................................................... 6.26

Reviewing the EEG Waveforms........................................................................................ 6.27

Searching for Waveforms ................................................................................................. 6.28

Searching by the Event Name ................................................................................ 6.28

Searching by the Event Jump Bar .......................................................................... 6.29

CONTENTS


Searching by the DSA Jump Bar ............................................................................ 6.30

Changing the Range of the Event Mark Display Area and DSA Trend Graph Display

Area ........................................................................................................................ 6.30

Searching by Time .................................................................................................. 6.31

Changing the Pattern ........................................................................................................ 6.32

Changing the Measurement Settings ................................................................................ 6.33

Changing Amplifier Settings for All Selected Channels ........................................... 6.33

Setting ACC .................................................................................................. 6.33

Changing the Amplifier Setting ..................................................................... 6.34

Changing Amplifier Settings for Individual Channels .............................................. 6.35

Changing Amplifier Settings for One Channel .............................................. 6.35

Changing Amplifier Settings for Two or More Channels ............................... 6.35

Changed Settings and ACC Marks ......................................................................... 6.36

Changing the Montage ........................................................................................... 6.37

Changing the Reference Electrode ......................................................................... 6.39

Selecting or Deleting Electrodes for AV Derivation ................................................. 6.40

Adjusting BN Balance for BN Derivation ................................................................. 6.41

Changing the Calibration Voltage ........................................................................... 6.41

Changing the Waveform Display Settings .............................................................. 6.42

About the Display Control Dialog Box........................................................... 6.42

Displaying the Derivation (Montage) and/or Comment beside Each Channel6.42

Displaying the Time Scale ............................................................................ 6.42

Changing the Pause Time ............................................................................ 6.42

Changing the Display Mode.......................................................................... 6.42

Displaying the Event ..................................................................................... 6.43

Drawing a High Speed Sampled Waveforms Quicker .................................. 6.43

Displaying the Extended Channel Bar .......................................................... 6.43

Displaying the Screen Comment .................................................................. 6.43

Displaying the Vertical Lines for the Selected Events ................................... 6.43

Selecting the Zoom in Area .......................................................................... 6.43

Displaying the Measurement Date and Time When Using the Time Cursor . 6.43

Displaying the Montage Map Window .......................................................... 6.43

Changing Waveform Display Positions ......................................................... 6.44

Displaying/Not Displaying a Waveform......................................................... 6.44

Changing the Waveform Display Speed ....................................................... 6.45

Changing a Waveform Color ........................................................................ 6.45

Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform ....................................... 6.45

Using the AC filter ................................................................................................... 6.46

Using the ECG Filter ............................................................................................... 6.46

Measuring Amplitude and Time with the Cursors and Ruler ............................................. 6.48

About the Cursor Dialog Box .................................................................................. 6.48

Using the Voltage Cursor ........................................................................................ 6.48

Using the Time Cursor ............................................................................................ 6.48

Using the Ruler ....................................................................................................... 6.50

Zooming In the Waveform....................................................................................... 6.51

Entering Patient Information and Other Data .................................................................... 6.52

Opening the Patient Information Dialog Box ........................................................... 6.52

Patient Information Dialog Box Options .................................................................. 6.53

Entering the Patient Information ............................................................................. 6.54

CONTENTS


Editing the Annotation Added to the Waveforms ............................................................... 6.55

Deleting an Annotation ............................................................................................ 6.55

Changing an Annotation ......................................................................................... 6.56

Adding an Annotation .............................................................................................. 6.57

Adding an Annotation by Specifying the Time .............................................. 6.57

Adding an Annotation in High Speed Review ............................................... 6.58

Moving an Annotation ............................................................................................. 6.58

Adding a Screen Comment ..................................................................................... 6.59

Editing the Screen Comment: ....................................................................... 6.60

Deleting the Screen Comment...................................................................... 6.60

Selecting the Events ............................................................................................... 6.61

Selecting Parts of the Waveforms..................................................................................... 6.62

Selecting All Waveforms on a Page.............................................................. 6.63

Displaying a DSA Trendgraph ........................................................................................... 6.64

Displaying a DSA Trendgraph................................................................................. 6.64

About the DSA Jump Bar ........................................................................................ 6.65

Changing the Range of the DSA Trend Graph Display Area ................................. 6.65

Creating the FFT Data for DSA Trendgraph ........................................................... 6.66

Displaying the DSA Trendgraph in Detail ................................................................ 6.67

Changing the DSA Trendgraph Display Settings .................................................... 6.68

Copying Parts of Waveforms ............................................................................................ 6.70

Displaying the Note Waveform Window.................................................................. 6.70

Copying Part of Waveforms .................................................................................... 6.72

Copying Part of the Waveforms with a Mouse .............................................. 6.72

Copying Part of the Waveforms at the Center of the Review Window.......... 6.73

Copying Part of the Waveforms Using the Time Cursor. .............................. 6.74

Registering the Copied Waveforms as a Sample Data ........................................... 6.75

Changing the Title of the Copied Waveforms ......................................................... 6.76

Displaying the Copied Waveforms .......................................................................... 6.76

Displaying the Copied Waveforms for the Current Patient. .......................... 6.76

Displaying the Copied Waveforms for All Patients (Sample Data) ................ 6.77

Printing the Copied Waveform ................................................................................ 6.77

Deleting Copied Waveforms ................................................................................... 6.77

Reviewing the Long Term EEG Waveforms ...................................................................... 6.78

Printing .............................................................................................................................. 6.79

Setting Up the Printer ............................................................................................. 6.79

Printing Waveforms and Patient Information .......................................................... 6.79

Selecting the Information for Waveform Printing .................................................... 6.81

Saving the EEG Waveforms ............................................................................................. 6.83

Saving the Changed Data in the Currently Selected File ........................................ 6.83

Saving All or Part of the File as a New File ............................................................. 6.84

ASCII File Format and File Name ........................................................................... 6.85

Section 7 Database Manager Program..................................................7C.1General ............................................................................................................................... 7.1

Opening the Database Manager Program .......................................................................... 7.2


About the Database Manager Dialog Box................................................................. 7.3

CONTENTS


File Menu .................................................................................................................. 7.4

Menu Bar .................................................................................................................. 7.4

Load................................................................................................................ 7.4

Save ............................................................................................................... 7.4

Append ........................................................................................................... 7.4

Print Preview .................................................................................................. 7.4

Print ................................................................................................................ 7.4

Close .............................................................................................................. 7.4

Edit Menu ................................................................................................................. 7.5

Delete ............................................................................................................. 7.5

Edit Patient Information .................................................................................. 7.5

Select All ......................................................................................................... 7.5

Invert Selection ............................................................................................... 7.5

View Menu ................................................................................................................ 7.5

View All Information ........................................................................................ 7.5

View by ID ...................................................................................................... 7.5

Reset Column Width ....................................................................................... 7.5

Refresh ........................................................................................................... 7.5

Database Menu ........................................................................................................ 7.6

User Database................................................................................................ 7.6

System Database ........................................................................................... 7.6

Network Database .......................................................................................... 7.6

Tool Menu ................................................................................................................. 7.6

List Set ........................................................................................................... 7.6

Help .......................................................................................................................... 7.6

About .............................................................................................................. 7.6

Tool Bar .................................................................................................................... 7.7

Open button .................................................................................................... 7.7

Preview button ................................................................................................ 7.7

Print button ..................................................................................................... 7.7

Delete button .................................................................................................. 7.7

Edit button ...................................................................................................... 7.7

Refresh button ................................................................................................ 7.7

Close button ................................................................................................... 7.7

Selecting Records in the Database..................................................................................... 7.8

Sorting Files .............................................................................................................. 7.8

Searching for a File ................................................................................................... 7.9

Searching for a File by a Keyword .................................................................. 7.9

Searching for a File by the Examination Date .............................................. 7.10

Saving the Current Database in Another Folder or Drive ................................................... 7.11

Displaying the Patient Information in Another Database ................................................... 7.13

Converting the Database File ................................................................................. 7.14

Appending Records to the System Database or Network Database ................................ 7.15

Deleting Records from the Database ................................................................................ 7.16

Editing the Patient Information .......................................................................................... 7.17

Printing the Patient formation in the Database.................................................................. 7.18

Previewing the List of Patient Information .............................................................. 7.18

Printing the List of Patient Information .................................................................... 7.19

CONTENTS


Section 8 File Utility Program ................................................................8C.1General ............................................................................................................................... 8.1

Opening the File Utility Program ......................................................................................... 8.2


About the File Utility Dialog Box ............................................................................... 8.3

Menu Bar .................................................................................................................. 8.4

File Menu .................................................................................................................. 8.4

Move ............................................................................................................... 8.4

Copy ............................................................................................................... 8.4

Delete ............................................................................................................. 8.4

Add to Database ............................................................................................. 8.4

Append ........................................................................................................... 8.4

File append settings ....................................................................................... 8.4

Copy with Initialize .......................................................................................... 8.4

Copy LIF file ................................................................................................... 8.4

Close .............................................................................................................. 8.4

Disk Menu ................................................................................................................. 8.5

Format ............................................................................................................ 8.5

Initialize........................................................................................................... 8.5

Tool Menu ................................................................................................................. 8.5

Patient Info ..................................................................................................... 8.5

Refresh ........................................................................................................... 8.5

Help Menu ................................................................................................................ 8.5

About .............................................................................................................. 8.5

Tool Bar .................................................................................................................... 8.6

Move button .................................................................................................... 8.6

Copy button .................................................................................................... 8.6

Delete button .................................................................................................. 8.6

Add to Database button .................................................................................. 8.6

Append button ................................................................................................ 8.6

Patient button ................................................................................................. 8.6

Refresh button ................................................................................................ 8.6

Close button ................................................................................................... 8.6

Selecting Files in the Patient File List ................................................................................. 8.7

Sorting Files .............................................................................................................. 8.7

Moving Files ........................................................................................................................ 8.8

Copying Files ...................................................................................................................... 8.9

Copying the LIF File ................................................................................................ 8.10

Deleting Files ..................................................................................................................... 8.11

Adding Files to the System Database ............................................................................... 8.12

Combining EEG Data Files ............................................................................................... 8.13

Reviewing the Patient Information .................................................................................... 8.15

Refreshing the File List ..................................................................................................... 8.16

Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk and Assigning a Volume Number .............................. 8.16

Section 9 Troubleshooting .....................................................................9C.1Instrument ........................................................................................................................... 9.2

Acquiring the EEG Waveforms ........................................................................................... 9.3

CONTENTS


MO Disk Drive..................................................................................................................... 9.5

Laser Printer ....................................................................................................................... 9.6

Acquiring Clear EEG Waveforms........................................................................................ 9.7

Instrument Location .................................................................................................. 9.7

AC Interference ........................................................................................................ 9.7

Occasional Noise ...................................................................................................... 9.8

Unstable Waveform Fluctuation ................................................................................ 9.8

ECG Artifact .............................................................................................................. 9.8

Flash Lamp Artifact ................................................................................................... 9.8

Section 10 Maintenance .........................................................................10C.1Check Items After Use ...................................................................................................... 10.1

Cleaning, Disinfecting and Sterilizing ................................................................................ 10.2

System Components .............................................................................................. 10.2

Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 10.2

Disinfecting and Sterilizing ........................................................................... 10.2

Electrodes and Leads ....................................................................................................... 10.3

Electrode Cleaning ....................................................................................... 10.3

Sterilization ................................................................................................... 10.3

Electrode Lead Check .................................................................................. 10.4

Cleaning the Instrument Surface ...................................................................................... 10.5

Cleaning the Magneto-optical Disk Unit ............................................................................ 10.5

Regular Check .................................................................................................................. 10.6

Periodical Replacement Schedule .................................................................................... 10.7

Repair Parts Availability Policy ......................................................................................... 10.8

Section 11 Reference.............................................................................. 11C.1Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 11.1

Standard Accessories ........................................................................................................ 11.5

Optional Accessories ......................................................................................................... 11.7

Input/Output Connector/Jack Pin Assignment ................................................................... 11.9

Main Unit .................................................................................................................. 11.9

PC Unit .................................................................................................................. 11.14

JE-425A Electrode Junction Box ........................................................................... 11.15

CONTENTS


This page is intentionally left blank.

Operator's Manual EEG-1100 i

GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS

This device is intended for use only by qualified medical personnel.Use only Nihon Kohden approved products with this device. Use of non-approved products orin a non-approved manner may affect the performance specifications of the device. Thisincludes, but is not limited to, batteries, recording paper, pens, extension cables, electrodeleads, input boxes and AC power.

Please read these precautions thoroughly before attempting to operate the instrument.

1. To safely and effectively use the instrument, its operation must be fully understood.

2. When installing or storing the instrument, take the following precautions:

(1) Avoid moisture or contact with water, dust, extreme atmospheric pressure, excessive humidity and temperatures,

poorly ventilated areas, and saline or sulphuric air.

(2) Place the instrument on an even, level floor. Avoid vibration and mechanical shock, even during transport.

(3) Avoid placing in an area where chemicals are stored or where there is danger of gas leakage.

(4) The power line source to be applied to the instrument must correspond in frequency and voltage to product

specifications, and have sufficient current capacity.

(5) Choose a room where a proper grounding facility is available.

3. Before Operation

(1) Check that the instrument is in perfect operating order.

(2) Check that the instrument is grounded properly.

(3) Check that all cords are connected properly.

(4) Pay extra attention when the instrument is in combination with other instruments to avoid misdiagnosis or other

problems.

(5) All circuitry used for direct patient connection must be doubly checked.

(6) Check that battery level is acceptable and battery condition is good when using battery-operated models.

4. During Operation

(1) Both the instrument and the patient must receive continual, careful attention.

(2) Turn power off or remove electrodes and/or transducers when necessary to assure the patient’s safety.

(3) Avoid direct contact between the instrument housing and the patient.

5. To Shutdown After Use

(1) Turn power off with all controls returned to their original positions.

(2) Remove the cords gently; do not use force to remove them.

(3) Clean the instrument together with all accessories for their next use.

6. The instrument must receive expert, professional attention for maintenance and repairs. When the instrument is

not functioning properly, it should be clearly marked to avoid operation while it is out of order.

7. The instrument must not be altered or modified in any way.

8. Maintenance and Inspection:

(1) The instrument and parts must undergo regular maintenance inspection at least every 6 months.

(2) If stored for extended periods without being used, make sure prior to operation that the instrument is in perfect

operating condition.

ii Operator's Manual EEG-1100

(3) Technical information such as parts list, descriptions, calibration instructions or other information is available for

qualified user technical personnel upon request from your Nihon Kohden distributor.

9. When the instrument is used with an electrosurgical instrument, pay careful attention to the application and/or

location of electrodes and/or transducers to avoid possible burn to the patient.

10. When the instrument is used with a defibrillator, make sure that the instrument is protected against defibrillator

discharge. If not, remove patient cables and/or transducers from the instrument to avoid possible damage.

WARRANTY POLICYNihon Kohden Corporation (NKC) shall warrant its products against all defects in materials and workmanship for one year

from the date of delivery. However, consumable materials such as recording paper, ink, stylus and battery are excluded from

the warranty.

NKC or its authorized agents will repair or replace any products which prove to be defective during the warranty period,

provided these products are used as prescribed by the operating instructions given in the operator’s and service manuals.

No other party is authorized to make any warranty or assume liability for NKC’s products. NKC will not recognize any other

warranty, either implied or in writing. In addition, service, technical modification or any other product change performed by

someone other than NKC or its authorized agents without prior consent of NKC may be cause for voiding this warranty.

Defective products or parts must be returned to NKC or its authorized agents, along with an explanation of the failure.

Shipping costs must be pre-paid.

This warranty does not apply to products that have been modified, disassembled, reinstalled or repaired without Nihon

Kohden approval or which have been subjected to neglect or accident, damage due to accident, fire, lightning, vandalism,

water or other casualty, improper installation or application, or on which the original identification marks have been

removed.

In the USA and Canada other warranty policies may apply.

CAUTIONUnited States law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.

Operator's Manual EEG-1100 iii

EMC RELATED CAUTIONThis equipment and/or system complies with the International Standard IEC60601-1-2 for electromagnetic

compatibility for medical electrical equipment and/or system. However, an electromagnetic environment

that exceeds the limits or levels stipulated in the IEC60601-1-2, can cause harmful interference to the

equipment and/or system or cause the equipment and/or system to fail to perform its intended function or

degrade its intended performance. Therefore, during the operation of the equipment and/or system, if

there is any undesired deviation from its intended operational performance, you must avoid, identify and

resolve the adverse electromagnetic effect before continuing to use the equipment and/or system.

The following describes some common interference sources and remedial actions:

1.Strong electromagnetic interference from a nearby emitter source such as an authorized radio station or

cellular phone:

Install the equipment and/or system at another location if it is interfered with by an emitter source such

as an authorized radio station. Keep the emitter source such as cellular phone away from the equipment

and/or system.

2.Radio-frequency interference from other equipment through the AC power supply of the equipment and/

or system:

Identify the cause of this interference and if possible remove this interference source. If this is not

possible, use a different power supply.

3.Effect of direct or indirect electrostatic discharge:

Make sure all users and patients in contact with the equipment and/or system are free from direct or

indirect electrostatic energy before using it. A humid room can help lessen this problem.

4.Electromagnetic interference with any radio wave receiver such as radio or television:

If the equipment and/or system interferes with any radio wave receiver, locate the equipment and/or

system as far as possible from the radio wave receiver.

If the above suggested remedial actions do not solve the problem, consult your Nihon Kohden

Corporation subsidiary or distributor for additional suggestions.

The CE mark is a protected conformity mark of the European Community. The products herewith comply

with the requirements of the Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.

The CE mark is only applied to the EEG-1100K/G Electroencephalograph.

This equipment complies with EUROPEAN STANDARD EN-60601-1-2 (1993) which requires EN-55011,

class A when the JE-207A, JE-209A or JE-212A electrode junction box is used (when the JE-425A electrode

junction box is used; Class B). Class A EQUIPMENT is allowed in domestic establishments when used

under the jurisdiction of a health care professional.

iv Operator's Manual EEG-1100

Symbol Description Symbol Description

Main power on Alternative current

Main power off Equipotential ground terminal

Attention, consult operator’smanual

Serial number

Date of manufactureThe CE Mark is a protectedconformity mark of theEuropean Community. Theproducts herewith comply withthe requirements of the MedicalDevice Directive 93/42/EEC.

Conventions Used in this Manual and Instrument

Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Warnings, cautions and notes are used in this manual to alert or signal the reader to specific information.

WARNING

A warning alerts the user to the possible injury or death associated with the use or misuse of the

instrument.

CAUTIONA caution alerts the user to possible injury or problems with the instrument associated with its use or

misuse such as instrument malfunction, instrument failure, damage to the instrument, or damage to other

property.

NOTEA note provides specific information, in the form of recommendations, prerequirements, alternative

methods or supplemental information.

Explanations of the Symbols in this Manual and InstrumentThe following symbols found in this manual/instrument bear the respective descriptions as given.

Main unit

Operator's Manual EEG-1100 v

Main unit (inside)

PC unit

Symbols on the PC unit differ according to model. Refer to the Operator’s manual of the PC unit.


High voltage Protective graound


Standby (power on/off) Mouse connector

Reset Keyboard connector

Hard disk access lamp USB connector

Cover open Video connector

Headphone connector Network connector

Intensity control(CD-R/RW drive volomecontrol)

Audio jack (Microphone)

Eject button (CR-R/RW drive) Audio jack (LINE OUT)

Printer port Audio jack (LINE IN)

Serial portAttention, consult operator’smanual

vi Operator's Manual EEG-1100

Electrode junction box

Flash lamp assembly

On screen

For the symbols of the following equipments, refer to each Operator’s manual.

• Display

• Magneto-optical disk drive

• Laser printer

MinimizeMaximize Restore


Display of list boxWarning query that displays awarning or caution foroperation.

Scrolling of data, list and othersWarning message that displays awarning or caution for operationyou to do something.

Check boxWindow maximize/resizeminimize button

Option button Close button


Type CF applied partAttention, consult operator’smanual

Date of manufacture Serial number


Hot surfaceAttention, consult operator’smanual

Operator's Manual EEG-1100 vii

22 PG1 23 PG2

Z

9 O1 10 O2

1 FP1 2 FP2

19 FZ

24 CZ

20 PZ

3 F3

5 C3

7 P3

13 F7

15 T3

17 T5

12 A2

14 F8

16 T4

18 T6

4 F4

6 C4

8 P4

25 T1 26 T2

11 A1

Precautions for Input Jack Use

When the JE-425A Electrode Junction Box, or Optional JE-208A, JE-210A Mini JunctionBox is Used:

Checking electrode potentials for all active electrodes

Check the original electrode potential for all active electrodes by

programming a montage with the system reference electrode (Select

the 0 V button for reference electrode on the Montage dialog box).

Refer to “Programming Patterns” in Section 4.

The digital EEG displays the EEG waveform in each channel by

subtracting two electrode potentials selected to a montage. The

subtracted result will be incorrect, if the electrode attachment is not

correct, the original electrode potential is flat or unstable, or artifact is

superimposed on the original electrode potential. Omit the

measurement result if the displayed EEG waveform is incorrect.

NOTEDo not perform EEG measurement without the Z, C3, C4, A1 and A2 electrodes.

Use of input jack Z

Connect the lead from the electrode (Z electrode) attached on the patient’s nasion to the input jack Z on the electrode

junction box. The purpose of this input jack is to eliminate AC interference positively.

NOTEThe input jack Z is also used for checking electrode impedance.

Use of input jacks C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4)

Connect the leads from the electrodes attached on the positions C3 and C4 to the input jacks C3 and C4 respectively.

NOTE• The C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4) electrodes are the reference electrodes for EEG measurement.

• The input jacks C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4) must be attached for EEG measurement even when the C3

and C4 are not programmed in any montage.

Use of input jacks A1 and A2 (or FP1 and FP2, JE-425A only), C3 and C4 during skin-electrode

impedance check

When checking each electrode impedance, connect the leads from the electrode attached on the positions A1, A2, C3 and

C4 to the input jacks A1, A2, C3 and C4 respectively.

NOTE• The A1 and A2 (or FP1 and FP2, JE-425A only) electrodes are the reference electrodes for skin-

electrode impedance check.

• The input jacks A1 and A2 (or FP1 and FP2, JE-425A only) in addition to the Z, C3 and C4 (or F3 and

F4) must be attached for the electrode impedance check.

Example: JE-425A Electrode junction box

viii Operator's Manual EEG-1100

When the Optional JE-213A Mini Junction Box is Used:

NOTEDo not perform EEG measurement without the Z, A5, A6, A11 and A12 electrodes.

Use of input jack Z

Connect the lead from the electrode (Z electrode) attached on the patient’s nasion to the input jack Z on the electrode

junction box. The purpose of this input jack is to eliminate AC interference positively.

NOTEThe input jack Z is also used for checking electrode impedance.

Use of input jacks A5 and A6 (or A3 and A4)

Connect the leads from the electrodes attached on the positions A5 and A6 to the input jacks A5 and A6 respectively.

NOTE• The A5 and A6 (or A3 and A4) electrodes are the reference electrodes for EEG measurement.

• The input jacks A5 and A6 (or A3 and A4) must be attached for EEG measurement even when the A5

and A6 are not programmed in any montage.

Use of input jacks A5 and A6, and A11 and A12 during skin-electrode impedance check

When checking each electrode impedance, connect the leads from the electrode attached on the positions A5, A6, A11

and A12 to the input jacks A5, A6, A11 and A12 respectively.

NOTE• The A11 and A12 electrodes are the reference electrodes for skin-electrode impedance check.

• The input jacks A11 and A12 in addition to the Z, A5 and A6 (or A3 and A4) must be attached for the

electrode impedance check.

Checking electrode potentials for all active electrodes

Check the original electrode potential for all active electrodes by programming a montage with the system reference

electrode (Select the 0 V button for reference electrode on the Montage dialog box). Refer to “Programming Patterns” in

Section 4.

The digital EEG displays the EEG waveform in each channel by subtracting two electrode potentials selected to a

montage. The subtracted result will be incorrect, if the electrode attachment is not correct, the original electrode

potential is flat or unstable, or artifact is superimposed on the original electrode potential. Omit the measurement result

if the displayed EEG waveform is incorrect.

Operator's Manual EEG-1100 1C.1

Section 1 General

Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 1.1

General Safety information ................................................................................................ 1.2

Features ............................................................................................................................. 1.9

General Functions and Screens ...................................................................................... 1.13

Disk Capacity ................................................................................................................... 1.16

Composition ..................................................................................................................... 1.18

Panel Descriptions ........................................................................................................... 1.19

Component Example ............................................................................................. 1.19

Main Unit ................................................................................................................ 1.20

PC Unit .................................................................................................................. 1.22

JE-425A Electrode Junction Box ........................................................................... 1.24

JE-207A/209A/JE-212A Electrode Junction Box (Option) ..................................... 1.25

JE-210A Electrode Junction Box (Option) ............................................................. 1.26

JE-208A Electrode Junction Box (Option) ............................................................. 1.27

JE-213A/214A Mini Junction Box (Option) ............................................................. 1.28

PV-102A Control Panel Unit (Option) ..................................................................... 1.29

How to Use Windows ....................................................................................................... 1.31

Using the Mouse .................................................................................................... 1.31

Basic Screen Explanation ...................................................................................... 1.32

Using a Menu......................................................................................................... 1.35

Using a Button ....................................................................................................... 1.36

Using a Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 1.36

1C.2 Operator's Manual EEG-1100


1. GENERAL

Operator's Manual EEG-1100 1.1

Introduction

The EEG-1100A/J/K/G Electroencephalograph is designed for both clinical and

research use. This electrocardiograph realizes the conventional EEG’s functions

and operations in a GUI (graphic user interface) environment. It provides powerful

data filing and easy operation.

The electrode junction box provides the photic isolation circuit to ensure patient’s

electrical safety. The acquired EEG waveforms is converted to digital signals and

sent to the PC unit. In the PC unit, an advanced DSP (digital signal processor)

reproduces the EEG waveforms.

The acquired EEG waveforms with patient information are saved in a large

capacity media (hard disk or magneto-optical disk). This saves a lot of space and

reduces reachieving.

NOTEUse only Nihon Kohden recommended parts and accessories to

assure maximum performance from your instrument.

Trademarks

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

LaserJet is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

EIZO is a registered trademark of NANAO Corporation.

1. GENERAL

1.2 Operator's Manual EEG-1100

WARNING• Never use this instrument in the presence of any flammable

anesthetic gas or high-concentration oxygen atmosphere. Failure to

follow this warning may cause explosion or fire.

• Never use this instrument in a high-pressure oxygen medical tank.

Failure to follow this warning may cause explosion or fire.

Using with an electrical surgical unit (ESU)

• Never use this instrument near the ESU. The instrument may

malfunction due to high-frequency noise from the ESU.

• When using this instrument with an ESU, refer to the instruction

manual for the ESU. Before measurement, check that the return

plate is correctly attached to the patient and instrument operates

correctly when using with the ESU. If the return plate is not attached

correctly, it may burn the patient’s skin where the electrodes are

attached.

• Before using the ESU, remove all needle electrodes and silver ball

electrodes from the patient. Failure to follow this warning may cause

burn on the patient.

MRI examination

• Do not install this instrument in an MRI examination room. The

instrument may not operate properly due to high-frequency magnetic

noise from the MRI.

• When performing MRI tests, remove all electrodes and transducers

from the patient which are connected to this instrument. Failure to

follow this warning may cause serious electrical burn on the patient

due to local heating caused by dielectric electromotive force. For

details, refer to the instruction manual for the MRI.

When performing defibrillation

• Before defibrillation, remove from the patient all electrodes and

transducers which are connected to connectors that do not have a

“ ” or “ ” mark. Otherwise, the discharged energy may cause

serious electrical burn or shock to the operator.

• Before defibrillation, remove all electrodes and transducers from the

patient which are connected from this instrument. If the defibrillator

paddle directly contacts these materials, the discharged energy may

cause serious electrical burn to the patient.

• Before defibrillation, all persons must keep clear of the bed and must

not touch the patient or any equipment connected to the patient.

Failure to follow this warning may cause serious electrical burn,

shock or other injury.

General Safety information

1. GENERAL


WARNING• Only use the provided power cords. If another power cord is used, it

may cause electrical shock or other injury.

• For patient safety, equipotential grounding is required. Consult a

qualified biomedical engineer.

• Do not open the rear cover of the display or main unit because there

are a lot of high voltage components in the monitor. Failure to follow

this warning may cause serious electrical shock.

• When the instrument is turned on, about 600 V is present at pin 2 of

the PHOTIC LAMP connector. To protect against shock, always

connect the flash lamp assembly cable to this connector even when

the photic stimulation is not used.

Display

• The display must comply with the IEC950 standard and CISPR11

Second Edition 1990-09 Group 1 and Class B standard, or the

equivalent.

• Only supply AC power from a 3-prong AC outlet on the rear panel of

the main unit. Do not connect the display to a wall AC outlet. Failure

to follow this caution may cause electrical shock to the patient and

operator.

Magneto-optical disk drive

• The MO disk drive must comply with the IEC950 standard and

CISPR11 Second Edition 1990-09 Group 1 and Class B standard, or

the equivalent.

• Only supply AC power from a 3-prong AC outlet on the rear panel of

the main unit. Do not connect the MO disk drive to a wall AC outlet.

Failure to follow this caution may cause electrical shock to the

patient and operator.

Printer

• The printer must comply with the IEC950 standard and CISPR11

Second Edition 1990-09 Group 1 and Class B standard, or the

equivalent.

• Mount the printer on the KD-015A cart and only supply AC power from

a medical isolation transformer. Do not connect the printer to a wall

AC outlet. Failure to follow this caution may cause electrical shock to

the patient and operator.

• When the printer is not mounted on the cart, locate the printer outside

the patient environment (IEC60601-1-1 2.204*) and supply AC power

from a medical isolation transformer. Do not connect the printer to a

wall AC outlet. Failure to follow this warning may cause electrical

shock to the patient and operator.

Installation

* Patient environmentAny area in which intentional orunintentional contact betweenPATIENT and parts of SYSTEM orsome other persons touching of theSYSTEM can occur.

1. GENERAL


Warning - continued

• When using the JE-207A, JE-209A or JE-212A Electrode Junction Box,

the JE-208A, JE-210A, JE-213A or JE-214A Mini Junction Box must be

connected to the JE-207A, JE-209A or JE-212A Electrode Junction Box.

Failure to follow this warning may cause serious electrical shock or

other injury.

• Only connect the specified respiration pickup to the RESP F/C/A

connector on the electrode junction box

• Connect only the specified instruments to the connectors or socket

marked with , by following the specified procedure. Otherwise,

electrical leakage current may harm the patient and operator.

• When connecting an external instrument to the connectors marked

with , the external instrument and this instrument must be

connected according to the IEC-60601-1-1 “Medical electrical

equipment - Part 1-1: General requirements for safety - Collateral

standard: Safety requirements for medical electrical systems”.

Failure to follow this warning may cause electrical shock to the


Connecting to a Local Area Network

• When connecting the instrument to a local area network, connect the

instrument so that the instrument is electrically separated from the

local area network according to the IEC-60601-1-1 “Medical electrical





• Check that there is no damage on the surface of the network cable. If

it is damaged, it may cause electrical shock to the patient and

operator.

CAUTION• When connecting the cables, make sure that each instrument is turned

off.

• Only install the specified software in the instrument. Otherwise the

system may malfunction.

Cart

• Use only the KD-015A or KD-016A Cart for this instrument.

• Do not apply over 200 N force on the keyboard table of the cart. It may

break and cause injury.

1. GENERAL


Caution - continued

• When moving the instrument, select a flat path and move it carefully

to prevent the components from falling off or the cart from tipping

over.

Printer

• Use a printer cable which does not emit an unwanted radio frequency

signal (EMC protected).

• After printing, the inside of the printer becomes hot. Be careful not to

burn your fingers.

WARNING• When using the instrument for brain death diagnosis, before

examination, check and adjust the date and time of the system. The

date and time on the screen and on the recording result are part of

important information for the medical record.

• Do not connect the Z electrode lead plug to a ground or equipotential

ground. Otherwise, leakage current from another instrument cause

electrical shock to the patient.

• When any mini junction box is not used, make sure that the multiple

connecter cover is firmly attached to the electrode junction box.



• All activation testing must be applied under the supervision of the

physician in charge. Mouth gags, tongue depressors and gauze

sponges must always be prepared for use to prevent the patient from

biting his tongue or injuring himself during testing because any

pattern of flash stimuli may induce seizure activity.

• When performing the photic stimulation, If an abnormal waveform

appears due to photo-paroxymal response, stop the photic

stimulation immediately to prevent the patient from evoking seizure.

• Do not perform hyperventilation activation when the patient has

serious heart disease, acute cerebrovascular disease or respiratory

insufficiency.

When using the NE-224S Sub-dermal Straight Needle Electrode

• Do not use the NE-224S sub-dermal straight needle electrode as a

measurement electrode for the EEG or evoked potential measurement

for any longer than one hour. When measuring the EEG or evoked

potential for over one hour, use the EEG disk electrode.

Operation

1. GENERAL


Warning - continued

• Do not check the skin-electrode impedance when using a needle

electrode or intracranial electrode. Failure to follow this warning

injures the patient because these electrodes will be damaged by

electrolyzation inside the body.

CAUTION• During measurement, do not change the date and time. This makes

the order of the saved event data and the time of the saved waveforms

incorrect.

• Do not use the photic stimulator continuously over 5 minutes in any

mode. When photic stimulation is performed for a long time, the flash

lamp assembly gets very hot and causes burn if touched. If the photic

stimulator is continuously used for 5 minutes, do not use it for at least

20 minutes to let it cool down.

• Do not turn the instrument off when the program is running.

When turning instrument off, follow the procedure in “Power Off

Procedure” in Section 2.

• Do not delete any file in the hard disk. Otherwise the instrument may

malfunction.

• Do not remove the optical disk or magneto-optical disk until the disk

drive access lamp is off. Otherwise, the disk or disk drive may be

damaged.

• Periodically back up the EEG data files to prevent sudden lose of the

data when the hard disk or MO disk is damaged.

NOTE• If any static electricity enters the electrode junction box or serial

input terminal, spike noise may be superimposed on the waveform.

• If static electricity is applied to the connector for the optional

hyperventilation unit, pulse noise may be superimposed on the

waveform of the mark channel.

• When using the instrument in a high-frequency electric field, the

displayed waveform trace may be thicker.

1. GENERAL


CAUTIONTurn off the power before cleaning or disinfecting. Otherwise you may

get an electrical shock or the instrument may malfunction.

Floppy Disk/CD-ROM DiskHandling and Storing WARNING

The QP-0037 EEG-1100/QP-111/QP-112 System Program is protected

by copyright law and international treaties. Unauthorized

reproduction or distribution of this software, or any portion of it, may

result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to

the maximum extent possible under law.

CAUTION• Keep floppy disks away from strong magnetic objects such as a

magnet, TV set or speaker. Otherwise, data in the disk may be lost.

• Do not insert or remove a disk while the lamp on the disk unit is lit.

• Do not touch the disk surface of the recorded side (CD-ROM: opposite

side of the label side). If the surface of the disk becomes

contaminated with any foreign substances such as fingerprints,

reading data may be impossible.

• Keep the disk away from direct sunlight and high temperature.

Otherwise, the disk may become deformed.

• Do not handle the disk while smoking or eating.

• Do not get the disk wet.

• Do not put a label on top of another label. Remove the old label

before applying a new label.

• Do not write on the label after the label is attached on the disk.

Otherwise, the disk may be damaged and reading may be impossible.

• Do not bend the disk, put heavy material on the disk, or give a strong

impact to the disk.

• Clean the disk with a disk cleaner. Do not use organic solvents such

as acetone.

• This CD–ROM is not an audio CD and cannot be played with an audio

CD player.

Disinfecting or Sterilizing

1. GENERAL


NOTE• When using the EEG-1100 application program, close all other

programs. Otherwise, the System Program may not function properly.

• Turn off any screen saver before opening the EEG-1100 application

program.

1. GENERAL


Features

Acquiring the EEG waveforms 1. Variety of Electrode Junction Boxes

• 10-20 type JE-425A Electrode junction box

This junction box has 41 electrode jacks: 25 electrode jacks in the electrode

position layout, 11 multi-purpose input jacks, 3 RESP jacks, 2 BN jacks.

• JE-207A Electrode junction box (Option)

Up to 64 electrode jacks can be used by combining a 10-20 type JE-208A

mini junction box or matrix type JE-213A mini junction box (option).


Up to 128 electrode jacks can be used by combining a 10-10 type JE-210A

mini junction box (option), or matrix type JE-213A mini junction box

(option) and JE-214A mini junction box (option).


Up to 192 electrode jacks can be used by combining a matrix type JE-213A

mini junction box and two matrix type JE-214A mini junction boxes.

The JE-207A, JE-209A and JE-212A electrode junction box converts the

acquired EEG waveforms to digital signals at sampling speeds of up to 10

kHz. The input impedance is 200 MΩ and CMRR is 110 dB.

2. One-touch Selection of Measurement Conditions

You can assign different measurement conditions to 36 different patterns. A

pattern includes the preset montage, amplifier settings and waveform settings.

Waveform settings are position, display on/off, color, amplitude limit and

comment for waveform. Selecting different patterns lets you quickly and

easily set up the desired measurement conditions.

3. Easy Electrode-skin Impedance Check and Electrode Lead Check

You can check all electrodes for electrode-skin impedance by pressing the

IMPEDANCE CHECK key on the electrode junction box or clicking the

Impedance check button on the screen. The impedance check results are

indicated on the electrode position layout on the electrode junction box and

screen.

An electrode lead check function is provided in the JE-425A electrode junction

box and optional JE-207A/209A/212A electrode junction box.

Mini junction box (Number of electrode jacks) Total number of electrode jacks

JE-207A JE-208A (64) or JE-213A (64) 64

JE-209A JE-210A (128), or JE-213A (64) and JE-214A (64) 128

JE-212A JE-213A (64) and two JE-214A (64) 192

1. GENERAL


4. Variety of Reference (Monopolar) Derivations

Easy switching from same-side hemispheric earlobe derivation (standard) to

single-side hemispheric earlobe (A1 → A2, A1 ← A2, A1 ↔ A2, A1 + A2),

vertex (VX), averaged (AV), balanced non-cephalic (BN), source derivation

(SD) or an original (Org) reference derivation. The original reference (Org)

switches all A1 and A2 to the averaged voltage of C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4)

(system reference potential).

5. Versatile Photic Stimulator

Three preset photic stimulation programs for adults and children for routine

and special use. Single, double and random pulse stimulation are also

available.

6. ECG Rejection Filter

This filter reduces ECG artifact superimposed on the EEG waveforms. This

filter is available during both waveform acquisition and review.

7. 64 Channel EEG Waveform Display with Various Information

Up to 64 channels of 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 second or 5 minute waveforms can

be simultaneously displayed on a high resolution color monitor. Time marks,

time scale, marker channel, montage name, montage map window and events

can also be displayed on the screen. You can also change the waveform color

and amplitude limit for specific channels, or turn the waveform display on/off.

8. Waveform Annotation (Attaching Event Names)

While acquiring the EEG waveforms, you can annotate the EEG waveforms

with an event name from the preset event list or with the keyboard. Also when

you change the pattern, the pattern name is automatically entered. The event

names (annotations) are displayed beside the EEG waveforms and saved with

the waveforms as an event.

9. Waveform Amplitude and Time Interval Measurement

The amplitude, frequency and time interval of the EEG waveforms can be

automatically measured by vertical and horizontal cursors when the waveforms

are frozen.

10. External Signal Input and Analog signal Output

When the optional QA-101A Analog input board and/or QD-101A Analog

output board is installed, up to 32 channel of analog signals can be input and/or

output.

11. Long Term EEG Waveform Monitoring

The long term monitoring function lets you save up to 52 GB (2 GB × 26

stages) of EEG waveforms in different storage medias. When the optional QP-

224A Serial interface board (analog video link) or QP-110AK Digital video

software (digital video link) is installed, you can save the patient image during

long term EEG waveform monitoring. The optional QP-251AK Spike

Detection Software can be used in the long term monitoring (online spike

detection).

1. GENERAL


Reviewing the EEG waveforms 1. File Management

The EEG data files with patient information and volume name of the disk are

automatically registered in the database. To review EEG data, you can search

for a data file by several methods: patient name, ID number, examination date,

or any combination of search items and in a specified range.

2. Calling Up and Displaying Specific Waveforms

You can call up any saved waveform by a variety of methods. For example, if

you specify a specific event name, a waveform which contains the specified

event name is displayed on the screen.

You can display any part of the waveform by clicking on the event jump bar.

3. Re-format and Re-filtering

You can review waveforms and data using different montage settings, amplifier

settings (sensitivity, high-cut filter, time constant), and display speeds. (The

raw data originally sampled is saved in the referential format.)

4. Variety of Review Modes

• Review the waveforms at the acquisition display speed. (IRIG output is

available in this mode.)

• Review the waveforms forward or backward at high speed.

• Scroll the displayed waveforms forward or backward one second.

• Scroll the displayed waveforms forward or backward one page.

• Move the specified waveform to the center.

5 Event Name (Annotation) Editing

While reviewing waveforms, you can add, delete, and change the event names.

6. Complete, High-quality Documentation with a Laser Printer

You can print the currently displayed waveforms, or any part of the EEG

waveforms with event log and patient information on the laser printer (locally

purchased).

7. EEG Data File Compatibility

The EEG data files saved in EEG-2110, EEG-9100 digital EEG, digital EEG

system (PC with the QP-111AJ/AK, QP-223A/AK acquisition program kit) can

be reviewed in this digital EEG.

8. DSA Trendgraph

The instrument analyzes the EEG waveform data to examine the frequency

components and displays amplitude for each frequency as a DSA (Density

Spectral Array) trendgraph on the review screen and EEG Scope - Comparison

mode. The DSA trendgraph let you easily find the EEG waveforms when

epileptic seizure occurs or a specific frequency band of the EEG waveform,

such as alpha wave, delta wave or spindles in sleep study.

9. Copying Part of Waveforms

You can copy any part of waveforms in the note waveform window and review

the waveforms while comparing with the copied waveforms.

1. GENERAL


• Combining EEG Data Files

During recording, if an EEG data file for a patient is accidentally saved as

separate different files, you can also append one EEG data file to another EEG

data file for a patient. When patient images are recorded, patient image files

can be appended. For the EEG data files that are measured with the long term

EEG monitoring function, you can continuously review these files by using a

long term monitoring information file. You do not have to combine these files.

1. Communication with an external instrument (networking) is optionally

available.

2. The EEG-1100 software is Windows compatible so you can copy the acquired

EEG waveforms and patient information to other Windows applications such

as word processors or spreadsheets.

• Sample EEG data files are provided in a CD-ROM with the system program

Communication

File Utility Program

Etc.

1. GENERAL


General Functions and Screens

Menu window (Section 3)

Acquisition screen (Section 5):

EEG measurement

Use this screen to acquire EEG waveforms

• Entering the patient information

• Checking the skin-electrode contact

impedance

• Recording the calibration waveforms.

The calibration mode and voltage can be

selected

• Acquiring the EEG waveforms

• Entering events

• Setting and performing the activation

(photic stimulation and hyperventilation)

• Using the timer

• Changing the pattern

• Changing the amplifier settings for all

channels

• Changing the amplifier settings for an

individual channel

• Changing the waveform display mode

• Changing the FFT analysis settings

• Measuring waveform amplitude and time

interval

• Using the AC filter and/or ECG filter

• Selecting and deleting the electrodes for

AV derivation

• Adjusting BN balance for BN derivation

• Temporarily changing the reference

electrode

• Saving the acquired EEG waveforms,

patient information and events in a file

• Selecting the FFT data analysis for a DSA

trendgraph

1. GENERAL


Review screen (Section 6):

EEG review

Use this screen to review, display and print the

saved waveforms

• Selecting the EEG file

• Displaying the waveform from a selected file

• Changing the waveform display mode

• Editing the events

• Changing the calibration voltage

• Entering events

• Changing the pattern

• Changing the amplifier settings for all

channels

• Changing the amplifier settings for an

individual channel

• Changing the FFT analysis settings

• Measuring waveform amplitude and time

interval

• Using the AC filter and/or ECG filter

• Selecting and deleting the electrodes for AV

derivation

• Adjusting BN balance for BN derivation

• Temporarily changing the reference electrode

• Selecting and printing parts of the waveforms

• Selecting and saving parts of the waveform in

a file

• Dispalying the DSA trendgraph

System Program (Section 4): Use the System program to change settings

• Selecting the electrode junction box.

• Programming the pattern

• Programming the automatic photic

stimulation mode

• Selecting the automatic EEG waveform

recording settings

• Selecting the long term EEG waveform

monitoring settings

• Editing the list of preset selectable items for

patient information records

• Changing the DC input settings

• Changing all settings to the default settings

• Changing the electrodes to be saved

• Changing the system settings

• Saving the system settings in a file

• Calling up the system settings stored in the

file

1. GENERAL


File Utility (Section 8): Use the File Utility to manage the saved EEG

data files

• Moving EEG data files from one drive to

another drive

• Copying EEG data files from one drive to

another folder or drive

• Deleting EEG data files from a drive

• Merging the EEG data files

• Adding the EEG data file to the system

database or network database

• Formatting a magneto-optical disk

• Assigning a volume number to a magneto-

optical disk

• Appending an EEG Data File to Another EEG

Data File

Database Manager: (Section 7) Use the Database Manager to manage the

database for EEG data files

• Saving an entire database or selected records

in a file

• Loading a database from a folder or drive to

append to the system database or network

database

• Appending all or selected records to the

system database or network database

• Deleting individual records from a database

• Searching and sorting records

• Printing the records in the database

1. GENERAL


Disk Capacity

The following tables show how long an EEG waveform data can be saved in a hard

disk, magneto-optical disk or CD-R disk. The file space to save an EEG data file

depends on the sampling frequency and the number of electrodes If either

decreases, the file capacity increases. For changing the sampling frequency and

the number of electrodes, refer to Section 4 “System Program”. The following

tables assume 30 minutes per patient recording for a file.

64 Electrodes and 2 Mark Channels


Sampling frequency

2,000 Hz 1,000 Hz 500 Hz 200 Hz

1 GB2.6 hours

(5.1 files)

5.1 hours

(10.3 files)

10.3 hours

(20.6 files)

25.7 hours

(51.4 files)

18 GB HD

(EEG-1100)

46.8 hours

(91.8 files)

91.8 hours

(185.4 files)

185.4 hours

(370.8 files)

462.6 hours

(925.2 files)

680 MB CD-R1.7 hours

(3.4 files)

3.4 hours

(7.0 files)

7.0 hours

(14 files)

17.4 hours

(34.9 files)

4.1 GB MO10.5 hours

(21.1 files)

21.1 hours

(42.2 files)

42.2 hours

(84.4 files)

105.5 hours

(210.9 files)

Sampling frequency

2,000 Hz 1,000 Hz 500 Hz 200 Hz

1 GB1.1 hours

(2.1 files)

2.1 hours

(4.2 files)

4.2 hours

(8.4 files)

10.5 hours

(21.0 files)

18 GB HD

(EEG-1100)

19.8 hours

(37.8 files)

37.8 hours

(75.6 files)

75.6 hours

(151.2 files)

189 hours

(378 files)


(1.4 files)

1.4 hours

(2.8 files)

2.8 hours

(5.7 files)

7.1 hours

(14.2 files)

4.1 GB MO4.3 hours

(8.6 files)

8.6 hours

(17.3 files)

17.3 hours

(34.5 files)

43.1 hours

(86.3 files)

No. of saved electrodes and mark channels × Sampling frequency × 2 bytes × 60 s × 60 min

Disk capacity (bytes)

Recording time (hours) =

1. GENERAL


192 Electrodes

Sampling frequency

1,000 Hz 500 Hz 200 Hz 100 Hz

1 GB0.7 hours

(1.4 files)

1.4 hours

(2.9 files)

3.6 hours

(7.2 files)

7.2 hours

(14.5 files)

18 GB HD

(EEG-1100)

12.6 hours

(25.2 files)

25.2 hours

(52.2 files)

64.8 hours

(129.6 files)

129.6 hours

(261 files)


(0.9 files)

0.9 hours

(1.9 files)

2.4 hours

(4.8 files)

4.8 hours

(9.8 files)

4.1 GB MO3.0 hours

(5.9 files)

5.9 hours

(11.9 files)

14.8 hours

(29.7 files)

29.7 hours

(59.3 files)

1. GENERAL


Composition

The following components are required for operation.

• PC unit, CC-0018

• Main unit, CA-0050 (100 V) or CA-0051 (200 V)

• Display (17 inch, locally purchased, EIZO T57S or compatible)

• Electrode junction box, JE-425A

• Electrode junction box stand, KC-001A

• Flash lamp assembly, LS-703AA

• Flash lamp stand, KC-001A

• Laser printer (locally purchased, HP LaserJet 4100 series recommended)

• Medical isolation transformer for the laser printer (locally purchased, SM-310V

or compatible)

• Cart, KD-015A or 016A (option)

Use only the following magneto-optical disk and drive models. Other models my

not function properly.

• Magneto-optical disk drive:SONY model RMO-S551/S

• Magnet-optical disk: SONY model, 512 bytes/sector

1. GENERAL


Panel Descriptions

Component Example

Cart, KD-015A(option)

Control panel unit,PV-110A (option)

MO disk unit,QM-210A (option)

Main unit,CA-0050 (100 V)CA-0051 (200 V)

Electrode junctionbox, JE-425A

Display

Mouse

Keyboard

PC unit,CC-0018

Laser printer

(Locally purchase)

Cart, KC-001A

1. GENERAL


Main Unit

WARNINGConnect only the specified instruments to the connectors or socket marked with , by following the

specified procedure. Otherwise, electrical leakage current may harm the patient and operator.

Name Functions

1. Power indicator Lights while the main power is on.

2. Power switch Turns the main power on/off.

3. AC SOURCE socket Connects the power cord to supply AC power to the instrument.

4. Fuse holder Contains the power line protection fuses. To replace the fuse, turn the holder

counterclockwise with a 4 mm flat blade screw driver and remove it.

FUSE

10ATIME LAG

AC SOURCE

EXTOUTPUT

DCINPUT

RECDATA

DSP

PANEL

PHOTIC LAMP

RECORDER

HV

IMP 100k0MAX +5V

INPUTTRIGGER

MAX CUR 15mAMAX +5VOUTPUTTRIGGER

PC INTHIS OUTLET

ONLYMAX 270VA

TOTALMAX 450VA

1 2

3

4

5

15

14

13

6 7

8

910

11

12

Front RearRight side

CAUTIONFuses cut the power off when an abnormality occurs in the

instrument. Eliminate the malfunction before replacing the fuse. Use

the correct fuse only. The fuse rating is shown on the holder.

1. GENERAL


Name Function

5. Equipotential ground Connect this terminal to the equipotential ground terminal on the wall with the

terminal. ground lead when the equipotential grounding is required to ensure electrical safety.

6. DSP connector Connects to the DSP connector on the PC unit.

7. PANEL connector Connects to the optional PV-102A Operation panel.

8. 3 prong AC outlet Connects the power cord of the PC unit, display and MO disk drive. These outlets

are isolated. Maximum power supply: 450 VA. Connect the PC unit’s power cord

to the first outlet labeled “PC IN THIS OUTLET ONLY”.

9. INPUT TRIGGER jack Inputs a trigger signal from an external instrument to activate the photic stimulation.

10. OUTPUT TRIGGER jack Outputs a photic stimulation trigger signal to an external instrument in phase with a

flash lamp.

11. PHOTIC LAMP connector Connects to the photic flash lamp assembly.

12. HV connector For the optional hyperventilation unit.

13. DC INPUT connector Inputs analog signals from an external instrument (on the optional QA-101A

Analog input board). When connecting the external instrument, attach the ferrite

core to the D-sub connection cable near the DC INPUT connector to reduce un-

wanted radio frequency interference.

14. EXT OUTPUT connector Output analog signals to an external instrument (on the optional QD-101A Analog

output board). When connecting the external instrument, attach the ferrite core to

the D-sub connection cable near the EXT OUTPUT connector to reduce unwanted

radio frequency interference.

15. REC DATA connector Not used. (on the optional QD-101A Analog output board)

CAUTIONDo not connect the laser printer’s power cord to the main unit’s 3-

prong AC outlet because the laser printer has a high power

consumption. Connect the laser printer to a medical isolation

transformer.

WARNINGWhen the instrument is turned on, about 600 V is present at pin 2. To

protect against shock, always connect the flash lamp cable to this

connector even when the photic stimulation is not used.

1. GENERAL


Name Functions

1. CD-ROM drive For a CD-ROM.

2. CD-ROM eject button Slides out the CD-ROM tray to insert or remove a disk.

3. Floppy disk drive Saves or retrieves data in/from a floppy disk.

4. PC power switch Turns the PC unit on/off.

5. Hard disk access LED Lights while data is being written to or read from the hard disk.

12

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

PC Unit

CAUTIONDo not turn the power off while the program is running or hard disk

access LED lights. Failure to follow this caution may damage the

hard disk.

1. GENERAL


Name Functions

6. AC socket Connects to the first 3-prong AC outlet on the main unit with the AC power cord to

supply AC power to the PC unit.

7. Printer port Connects to the printer (locally purchased)

8. Mouse connector Connects to the mouse.

9. Keyboard connector Connects to the keyboard.

10. Control panel unit connector Connects to the optional PV-102A Control panel unit.

11. Video connector Connects to the display.

12. SCSI connector Connects the optional or locally purchased magneto-optical disk drive.

13. Electrode junction box Connects the electrode junction box.

connector

CAUTIONConnect or disconnect the junction box only when the power is

turned off.

14. DSP connector Connect to the DSP connector on the main unit.

15. EXT MARK jack Connects the marker cord (standard accessory) for recording the mark.

1. GENERAL


JE-425A Electrode Junction Box

22 PG1 23 PG2

Z

9 O1 10 O2

1 FP1 2 FP2

19 FZ

24 CZ

20 PZ

3 F3

5 C3

7 P3

13 F7

15 T3

17 T5

12 A2

14 F8

16 T4

18 T6

4 F4

6 C4

8 P4

25 T1 26 T2

11 A1

X1 X3 X5 X7

X2 X4 X6 X8

X9 X11 BN1

X10 BN2

2 5 10 20 50

IMPEDANCE CHECK

LEAD CHECK

X1 X3 X5 X7

X2 X4 X6 X8

X9 X11 BN1

X10 BN2

PATIENT CONNECTION ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED

RESPA(X11)

RESPC(X10)

RESPF(X9)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

89

Name Function

1. Impedance display LED After the skin-electrode contact impedance check, a lit LED indicates an electrode

impedance higher than the preset value.

2 Impedance preset key Selects a preset impedance (threshold) for evaluation. The LED indicates the

selected impedance.

3. Impedance check key Measures skin-electrode contact impedance at the electrode junction box. Press for

about one second. The check result is displayed on the screen and a lit LED on the

electrode junction box indicates an electrode impedance higher than the preset

value.

4. LEAD CHECK terminal Checks the electrode lead wire. Plug the lead tip into the electrode jack and touch

the electrode to this terminal. If the lead wire is broken, the LED does not light.

5. Z jack Reduces the artifact when the electrode for Z on the patient is connected to the Z

jack. Be sure to attach the Z electrode to the patient during measurement.

6. Electrode jack Connects the EEG disk electrode.

7. RESP jack Connects the thermistor pickup (option) or 3 port respiration pickup system (option)

for measuring the respiration waveforms.

8. BN Jack Use in BN reference derivation.

9. Extra input jack Inputs biological signals other than the EEG.

NOTEThe X9 to X11 jacks and the RESP jacks cannot be used

simultaneously.

1. GENERAL


Name Function

1. Impedance display LED After the skin-electrode contact impedance check, a lit LED indicates an electrode

impedance higher than the preset value.

2. A, B, C SELECTOR Selects the electrode jack group. The JE-209A and JE-212A Electrode junction box

only.

3. 2, 5, 10, 20 50 Ω SELECTOR Selects a preset impedance (threshold) for evaluation. The LED indicates the

selected impedance.

4. Impedance check key Measures skin-electrode contact impedance at the electrode junction box. Press for

about one second. The check result is displayed on the screen and a lit LED on the

electrode junction box indicates an electrode impedance higher than the preset

value.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A

2

B C11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

10

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

61 52 63 64 Z

5 10 20 50

JE-207A/209A/JE-212A Electrode Junction Box (Option)

WARNINGWhen using the JE-207A, JE-209A or JE-212A Electrode junction box, the JE-208A, JE-210A, JE-

213A or JE-214A Mini junction box must be connected to the electrode junction box. Failure to

follow this warning may cause serious electrical shock or other injury.

12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

10

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

61 52 63 64 Z

5 10 20 50

3

4

3

4

1

JE-207A JE-209A/212A

1. GENERAL


Name Function





4. BIP jack For bipolar deviation. Use this jack to measure the limb electromyograph.




JE-210A Electrode Junction Box (Option)

Z

Nz

PG1

B57

X1A26

X2A27

X3A28

X4A29

X5A30

X6A31

X7A32

X8A33

X9A34

X10A35

X11A36

X12A39

X13A40

X14A41

X15A42

X16A43

X17A44

X18A45

X19A46

X20A47

X21A48

X22A49

X23A50

X24A51

X25A52

X26A53

X27A54

X28A55

X39A56

X30A57

X31A58

X32A59

X33A60

X38B1

X39B2

X40B3

X41B4

X42B5

X43B6

X44B7

X45B8

X46B9

X47B10

BN1A37

BIP1(+) BIP2(+) BIP3(+) BIP4(+)

BN2RESPA(X11)

RESPC(X10)

RESPF(X9)

A38BIP1(-) BIP2(-) BIP3(-) BIP4(-)X34A61

X35A62

X36A63

X37A64

FpzB58

AFzB59AF3

B21AF7B39

FzA19

F1B11F5

B29F9B47

FCzB60

FC1B13FC3

B23FC5B31FT7

B41FT9B49

T9B51

C5B33

C1B15

C2B16

C6B34

T10B52

CPzB61

POzB62

OzB63

IzB64

A22

Fp1A1

F3A3F7

A13

PO3B27

PO7B45

P1B19

P5B37

P9B55

CP1B17

CP3B25

CP5B35

TP7B43

TP2B53

O1A9

P3A7

P7A17

T1A24

A1A11

T7A15

A2A12

T8A34

C4A6

CzA20

C3A5

PG2

AF4B22 AF8

B40

F2B12 F6

B30F10B48

FC2B14 FC4

B24 FC6B32 FT8

B42 FT10B50

A23

Fp2A2

F4A4 F8

A14

PO4B28

PO8B46

P2B20

P6B38

P10B56

CP2B18

CP4B26

CP6B36

TP8B44

TP10B54

O2A10

P4A8

P8A18

T2A25

PzA21

L R

1 2

3

4

56


simultaneously.

1. GENERAL


JE-208A Electrode Junction Box (Option)

CZ

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 +BP1

-

X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 X18 X19 X20 +BP2

-

X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27 X28 X29 X30 +BP3

-

X31 X32 X33 BN1 BN2 +BP4

-

RESPA(X11)

RESPC(X10)

RESPF(X9)

PG1

T2

Z PG2

T2

FP2FP1

F7 F3 FZ F4 F8

C4 T4 A2A1 T3 C3

T5 P3 PZ P4 T6

O1 O2

L R

1 2

3

4

5

6

Name Function







5. BIP jack For bipolar deviation. Use this jack to measure the limb electromyograph.



simultaneously.

1. GENERAL


JE-213A/214A Mini Junction Box (Option)

Name Function


2. Z jack (JE-213A only) Reduces the artifact when the electrode for Z on the patient is connected to the Z


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

61 62 63 64 Z

1

2

1. GENERAL


NOTEThe following keys and controls on the control panel unit are available only when the acquisition

program is running.

Name Functions

1. Function key Enters an event. An event name is assigned to each function key.

ALL CHANNEL CONTROL The amplifier settings for all channels are changed together.

2. REFERENCE key Selects the reference electrode.

3. Org key Displays the EEG waveforms with the original reference derivation. This function is

available only for monopolar derivation. All A1 and A2 electrodes are switches to

the averaged voltage of C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4).

4. PATTERN TABLE key Displays the currently selected pattern table.

5. PATTERN SELECTOR key Selects the pattern. The LED indicates the selected pattern.

6. TIME CONSTANT key Select the time constant. The LED indicates the selected time constant.

7. HI FREQ. FILTER key Select the high-cut filter. The LED indicates the selected high-cut filter.

8. SENSITIVITY selector Selects the sensitivity. The LED indicates the selected sensitivity.

PV-102A Control Panel Unit (Option)

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12

ALL CHANNEL CONTROL

REFERENCE

OFF A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 VX SD

PATTERN SELECTOR

I II III IV V VI VII VIII FREEA B C D

0.03 0.1 0.3 1.0 s OTHER

TIME CONSTANT

15 30 60 120Hz 50RAPID OTHER

HI FREQ.FILTER

PHOTO / HV

RESET CAL

AC FILTERIMPEDANCE

CHECK

PHOTO(Hz)

HV ( S )

OTHER

10

17550

3020 15 7 5

32

AV BN Aav Org

START / STOP PATTERN/ TABLE

5.3 1.6 0.53 0.16 Hz

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

1. GENERAL


Name Function

9. IMPEDANCE CHECK key Measures the skin-electrode contact impedance. The check result is displayed on

the Impedance Check dialog box in the screen. To close the Impedance Check

dialog box, press the key again.

10. AC FILTER key Turns the AC filter on/off. The LED lights while the AC filter is on.

11. CAL key Displays the calibration waveforms on the screen. The LED lights while the calibra-

tion waveforms are displayed. To measure the EEG waveforms, press the key again.

PHOTO/HV Section

12. Activation value selection dial Increases or decreases the activation setting value.

13. Activation mode selection key Selects the activation mode. The LED indicates the selected activation mode.

14. Activation value indicator Displays the selected activation setting value.

15. START/STOP key Starts the selected activation. To stop the activation, press the key again.

16. Reset key Return the step of the automatic photic stimulation to the first step.

1. GENERAL


How to Use Windows

Using the Mouse

This section briefly explains how to use Windows. For a detailed explanation, refer

to your Windows manual. With the mouse, you can do all operations to measure,

review and print the EEG waveforms.

Mouse Pointer:

When you move the mouse on the desk, the mouse pointer (arrow-shaped cursor on

the screen) follows the movement of the mouse. The mouse pointer indicates

which area of the screen will be affected when you press the mouse button.

Mouse Buttons

• Left mouse button:

Select measurement condition or settings, or execute an action.

• Right mouse button:

Alternates the selection of two cursors for the Voltage cursors, Time cursors, or

Ruler when you measure waveform amplitude or time (duration). When clicked

on the EEG waveform, the Event dialog box appears.

Mouse Button Operations

• Click

Quickly press and release the left mouse button. Use this operation to select

measurement condition or settings.

• Click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession. Use this operation to

open an icon or execute an action.

• Drag

Press and hold down the left mouse button while you move the mouse. Use this

operation to change the waveform display position or change the size of a

window.

1. GENERAL


Basic Screen Explanation

• Window:

A rectangular box which contains icons or functions for an

application or document.

• Icons:Icons are small pictures that representapplications or documents. To start anapplication, double click its icon withthe mouse. The EEG 1000 windowcontains the Acquisition icon, Reviewicon, System icon, File Utility icon and

Database Manager icon.

• Control menu box:

To resize, move, maximize, minimize, or close a window, open the Control menu box by clicking it once. If you double-

click the Control-menu box, the window closes or the window is restored to the icon.

When you open the Control menu, a pull down menu with the following commands appears. (Some applications do not

have all these commands.)

Commands in the Control menu

Restore: Restores the window to its previous size after you have enlarged it or reduced it to an icon.

Move: Moves the window to another position with the keyboard. You can also move the window with the mouse.

Size: Changes the size of the window with the keyboard or mouse.

Minimize: Reduces the window to a button on the taskbar. (Same function as Minimize button.)

Maximize: Enlarges the window to its maximum size. (Same function as Maximize button.)

Close: Closes the window or dialog box. (From an application window, you can use this command to quit the

application.)

1. GENERAL


• Start button:

The start button appears at the bottom left of the screen. To open

the Start menu, click the start button. The following Start menu

appears.

(The way the Start button is displayed on the screen can be

changed. Please refer to Windows Online Help.)

Programs: Displays a list of the programs you can start.

Documents: Displays a list of the most recently used documents

you can reopen.

Settings: Displays a list of the PC system configuration items

(Control Panel or Printers, etc.).

Search: Searches for files by entering information about it.

Help: Opens the Help window for Windows operation.

Run: Opens a program, document or folder by entering

the name of it.

Log off: Logs off from Windows.

Shut down: Shuts down the computer, restarts the computer,

restarts the computer in MS-DOS mode or closes all

applications and logs on with another user ID.

• Taskbar:

All the applications that are running appear as buttons on the taskbar which appears at the bottom of the

screen with the Start button. To reactive an application, click its button in the taskbar. To reduce an

application to a button on the taskbar, click the Minimize button.

(The way the taskbar is displayed on the screen can be changed. Please refer to Windows Online Help.)

• Title bar:

Shows the name of the application or document. If more than one window is

open, the characters of the title bar for the active window (the one which you are

working in) are white. The characters of the title bars for the other inactive

windows are dimmed.

• Menu bar:

Lists the available menus. A menu contains a

list of commands or actions you can execute.

Refer to “Using a Menu”.

• Amp bar/Tool bar :

Consists of a row of buttons beneath the

Menu bar. By simply clicking a button in the

Amp bar or Tool bar, you can instantly

execute any of a wide variety of settings or

operations.

• Pull down menu:

Lists commands or actions you can execute

with Windows.

1. GENERAL


• Close button:

Exits the program of the active application window.

• Maximize/Restore button:

Enlarges the active application window so that it fills the entire screen. After

you enlarge a window, the Maximize button is replaced by the Restore button.

By clicking the Restore button, you can return the window to its previous size.

• Minimize button:

Reduces the window to a button on the taskbar. By clicking the button on the

taskbar, you can return the window to its previous size.

Moving a window

You can move any window to a different location on the screen by using the

Control menu box or mouse.

To move a window with the mouse:

1. Drag the title bar of the window to the new location. As you move the mouse

pointer, the window moves with it.

2. Release the mouse button.

To cancel the move, press the ESC key before you release the mouse button.

Move the mouse pointer

1. GENERAL


Using a Menu

ALT or F10

← →or

or ↓

andALT F

Example to open the File pull down

menu

or↑ ↓

↵

To open a menu

With the mouse:

Move the mouse pointer to the name of the menu on the menu

bar, then click it. This opens a pull down menu or a dialog

box. From the pull down menu or the dialog box you can

execute a command.

With the keyboard:

1. Press the ALT or F10 key to select (highlight) the menu bar.

2. Press the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW key to select the menu you want.

3. Press the ENTER key or DOWN ARROW key to open the selected menu.

If a name in the menu bar has an underlined letter:

Press the ALT key and an underlined letter key simultaneously to open the pull

down menu.

To execute a command in the menu

With the mouse:

From the selected menu, click the command.

With the keyboard:

Type the letter that is underlined in the command name.

Or use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys until you reach the command that

you want to execute, then press the ENTER key.

1. GENERAL


ALT or F10

ESC

Using a Button

Using a Dialog Box

Scroll arrow Scroll box

List box Scroll bar Button

To close a menu

With the mouse:

Click the menu name or anywhere outside the menu.

With the keyboard:

Press ALT or F10 key to cancel the menu and move back to the application

workspace.

Or press ESC key to close the menu but remain on the menu bar so that you can

select another menu.

You can execute an operation by clicking the button.

A dialog box appears when you select certain menu items. An ellipsis (...) after a

menu command indicates that a dialog box will be displayed when you execute that

command.

The program displays a dialog box either to request information about an operation

that you are now performing or to supply information that you might need.

Dialog box options

• Scroll arrow, scroll box and scroll bar:

You can move through text (up or down) to see parts of the file or list.

1. GENERAL


• List boxes:

A list box displays a list of choices. If there are more choices than can fit in the

box, scroll bars are provided so you can quickly move through the list.

• Button:

You can start an operation by clicking the button.

To execute a button

With the mouse:

Click the command button.

With the keyboard:

1. Press the TAB key to move to the button you want. A dark border marks the

selected button.

2. Press the SPACE BAR or ENTER key.

• Option buttons:

Option buttons represent mutually exclusive options. You can select only one

option at a time. The selected option button contains a black dot. Unavailable

options are dimmed.

Option buttons

Selection list box

To scroll Action

One line up or down Click the up or down scroll arrow.

One screen Click the scroll bar above or below the scroll box on

the vertical scroll bar.

Continuously Point to one of the scroll arrows, and hold down the

mouse button until the information you want comes

into view.

To any position Drag the scroll box in the scroll bar to the position

you wand. The section of the list that moves into

view according to where you position the scroll box.

1. GENERAL


To select an option button

With the mouse:

Click the option button.

With the keyboard:

1. Press the TAB key to move the cursor to the group of options you want.

2. Select the option button you want with the arrow keys.

If the option button has an underlined letter:

Type the underlined letter while pressing and holding down the ALT key.

• Selection list box:

The current selection is displayed in the selection list box. When you click the

arrow following the list box, a list of available choices appears.

To open a selection list box and select an item

With the mouse:

1. Click the arrow following the list box.

2. Click the up or down scroll arrow. Or drag the scroll box to move the cursor to

the item you want.

3. Click the item.

With the keyboard:

NOTEBe sure the NUM LOCK key is turned off.

1. Press the TAB key to move the cursor to the selection list box.

2. Press the ALT key and DOWN ARROW key together to open the box.

3. Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to move the selection cursor to

the item you want.

4. Press the ALT key and UP ARROW key together or the ALT key and DOWN

ARROW key together to select it.

1. GENERAL


• Check box:

A check box next to an option means you can select or clear the option. You can

select as many check box options as needed. When a check box is selected, it

contains a “3” mark. Names of unavailable options are dimmed.

To select or clear a check box

With the mouse:

Click a blank check box to select it.

To clear the selected check box, click it.

With the keyboard:

1. Press the TAB key to move the cursor to the check box you want to select or

clear.

2. Press the SPACE BAR to select the box.

Press the SPACE BAR again to clear the selected check box.

If the option name has an underlined letter:

Press and hold down the ALT key while typing the underlined letter to select or

clear the check box.

• Text box:

You can type information into a text box. When you click a text box, an insertion

point (flashing vertical bar) appears. The text you type starts at the insertion point.

If the box you want to type already contains text, you can replace it. To delete

existing text, press the DEL or BACKSPACE key.

Text box

Check box

1. GENERAL




Section 2 Installation

Instrument Location ........................................................................................................... 2.1

Setting the Components on the Cart .................................................................................. 2.3

Cable Connection .............................................................................................................. 2.4

Connecting the PC Unit to the Main Unit ................................................................. 2.6

Connecting the MO Disk Drive (Unit) ....................................................................... 2.6

Connecting the Display ............................................................................................ 2.6

Connecting the Electrode Junction Box ................................................................... 2.6

Connecting the Flash Lamp Assembly .................................................................... 2.7

Connecting the Laser Printer ................................................................................... 2.7

Connecting the Power Cord ............................................................................................... 2.8

Connecting the Power Cord ..................................................................................... 2.8

Equipotential Grounding .......................................................................................... 2.8

Connecting to a Local Area Network.................................................................................. 2.9

Backing Up and Restoring the Settings in the System Program............................ 2.10

Enabling the Network Interface Controller .............................................................. 2.11

Setting the Network Identification Settings ............................................................ 2.12

Windows Network Settings .................................................................................... 2.14

Opening the Local Area Connection Properties ........................................... 2.14

Installing the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks ..................... 2.15

Installing the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) ...................................................... 2.16

Uninstalling the Network Component .......................................................... 2.16

Setting the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) ......................................................... 2.17

Sharing Drives for Data Storing ............................................................................. 2.18

General Requirements for Connecting in Medical Electrical Systems ............................. 2.20

2. INSTALLATION


Instrument Location

The instrument measures very small electrical potential changes (5 to 200 µV).

Ideally the instrument should be installed in a shielded room which provides

constant environmental conditions. Select the examination locations as follows and

also refer to “GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS”.

WARNING• Never use this instrument in the presence of any flammable

anesthetic gas or high-concentration oxygen atmosphere. Failure to

follow this warning may cause explosion or fire.

• Never use this instrument in a high-pressure oxygen medical tank.

Failure to follow this warning may cause explosion or fire.

• Do not install the instrument in an MRI examination room. The

instrument may not operate correctly due to high-frequency

magnetic noise from the MRI.















CAUTION• Select a room with a 3-prong outlet with a ground third contact.

• Do not install the instrument near equipment with a high power

consumption, such as large X-ray equipment.

• Do not install the instrument near a power line, dynamo or motor

which has electromagnetic induction.

• Do not install the instrument near an electrosurgical unit or RF

therapeutic equipment.

• Select a room with no excessive noise, vibration, sunlight, high

humidity or water splashes.

• Make sure that there is no influence from a cellular phone.

• Avoid locations where the instrument may receive strong

electromagnetic interference such as radio or TV stations, cellular

phones or mobile two-way radios.

2. INSTALLATION


Caution - continued

• A sudden loss of power or extreme power surge can damage data

and the computer. To assure an uninterrupted power supply, use an

uninterruptable power supply (UPS).

• Do not locate the electrode junction box where it could fall on the

patient and cause injury.

• When moving the cart,

- make sure that the power of all components are turned off,

- release the caster lock,

- only grip the handle,

- select a flat path and move the cart carefully to prevent tipping

over, components falling or impact, and

• Do not install the instrument where it will be exposed to water or

chemical solutions. Avoid direct sprinkling, spray or moist air from

the nebulizer or humidifier. These cause malfunction and shorten the

life of the instrument.

• Make sure that there is enough space between the instrument and

the wall for adequate ventilation. Leave more than 5 cm of space

between the wall and vent hole on the rear panel of the instrument.

Otherwise the internal temperature of the instrument rises, which

leads to inaccurate operation and shortens the instrument life.

For external instrument connection and local area network connection, refer to

“General Requirements for Connecting Medical Electrical Systems” in this section.

NOTE• Install the instrument where the screen can be seen clearly and does

not reflect light.

• Do not place blankets or cloth over the instrument.

• Do not install the instrument in dusty area.

• Connect the power cable to an AC outlet which can supply enough

AC current to the instrument. The instrument cannot function

properly with low current.

Arrange the instrument and other equipment so that the radiation noise caused by

other equipment with a CRT display is reduced as much as possible.

2. INSTALLATION


Setting the Components on the Cart

Use only the KD-015A or KD-016A cart

KD-015A: With a printer table and isolation transformer holder.

KD-016A: Without a printer table and isolation transformer holder.

For setting the components on the cart, refer to the KD-015A/KD-016A Cart

Installation Guide.

CAUTIONWhen using an unspecified cart, carefully set the components to

prevent them from falling off and the instrument from tipping over.

Measuring EEG Waveforms in an ICU or Operation Theater

Confirm the following when measuring EEG waveforms in an ICU or OR:

• The EEG electrode is a shielded type.

• Connect the electrode attached to the nasion (Z electrode) to the Z jack on

electrode junction box.

WARNINGDo not connect the Z electrode lead plug to a ground or equipotential

ground. Otherwise, leakage current from another instrument cause

electrical shock to the patient.

• Ground the instrument to an equipotential ground.

NOTEWhen measuring very small electrical potentials, place the

instrument more than 50 cm from the patient and electrode junction

box so that the radiation noise caused by the instrument is reduced

as much as possible.

2. INSTALLATION


Cable Connection

WARNING• Before connecting the cables, make sure that the power of all

components is turned off.

• Connect only the specified instruments to the connectors or socket

marked with , by following the specified procedure. Otherwise,

electrical leakage current may harm the patient and operator.
















• Check that there is no damage on the surface of the network cable. If

it is damaged, it may cause electrical shock to the patient and

operator.

CAUTIONSecure both ends of the PC unit, MO disk drive and display AC power

cords with fixing brackets.

2. INSTALLATION


EXTOUTPUT

DCINPUT

RECDATA

DSP

PANEL

PHOTIC LAMP

RECORDER

HV

IMP 100k0MAX +5V

INPUTTRIGGER

MAX CUR 15mAMAX +5VOUTPUTTRIGGER

PC INTHIS OUTLET

ONLYMAX 270VA

TOTALMAX 450VA

To laser printer

To mouse

To keyboard

To control panel unit

To display

To MO disk unit To marker cord

To electrode junction box

To flash lampassembly

To HV unit

To external instrument(analog in/out)

To main unit(DSP)

To PC unit(DSP)

To operationpanel

To externalinstrument(trigger in/out)

AC power for - PC unit- Display- MO disk drive

PC unitMain unit

• The connector positions and symbols of the PC unit differ according to model.

Refer to the Operator’s manual of the PC unit.

• When connecting an external equipment to the system, refer to the Operator’s

manual of each external equipment.

• For external instrument connection and local area network connection, refer to

“General Requirements for Connecting Medical Electrical System” in this

section.

After connecting the cables, check the cable connection and each instrument

operation. Refer to “Power On Procedure” in Section 3 and the Operator’s manual

for each instrument.

2. INSTALLATION


Connecting the Display

1. Connect the DSP cable to the DSP cable on the rear of the PC unit and connect

the other side of the DSP cable to the DSP connector on the rear of the main

unit.

2. Connect the AC power cord to the AC socket on the rear panel of the PC unit

and connect the other side of the AC power cord to the first 3-AC outlet which

is labeled “PC IN THIS OUTLET ONLY”

3. Secure both ends of the AC power cord with fixing brackets.

4 Connect the mouse and keyboard to the PC unit.

1. Connect the SCSI cable to the SCSI connector on the rear panel of the PC unit

and MO disk unit and secure it with the two jack screws.

2. Connect the AC power cord provided with the MO disk drive (unit) to the AC

power socket on the rear of the MO disk unit.

3. Connect the other side of the AC power cord to the third 3-prong AC outlet on

the rear panel of the main unit and secure both ends of the AC power cord with

fixing brackets.

1. Connect the display cable to the VIDEO connector on the rear panel of the PC

unit and secure it with the two jack screws.

2. Connect the AC power cord provided with the display to the AC power socket

on the rear of the display.

3. Connect the other side of the AC power cord to the second 3-prong AC outlet

on the rear panel of the main unit and secure both ends of the AC power cord

with the fixing brackets.

WARNING• Before connecting or disconnecting the electrode junction box cable,

turn the power off.

• When using the JE-207A, JE-209A or JE-212A Electrode junction box,

the JE-208A, JE-210A, JE-213A or JE-214A Mini junction box must be

connected to the JE-207A, JE-209A or JE-212A Electrode junction

box. Failure to follow this warning may cause serious electrical

shock or other injury.

Connect the electrode junction box cable to the electrode junction box connector

on the rear of the PC unit.

Connecting the ElectrodeJunction Box

Connecting the PC Unit tothe Main Unit

Connecting the MO DiskDrive (Unit)

2. INSTALLATION


WARNING• Before connecting or disconnecting the flash lamp cord, turn the

power off. After the power is turned off, about 600 V is present in the

PHOTIC LAMP connector for several minutes.





1. Insert the flash lamp assembly to the flash lamp stand.

2. Connect the flash lamp assembly cable to the PHOTIC LAMP connector on the

rear of the main unit and turn the ring clockwise

3. Secure the ring with the two allen screws.

WARNING• Only supply AC power from a medical isolation transformer. Do not

connect the printer to a wall AC outlet or 3-AC outlet on the rear of

the main unit. Failure to follow this caution may cause electrical


• When the printer is not mounted on the cart, locate the printer

outside the patient environment (IEC60601-1-1 2.204*) and supply AC

power from a medical isolation transformer. Do not connect the

printer to a wall AC outlet. Failure to follow this warning may cause

electrical shock to the patient and operator.

CAUTIONUse a printer cable which does not emit an unwanted radio frequency

signal (EMC protected).

For cable connection, refer to the operator’s manual of the laser printer.

Connecting the FlashLamp Assembly

Connecting the LaserPrinter

Ring

Allen screw

* Patient environmentAny area in which intentional orunintentional contact betweenPATIENT and parts of SYSTEM orsome other persons touching of theSYSTEM can occur.

2. INSTALLATION


Connect the provided power cord to the AC SOURCE socket on the rear panel of

the main unit and plug the cord into a 3-prong AC outlet.

CAUTIONOnly use the provided power cords. If another power cord is used, it

may cause electrical shock.

WARNINGFor patient safety, equipotential grounding may be required. Consult

with a qualified biomedical engineer.

When more than one electrical instrument is used, there may be electrical potential

difference between the instruments. Potential difference between instruments may

cause current to flow to the patient connected to the instruments, resulting in

electrical shock (micro shock). Never use any medical equipment in patient

treatment without proper grounding.

Always perform equipotential grounding when required. It is often required in the

operating room, ICU room, CCU room, cardiac catheterization room and X-ray

room. Consult with a biomedical engineer to determine if it is required.

When Equipotential Grounding is Required

Connect the equipotential ground terminal on the rear panel of the main unit to the

equipotential ground terminal on the wall with the ground lead.

Connecting the Power Cord

Connecting the PowerCord

Equipotential Grounding

2. INSTALLATION


WARNINGWhen connecting the instrument to a local area network, connect the







For external instrument connection and local area network connection, refer to

“General Requirements for Connecting Medical Electrical Systems” in this

section.


The acquisition program can use several data storage drives. For example, the

EEG-1100 can select drive C (hard disk) and drive D (MO disk unit) as data storage

drives. To review the EEG data file saved in a drive through a network, the drive

C (or drive D) in this instrument needs to be shared as another EEG instrument

virtual drive. The EEG waveform which is being saved can be reviewed with the

EEG Scope - Remote mode function through the network. For EEG Scope -

Remote mode function, refer to the EEG Scope Operator’s manual. All the drives

in which data will be stored must be shared in the network. CD-ROM drive and

floppy disk drives do not need to be shared.

2. INSTALLATION


CAUTIONWhen the user name, domain name, and/or work group name is

changed in the Windows network setting, the settings in the system

program is lost. Before starting the network setting, backup the

settings in the system program.

The settings in the System program are saved in the registry. The Acquisition

program and Review program use these settings. Windows 2000 has a different

registry for each user. To log in as a different user or change the “Domain” and/or

“Workgroup” to connect to a local area network, do the following procedure.

1. Back up the settings in the System program. Refer to “Saving the System

Program Settings in a File” in the System Program section of the operator’s

manual for each instrument.

2. Change the User name, Domain name and/or Workgroup name. Refer to the

following sections.

NOTEIf you change or add the user name, add this user name to the

Administrator group before changing the network setting. To change

the user name, refer to the windows online help.

3. Run the “nkeeg.reg” program.

1) From the start menu, select Run. The Run dialog box opens.

2) Type C:\nfx11\v0401\nkeeg.reg. Where “v0401” is the system program

version. Change the version according to your instrument.

3) Click the OK button. The confirmation message dialog box opens.

4) Click the Yes button to change the registry setting. The following message

box opens.

5) Click the OK button

4. Restore the settings to the System Program. Refer to “Calling Up Saved

System Program Settings” in the System Program section of the operator’s

manual for each instrument.

Backing Up and Restoringthe Settings in the SystemProgram

2. INSTALLATION


Enabling the NetworkInterface Controller

When the Dell Optiplex GX1 is used:

1. Turn the power on. Refer to “Power On Procedure” in Section 3.

2. When the “F2=SETUP” message appears on the right upper corner of the

screen, press the F2 key immediately after the power is turned on (while your

computer beeps). The BIOS (System) Setup screen appears. If you wait too

long the current operating system begins to load into memory. If this happens,

let the system complete the load the operation, then shutdown the system and

try again.

3. Press the Alt + P key to open the page 2/2.

4. Set “NIC” in “Integrated Device” to “ON” with the ↑ or ↓ key.

5. Press the Alt + B key to save the settings and restart the computer.

When the Dell Optiplex GX200/240 is used:

1. Turn the power on. Refer to “Power On Procedure” in Section 3.

2. When the “F2=SETUP” message appears on the right upper corner of the

screen, press the F2 key immediately after the power is turned on (while your

computer beeps). The BIOS (System) Setup screen appears. If you wait too

long the current operating system begins to load into memory. If this happens,

let the system complete the load the operation, then shutdown the system and

try again.

3. Select “Integrated Device” with the ↑ or ↓ key and press the Enter key.

4. Set “Network Interface Controller” to “ON”.

5. Press the Esc key to close the BIOS Setup screen.

6. Select “Save Changes and Exit” to save the settings and restart the computer.

2. INSTALLATION


Do the following procedure to identify each instrument in the Windows

Network. For the computer name and other identification settings, consult

your network administrator.

1. Right-click the My computer icon on the desktop. The pop-up menu

opens.

2. Select Properties. The System Properties dialog box opens. You can

also open the System Properties dialog box by double-clicking the

System icon in Control Panel.

3. Click the Network Identification tab. The Network Identification page

opens.

4. Click the Properties button. The Identification changes dialog box

opens.

Setting the NetworkIdentification Settings

2. INSTALLATION


5. Type the computer name and domain or Workgroup name and click the

OK button.

Enter the unique computer name in your local area network.

When changing the “Domain” and/or “Workgroup”, refer to the

procedure in “Backing Up and Restoring the Settings in the

System Program”.

2. INSTALLATION


Windows NetworkSettings

The following network settings are the minimum settings which are necessary to

share a drive in the network. Other settings may be required depending on your

network configuration.

Opening the Local Area Connection Properties

1. When a network interface controller is enabled in the BIOS setting, the

Network Neighborhood icon appears on the left side of the Windows

2000 desktop. Right-click the Network Neighborhood icon. The pop-

up menu opens.

2. Select Properties. The Network and Dial-up Connections window

opens. You can also open the Network and Dial-up Connection window

by double-clicking the Network icon in the Control Panel.

3. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon. The pop-up menu opens.

4. Select Properties. The Local Area Connection Properties opens.

5. Install the following three network components.

• Client for Microsoft Network

• File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks:

refer to “Installing the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft

Network”

• Internet Protocol [TCP/IP]:

refer to “Installing the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”.

NoteIf network components other than the above three network

components are installed, remove the other components.

2. INSTALLATION


Installing the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks

1. In Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click the Install

button. The Select Network Component Type dialog box opens.

2. Select “Service” and click the Add button. The Select Network Service

dialog box opens.

3. Select “File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks” and click the

OK button.

2. INSTALLATION


Installing the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

1. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click the Install

button. The Select Network Component Type dialog box opens.

2. Select “Protocol” and click the Add button. The Select Network

Protocol dialog box opens.

3. Select “Internet Protocol [TCP/IP]” and click the OK button.

Uninstalling the Network Component

1. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, select the network

component that you want to uninstall and click the Uninstall button. A

confirmation message dialog box opens.

2. Follow the message on the confirmation dialog box.

2. INSTALLATION


Setting the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

One IP address must correspond to only one instrument. For the IP address

and other network settings, consult your network administrator.

1. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, select “Internet

Protocol [TCP/IP]” and click the Properties button. The Internet

Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box opens.

2. Check the “Use the following IP address” option button.

3. Type the IP address and Subnet mask and click the OK button.

If necessary, enter the Default gateway.

4. Restart the computer.

2. INSTALLATION


1. Double-click the My Computer icon on the desk. The

My Computer window opens.

2. Right-click the Local Disk (C:) icon. The pop-up

menu opens.

When sharing an MO disk drive, right-click the

Removable Disk (D:) icon.

3. Select Sharing. The Sharing page of the Local Disk

(C:) Properties dialog box opens.

Sharing Drives for Data Storing

2. INSTALLATION


4. Click the “Do not share this folder” option button and click the Apply

button.

Do this operation only when drive C can be selected as a drive to be

shared. When sharing the MO disk drive, this operation is not

necessary.

5. Click the “Share this folder” option button.

6. Type a comment in the Comment text box if necessary.

7. Click the OK button.

8. Repeat steps 2 to 7 for all data storage drives such as the MO disk drive.

2. INSTALLATION


General Requirements for Connecting in Medical Electrical Systems

When more than one electrical instrument is used, there may be electrical potential

difference between the instruments. Potential difference between instruments may

cause current to flow to the patient connected to the instruments, resulting in

electrical shock (micro shock). Therefore, electrical instruments must be appropriately

installed as specified in IEC60601-1-1.

The following is an excerpt from IEC60601-1-1 “Medical electrical equipment - Part

1-1: General requirements for safety - Collateral standard: Safety requirements for

medical electrical systems”. For details, refer to IEC60601-1-1 and consult with a

biomedical engineer.

Examples of combinations of MEDICAL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT and non-

medical electrical equipment

IEC 60601/B =IEC 60601-1 EQUIPMENT of TYPE B with PATIENT connection

IEC 60601/F = IEC 60601-1 EQUIPMENT of TYPE BF or TYPE CF (or TYPE B

without PATIENT connection)

IEC 60601/X =IEC 60601-1 EQUIPMENT of TYPE B or TYPE BF or TYPE CF

IEC XXXXX = Equipment complying with, e.g. IEC 348, IEC 950 etc.

P: additional protective earth

Q: additional separating transformer

R: floating power supply

S: separation

Situation No. Equipment A Equipment B Solution

1 IEC 60601/X OK

1a IEC XXXXX

OK, if ENCLOSURE LEAKAGECURRENT is less than 0.5 mA. Ifthe ENCLOSURE LEAKAGECURRENT is more than 0.5 mA:Solution Q (separating transformers).

2a IEC 60601/X IEC 60601/B OK

2b IEC 60601/F IEC XXXXX for B any one of P, Q, R

2c IEC 60601/B IEC XXXXXfor A solution P˝for B any one of P,Q, R

3a IEC 60601/X IEC 60601/B OK

3b IEC 60601/F IEC XXXXX OK

3c IEC 60601/B IEC XXXXX for A solution P

4 see 3a, 3b, 3c

5a IEC 60601/X IEC 60601/Bfor A solution P or S (groundlooppossible)

5b IEC 60601/X IEC XXXXXfor A solution P or S (groundlooppossible)

6a IEC 60601/X IEC 60601/X OK (with S)

6b IEC 60601/X IEC XXXXX OK (with S)

2. INSTALLATION


Legend:

(V) = Potential difference between different localities

> < = SEPARATION DEVICE

PE = Protective earth

1

2

3

4

5

6

Situation No.PATIENT

ENVIRONMENT Medical-use room Non-medical use room

A

PE

A B

PE PE

A BPE PE

A BPE

PE

A BPE

PE(V)

A BPE

PE

(V)

2. INSTALLATION




Section 3 Preparation

Power On Procedure ......................................................................................................... 3.1

Opening the EEG 1000 Program ............................................................................. 3.4

Closing the EEG 1000 Program .............................................................................. 3.5

Power Off Procedure ......................................................................................................... 3.6

Changing the Settings before Measurement ..................................................................... 3.8

Setting Date and Time ............................................................................................. 3.8

Changing the Settings in the System Program ........................................................ 3.8

Changing the Display Settings ................................................................................. 3.9

Setting the Default Settings of the Search Items .................................................... 3.11

Setting a Keyword Default Setting ................................................................ 3.11

Setting the Searching Range for the Examination Date .............................. 3.12

Backing Up the System Files ................................................................................. 3.13

Importing System Program Settings and Patient Files from an EEG-2100/2110

Electroencepahalograph ........................................................................................ 3.15

Importing the System Program Settings ...................................................... 3.15

Importing the Registered Patient Files in the Database............................... 3.16

Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk .................................................................................. 3.17

Disk Capacity ......................................................................................................... 3.17

25 Electrodes and 2 Mark Channels ........................................................... 3.17

64 Electrodes and 2 Mark Channels ........................................................... 3.17

192 Electrodes ............................................................................................. 3.18

Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk ........................................................................ 3.19

Assigning a Volume Number to a Magneto-optical Disk ........................................ 3.20

Setting the Properties for 5 inch Magneto-optical Disks ........................................ 3.22

Checking for Disk Damage Using Check Disk ................................................................. 3.23

Preparing the Electrodes ................................................................................................. 3.25

Guidelines for Input Jack Use ................................................................................ 3.25

<When the JE-425A Electrode Junction Box, or Optional JE-208A, JE-210A

Mini Junction Box is Used> ......................................................................... 3.25

Required Electrodes .................................................................................... 3.25

Input Jack Z ................................................................................................. 3.25

Input Jacks C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4) ........................................................ 3.25

Input Jacks A1 and A2 (or FP1 and FP2, JE-425A only) ............................. 3.25

<When the Optional JE-213A Mini Junction Box is Used> .......................... 3.25


Required Electrodes .................................................................................... 3.25

Input Jack Z ................................................................................................. 3.25

Input Jacks A5 and A6 (or A3 and A4) ......................................................... 3.26

Input Jacks A11 and A12 ............................................................................. 3.26

<Checking Original Electrode Potentials for All Active Electrodes> ............ 3.26

Introduction to Electrode Position, Derivation and Montage .................................. 3.27

Electrode Position ........................................................................................ 3.27

Derivation .................................................................................................... 3.27

Monopolar Derivations (Referential Derivation) ........................................... 3.27

BN (Balanced Noncephalic Reference) Derivation ...................................... 3.28

Bipolar Derivation ........................................................................................ 3.28

T1 and T2 Electrodes .................................................................................. 3.28

PG1 and PG2 Electrodes ............................................................................ 3.29

Montage (Pattern) ........................................................................................ 3.29

EEG Scalp Disk Electrodes ......................................................................... 3.30

Electrode Positions ...................................................................................... 3.30

Attaching the Electrodes to the Patient .................................................................. 3.31

Earlobe Electrodes ...................................................................................... 3.31

ECG Electrodes ........................................................................................... 3.31

Connecting Electrode Leads to the Electrode Junction Box .................................. 3.32

EEG Electrodes ........................................................................................... 3.32

ECG Electrodes ........................................................................................... 3.32

Respiration Pickup....................................................................................... 3.33

3. PREPARATION


Power On Procedure

1. Before turning the power on, check the following items. If there is any damage

or the instrument is suspected to be faulty as a result of checking, attach an

“Unusable” or “Repair required” label to the instrument and contact your NK

distributor or representative.

Check items before turning the power on

Overview:

• Instrument is not dirty, damaged or in contact with liquid.

• Power cord is not damaged.

• No key on the keyboard is broken.

• No electrode is dirty or damaged.

• No electrode lead is frayed or damaged.

Connection and Setting:

• Power cord and ground lead are properly connected.

• Electrode junction box is properly connected to the PC unit.

• Flash lamp is properly connected to the main unit.

• Laser printer is properly connected to the PC unit

• Recording paper is loaded in the laser printer.

• External equipment is properly connected to the main unit.

• Optional equipment is properly connected to the main unit or PC unit.

Accessories:

• Enough electrodes.

• Enough EEG paste.

• Enough paper.

• Enough formatted magneto-optical disks.

WARNINGOnly use the 3-prong power cord with the instrument. Failure to

follow this warning may cause electrical shock to the patient and

operator.

3. PREPARATION


2. Turn the power on

1) Turn the power switch of the PC unit, display and MO disk drive to ON

position and turn on all the connected external instruments.

2) Press the power button on the main unit to turn the power on. The PC unit,

display MO disk drive are automatically turned on. The messages appear

on the screen and the “EEG 1000” window opens.

CAUTION• Do not turn the instrument off while programs are running.

• When turning the instrument off, follow the procedure in “Power Off

Procedure”.

NOTETurn off any screen saver and close all application programs before

opening the EEG-1100 application program. Otherwise, the EEG-

1100 application program may not function properly.

3. After turning the power on, check the following items.

Check items after turning the power on

• No fire, smoke or smell.

• No electrical shock when touching the instrument.

• Instrument is not too hot.

• Instrument does not affect surrounding equipment.

• All operation indicators light.

• There is no error message on the screen or malfunction.

• The screen display is correct.

• The time and date display is correct.

• The mouse operates properly.

• All keys on the keyboard operate properly.

• All programs operate correctly.

• All settings (such as montage and amplifier settings) are correct.

3. PREPARATION


• All storage devices operate correctly (hard disk drive and magneto-optical

disk drive).

• All storage media have enough space to save EEG files (hard disk and

magneto-optical disk).

• Magneto-optical disk is not write-protected.

• Laser printer operates correctly (paper feed, intensity, no jamming).

• Calibration waveform is properly displayed.

• No noise on the calibration waveform.

• Amplitude of the calibration waveform is correct.

• Optional equipment operates correctly.

• External equipment operates correctly.

WARNINGWhen using the instrument for brain death diagnosis, before




To set the date and time, refer to the Windows online help.

3. PREPARATION


Opening the EEG 1000Program

The EEG 1000 window opens after turning the power on. The EEG 1000 window

contains the following icons.

• Acquisition (EEG measurement program)

• Review (EEG review program)

• System (System setting program)

• File Utility (File management program)

• Database Manager (Database management program)


opening the EEG-1100 application program. Otherwise, the EEG-

1100 application program may not function properly..

Double-click an icon to open a program.

If the EEG 1000 window is not opened on the desktop, double-click the “EEG

1000” icon on the desktop.

3. PREPARATION


Closing the EEG 1000Program

There are three ways to close the program.

Using the File menu

1. Click File to open the pull down menu.

2. Click Exit. The program reduces to an icon.

Using the Close button

Click the Close button. The program reduces to an icon.

Using the Control menu icon

Double-click the Control menu icon (in the upper left corner). The program

reduces to an icon.

CAUTIONDo not turn off the instrument while the program is running.

If the instrument is turned off while the program is running, the

system program and data file saved on the hard disk and/or the

magneto-optical disk may be damaged.

If the file is damaged, the saved data will be damaged and the

program may not be run.

3. PREPARATION


Power Off Procedure

1. Check the following before turning the power off.

Check items before turning the power off

• All necessary files are saved.

• All programs are closed.

• Magneto-optical disks are removed from disk drives.

2. Turn the power off.

With a mouse:

If there is a Shut down icon in the EEG 1000 window, double-click the Shut

down icon to turn off the main unit. Then do step 6.

1) Exit all programs which are running. Refer to “Closing the Program”.

2) Click the Start button on the taskbar of the screen. The Start menu opens.

3) Click Shut down. The Shut Down Windows appears.

4) Check that “Shut down” is selected in the list box.

3. PREPARATION


5) Click the OK button. The PC unit is automatically turned off.

6) Turn off the power of the main unit and all the connected instruments.

With a keyboard:

1) Exit all programs which are running. Refer to “Closing the Program”.

2) Press the Ctrl key and ESC key together. The Start menu appears.

3) Press the U key. The Shut Down Windows appears.

4) Check that “Shut down” is selected in the list box, then press the Enter

key. The computer power is turned off.

5) Turn off the power of the main unit and all the connected instruments.

3. Check the following items after turning the power off.

Check the following items for the next use

• Power of all external instruments are turned off.



• No key on the keyboard is broken.





• Enough paper.

• Enough formatted magneto-optical disk.

• Recording results and magneto-optical disk are properly stored.

3. PREPARATION


Changing the Settings before Measurement

Setting Date and TimeWARNING

When using the instrument for brain death diagnosis, before




To set the date and time, refer to the Windows online help.

Open the System program to change the followings settings, if necessary.

• EEG pattern setting

• Automatic photic stimulation setting

• Contents of the list of the Patient Information and Annotation dialog box

• Settings in the System Program dialog box

• Changing the DC input/output settings

• Number of electrodes which are saved in a file.

• Changing the electrode junction box

These settings are saved in memory. The Acquisition program and Review

program use these settings. These settings can be saved in a file or called up from

the file.

Changing the Settings inthe System Program

3. PREPARATION


Changing the Display SettingsThe following display settings can be changed by changing the settings in the E11CFG.ini

configuration file.

• Whether or not to display the same patient information of the previous measurement when the

Acquisition program opens.

• Whether or not to operate the HV timer together with the ZE-510AK Hyperventilation Unit.

• Whether or not to display the Timer bar when the Activation bar opens.

• Whether or not to display the date and time on the Camera window.

• Whether or not to display the same amplifier settings when you change the pattern.

• Vertical time scale color

• The transparent mode for the Patient Information dialog box

• The transparent mode for the “Not Filing” message on the Acquisition screen.

NOTE• When changing the settings in the Configuration file, close all EEG application

programs.

• Before changing the settings, understand the changed result thoroughly. If the

setting is incorrect, the instrument does not operate correctly.

Key Name DescriptionAcquisition sectionPatientDlgonNew Contents of the Patient Information dialog box when the

Acquisition program opens.NotClear: Displays the same patient information of the

previous measurement. (Default setting)Clear: No patient information is displayed.OFF: Does not display the Patient Information dialog box.

HvTimerLinkMode When using the ZE-510AK Hyperventilation Unit, the HV timercan operate together with the hyperventilation unit.0: Does not operate. (Default setting)1: Operates.

OpenCloseLinkPhotoAndTimer The Timer bar can be displayed when the Activation bar opens.0: Not displayed. (Default setting)1: Displayed.

ShowTimeInCameraWnd Select “1” to display the date and time on the Camera window.0: Not displayed.1: Displayed. (Default setting)

Common sectionConditionFreeMode Select “ON” to use the same amplifier settings when you change

the pattern. (Default setting: OFF)TimerMarkColor Select the vertical time scale line color in RGB.

255, 255, 0: yellow (Default setting)0, 255, 0: green

AlphaBlending sectionAcqPatientDlg The transparent mode for the Patient Information dialog box on

the Acquisition screen. The dialog box is thicker when youselect a value closer to “0”.255: Not transparent. (Default setting)

RevPatientDl The transparent mode for the Patient Information dialog box onthe Review screen. The dialog box is thicker when you select avalue closer to “0”.255: Not transparent. (Default setting)

StorageDlg The transparent mode for the “Not Filing” message on theAcquisition screen. The dialog box is thicker when you selecta value closer to “0”. (180: Default setting)255: Not transparent.

3. PREPARATION


1. Right-click the My Computer icon on the desktop. The

pop-up menu opens.

2. Select Explore. The My Computer window opens.

3. Double- click the C:\nfx11\INIEditor.exe file. The File

Open dialog box opens.

4. Double-click the E11CFG.ini file. The Configuration

Settings File Editor window opens.

5. Double-click the item that you want to change. The

Change dialog box opens.

6. Type the new setting in the Value text box and click the

OK button.

To cancel changing click the Cancel button.

3. PREPARATION


You can select the default settings of the search items, such as a keyword or

searching range for the examination date, etc. in the Open dialog box of the Review

program and in the Database Manager dialog box of the Database Manager

program by changing the settings in the E11Launcher.ini configuration file and

E11NKB.ini configuration file..

NOTEWhen changing the settings in the Configuration file, close all EEG

application programs.

Setting the DefaultSettings of the SearchItems

Setting a Keyword Default Setting


pop-up menu opens.


3. Double-click the C:\nfx11\E11Launcher.ini file. The

E11Launcher.ini file opens in the Notepad.

4. Type the keyword for the following items in the Ver04-01

- SearchItem section.

//// Ver04-01 /////

// Set search items when starts open file program

[SearchItem]

ID=

Name=

EEGNo=

ReferDept=

Physician=

Operator=

5. From the File menu, select Save and close the Notepad.

The new settings overwrite the current settings.

3. PREPARATION


Setting the Searching Range for the Examination

Date


pop-up menu opens.


3. Double-click the C:\nfx11\E11NKDB.ini file. The

E11NKDB.ini file opens in the Notepad.

4. Change the settings of the following items in the Common

section as follow to set the searching range for the

examination date.

[Common]

// Duration for date search using File open and Database Manager

FromDate=m,-3

ToDate=m,0

// Set search date condition when starts

DateSearch=True

Example: Searching for the examination date from 3 month before to today

From Date=m,-X: Selects the beginning of the search range for the examination date (from X months before)

To Date=m,Y: Selects the end of the search range for the examination date (To X months after)

For d (day), yyyy (year) can be used instead of m (month)

5. From the File menu, select Save and close Notepad. The new settings overwrite the current settings.

3. PREPARATION


You can back up the system files to prevent sudden loss of the

files when the hard disk is damaged.

NOTEWhen backing up the files, close all EEG

application programs.


pop-up menu opens.


3. Double- click the C:\nfx11\BackupTool.exe file. The

Backup Tools dialog box opens.

4. Select the files to back up.

To back up all files:

Select All from the Edit menu.

To back up files by specifying the extensions:

1) Select file type from the Edit menu. The sub-menu

opens.

2) Select the extension.

Check marks appear beside the selected files.

Backing Up the System Files

3. PREPARATION


5. Click the OK button. The Browse for Folder dialog box

opens.

To cancel backup, click the Cancel button.

6. Select the drive or folder and click the OK button.

To cancel backup, click the Cancel button.

7. From the File menu, select Exit to close the Backup Tools

dialog box.

3. PREPARATION


Importing System ProgramSettings and Patient Filesfrom an EEG-2100/2110Electroencephalograph

The system program settings and registered patient files in the database of the

EEG-2100A/J/K/G, EEG-2110A/J/K/G electroencephalograph can be used in this

instrument.

NOTEWhen importing a file, close all EEG application programs.

Importing the System Program Settings

1. In the EEG-2100A/J/K/G, EEG-2110A/J/K/G

electroencephalograph, save the system program settings

in a floppy disk. Refer to “Saving the System Program

Settings in a File” in the System Program section of the

EEG-2100 or EEG-2110 Operator’s manual.

2. Inset the floppy disk into the floppy disk of the

instrument.


pop-up menu opens.


5. Double-click the C:\nfx11\ConvSetToReg.exe file. The

ConvSetToReg dialog box opens.

6. Click the Browse button. The EEG 2100 SET FILE

dialog box opens.

7. Select the system program setting file (extension: set) in

drive A and click the Open button.

8. Select the option from “PATTERN”, “PHOTO STAGE”

and “TABLE”.

9. Click the START button.

3. PREPARATION


Importing the Registered Patient Files in the

Database

1. In the EEG-2100A/J/K/G, EEG-2110A/J/K/G

electroencephalograph, save the system program settings

in a floppy disk. Refer to “Saving the Current Database

on Disk” in the Database Manager Program section of the

EEG-2100 or EEG-2110 Operator’s manual.

2. Inset the floppy disk into the floppy disk of the

instrument.


pop-up menu opens.


5. Double-click the C:\nfx11\ImportParadoxDB.exe file.

The Import DB dialog box opens.

6. Select Open from the File menu. The FileOpen dialog

box opens.

7. Select the database file (extension: db) in drive A and

click the Open button. The patient files are displayed in

the list.

8. Select the patient file. To select all files, Select Select All

from the Edit menu.

9. Click the Start Importing button.

10. Close the Import DB dialog box.

3. PREPARATION


Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk

Disk Capacity The file space to save an EEG data file depends on the sampling rate and the

number of electrodes stored. If either decreases, the file capacity increases.

The following tables assume 30 minutes per patient recording.



Sampling frequency

2,000 Hz 1,000 Hz 500 Hz 200 Hz

1 GB2.6 hours

(5.1 files)

5.1 hours

(10.3 files)

10.3 hours

(20.6 files)

25.7 hours

(51.4 files)

18 GB HD

(EEG-1100)

46.8 hours

(91.8 files)

91.8 hours

(185.4 files)

185.4 hours

(370.8 files)

462.6 hours

(925.2 files)


(3.4 files)

3.4 hours

(7.0 files)

7.0 hours

(14 files)

17.4 hours

(34.9 files)

4.1 GB MO10.5 hours

(21.1 files)

21.1 hours

(42.2 files)

42.2 hours

(84.4 files)

105.5 hours

(210.9 files)

Sampling frequency

2,000 Hz 1,000 Hz 500 Hz 200 Hz

1 GB1.1 hours

(2.1 files)

2.1 hours

(4.2 files)

4.2 hours

(8.4 files)

10.5 hours

(21.0 files)

18 GB HD

(EEG-1100)

19.8 hours

(37.8 files)

37.8 hours

(75.6 files)

75.6 hours

(151.2 files)

189 hours

(378 files)


(1.4 files)

1.4 hours

(2.8 files)

2.8 hours

(5.7 files)

7.1 hours

(14.2 files)

4.1 GB MO4.3 hours

(8.6 files)

8.6 hours

(17.3 files)

17.3 hours

(34.5 files)

43.1 hours

(86.3 files)

No. of saved electrodes and mark channels × Sampling frequency × 2 bytes × 60 s × 60 min

Disk capacity (bytes)

Recording time (hours) =

3. PREPARATION


192 Electrodes

Sampling frequency

1,000 Hz 500 Hz 200 Hz 100 Hz

1 GB0.7 hours

(1.4 files)

1.4 hours

(2.9 files)

3.6 hours

(7.2 files)

7.2 hours

(14.5 files)

18 GB HD

(EEG-1100)

12.6 hours

(25.2 files)

25.2 hours

(52.2 files)

64.8 hours

(129.6 files)

129.6 hours

(261 files)


(0.9 files)

0.9 hours

(1.9 files)

2.4 hours

(4.8 files)

4.8 hours

(9.8 files)

4.1 GB MO3.0 hours

(5.9 files)

5.9 hours

(11.9 files)

14.8 hours

(29.7 files)

29.7 hours

(59.3 files)

3. PREPARATION


Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk CAUTION

This procedure deletes all data from the disk.

NOTE• Format a magneto-optical disk only by the Format command of the

File Utility program. A magneto-optical disk which is formatted by

another formatting function cannot be used.

• Format both sides of the magneto-optical disk individually.

• Assign a volume number to each side of the magneto-optical disk.

• After formatting or assigning a volume number to a magneto-optical

disk, run Check Disk on the magneto-optical disk to check that the

data can be properly saved. Refer to Section “Checking for Disk

Damage Using Check Disk”.

1. Double-click the File Utility icon in the EEG 1000 window. The File Utility

dialog box opens.

2. From the Disk menu, select Format. The Format (drive selection) dialog box

opens.

3. Select the drive where the MO disk is inserted.

4. Click the OK button. The Format dialog box opens.

To cancel formatting, click the Cancel button.

3. PREPARATION


Assigning a VolumeNumber to a Magneto-optical Disk

CAUTIONWhen formatting the MO disk, do not change the Capacity, File

system and Other options in the Format dialog box. For File system,

only select “FAT”.

5. Click the Start button. The formatting starts

6. When the formatting is complete, click the Close button.

7. Refer to the next section to assign a volume number to the disk.

Do the following procedures to assign a volume number to each side of the

magneto-optical disk. Each side has an individual volume number which is used

by the Database Manager program to keep track of files. The volume number is

automatically incremented.

NOTE• If a disk with no volume number is used, a volume number is

automatically assigned when the Acquisition program opens or EEG

waveforms are saved to the disk in the Review program. However,

we strongly recommend assigning a volume number immediately

after formatting. If you do not assign a volume number, it will be

hard to keep track of which files are on which disks.

• When the MO disk has double sides, assign different volume

numbers to both sides.

When installing two or more instruments in an area or connecting the instrument to

a network with other NK digital EEGs (EEG-2100/2110, EEG-9100, PC with QP-

223A/AK or QP-111AJ/AK acquisition program kit), assign the different MO disk

volume number for each instrument and check that each instrument has a different

serial number setting. The default MO disk volume number is “A”. Refer to

“General - Writing Down the File and MO Settings Before PC Unit or Hard Disk

Replacement” in Section 7 of the Service manual.

1. Double-click the File Utility icon in the EEG 1000 window. The File Utility

dialog box opens.

2. From the Disk menu, select Initialize. The Initialize dialog box opens.

3. PREPARATION


3. Click the Drive box arrow. The list box of the selectable drives is displayed.

4. Click the drive name that you want to assign a new volume number to. The

new volume number is displayed on the dialog box. If the disk already has a

number, a message appears.

You can also assign a volume number to any folder. To select the folder, click

the Folder button. The system program saves EEG data files in the

NKT\EEG2100 folder in the drive selected in the Storage drive option (System

program → System Setting dialog box → General page → Data Storage Area)

after waveforms acquisition. For a destination folder to back up or copy EEG

data files, only use the folders that have a volume number.

5. Write down the new volume number on the label.

6. Click the OK button. The Confirmation dialog box is displayed. The number

displayed on the table is assigned to the selected disk.

7. To assign the number, click the OK button.

To cancel, click the Cancel button.

After assigning the volume number, the dialog box closes.

8. Remove the magneto-optical disk and attach the label to it.

9. Close the File Utility program.

3. PREPARATION


NOTEIf a 5-inch MO disk is inserted into an MO disk unit and the power is

turned on, you cannot remove the MO disk by pressing the eject

switch on the MO disk unit. You can remove the MO disk from the

Explore or My computer but the removed MO disk is not recognized

by Windows 2000 and EEG-1100 system when the MO disk is

inserted. The MO disk is recognized by Windows 2000 and the EEG-

1100 system when the MO disk is removed and inserted again or the

next time the power is turned on. To prevent this trouble, do the

following. This trouble does not occur for a 3.5 inch MO disk.

1. Right-click the My computer icon on the desktop. The pop-up menu opens.

2. Select Manage. The Computer Management window opens.

3. Right-click a 5 inch optical device (Storage → Removable Storage →Physical Locations). The Optical Device Properties opens.

Setting the Properties for 5inch Magneto-optical Disks

4. Uncheck the Enable library check box on the General tab.

5. Click the Apply button.

6. Close the Computer Management.

Example: SONY SMO-F551 SCSI MO disk drive

3. PREPARATION


Checking for Disk Damage Using Check Disk

Run Check Disk once a month, or whenever your system has a problem, to check,

diagnose and repair damage on the hard disk or magneto-optical disk.

NOTEAfter formatting or assigning a volume number to a magneto-optical

disk, run Check Disk on the magneto-optical disk to check that data

can be properly saved.

1. Double-click the My Computer icon on the desktop. The My Computer

window opens.

2. Right-click the drive icon that you want to check. The

pop-up menu opens.

3. Select Properties. The Properties sheet opens.

4. Click the Tools tab. The Tools page opens.

5. Click the Check Now button in the Error-checking area.

The Check Disk dialog box opens.

3. PREPARATION


6. Click the Start button.

We recommend that you do not select any options.

To cancel checking, click the Cancel button.

7. During the disk check, if an error is found, a dialog box to opens to fix

the error. Follow the instructions on the dialog box.

8. When the disk check is complete, the Checking Disk dialog box opens.

Check the contents and click the OK button.

3. PREPARATION


Preparing the Electrodes

Guidelines for Input JackUse

22 PG1 23 PG2

Z

9 O1 10 O2

1 FP1 2 FP2

19 FZ

24 CZ

20 PZ

3 F3

5 C3

7 P3

13 F7

15 T3

17 T5

12 A2

14 F8

16 T4

18 T6

4 F4

6 C4

8 P4

25 T1 26 T2

11 A1

You must follow these guidelines to obtain correct EEG recordings.

When the JE-425A Electrode Junction Box, or Optional JE-208A, JE-

210A Mini Junction Box is Used:

Required Electrodes

Do not perform EEG measurement without the Z, C3, C4 (or F3, F4), A1 and A2

electrodes.

Input Jack Z

Connect the lead from the electrode (Z electrode) attached on the patient’s nasion

to input jack Z on the electrode junction box. This input jack is used to eliminate

AC interference.

The input jack Z is also used for checking electrode impedance.

Input Jacks C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4)

The C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4) electrodes are the system reference electrodes for

EEG measurement. Input jacks C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4) must be used for EEG

measurement even if C3 and C4 are not programmed in any montage.

Connect the leads from the electrodes on positions C3 and C4 to input jacks C3 and

C4, respectively.

Input Jacks A1 and A2 (or FP1 and FP2, JE-425A only)

The A1 and A2 (or FP1 and FP2, JE-425A only) electrodes are the reference

electrodes for skin-electrode impedance check. Input jacks A1 and A2 (or FP1 and

FP2, JE-425A only) in addition to Z, C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4) must be used for

the electrode impedance check.

When checking electrode impedance, connect the leads from the electrodes on

positions A1 and A2 to input jacks A1 and A2, respectively.

When the Optional JE-213A Mini Junction Box is Used:

Required Electrodes

Do not perform EEG measurement without the Z, A5, A6 (or A3, A4), A11 and A12

electrodes.

Input Jack Z

Connect the lead from the electrode (Z electrode) attached on the patient’s nasion

to input jack Z on the electrode junction box. This input jack is used to eliminate

AC interference.

The input jack Z is also used for checking electrode impedance.

3. PREPARATION


Input Jacks A5 and A6 (or A3 and A4)

The A5 and A6 (or A3 and A4) electrodes are the system reference electrodes for

EEG measurement. Input jacks A5 and A6 (or A3 and A4) must be used for EEG

measurement even if A5 and A6 are not programmed in any montage.

Connect the leads from the electrodes on positions A5 and A6 to input jacks A5 and

A6, respectively.

Input Jacks A11 and A12

The A11and A12 electrodes are the reference electrodes for skin-electrode

impedance check. Input jacks A11 and A12 in addition to Z, A5 and A6 (or A3 and

A4) must be used for the electrode impedance check.

When checking electrode impedance, connect the leads from the electrodes on

positions A11 and A12 to input jacks A11 and A12, respectively.

Checking Original Electrode Potentials for All Active Electrodes

Check the original electrode potential for all active electrodes by programming a

montage with the system reference (Select the 0 V button for reference electrode on

the Montage dialog box). Refer to “Programming Patterns” in Section 4.

The digital EEG displays the EEG waveform in each channel by subtracting two

electrode potentials selected to a montage. The subtracted result will be incorrect, if

the electrode attachment is not correct, the original electrode potential is flat, or

unstable or artifact is superimposed on the original electrode potential. Omit the

measurement result if the displayed EEG waveform is incorrect.

3. PREPARATION


Electrode Position

There are various systems of electrode position, such as Illinois, Montreal, Aird,

Cohn, etc. Of these, the International 10-20 system, shown below, is currently the

most common. Each system has a different number of electrodes and different

electrode locations. To compensate for different sized heads, the distances between

electrodes are given as ratios.

Introduction to ElectrodePosition, Derivation andMontage

After determining the electrode position system, measure the head of the patient

and calculate the electrode positions according to the distance ratio between each

electrode position. The number of electrodes should be reduced for EEG recording

on infants and little children.

Derivation

Derivation is the electrode combination for one channel. All derivations have two

electrodes: reference and active. In monopolar derivation, one “electrode” can be

several physical electrodes connected together. There are 3 kinds of derivations.

Monopolar Derivations (Referential Derivation)

In the monopolar derivation, one electrode is common to all channels and regarded

as electrically inactive (“reference electrode”). Each amplifier has two inputs (G1

and G2). The reference electrode is connected to the G2 (+) input of the amplifier

and the active electrode is connected to the G1 (−) input.

Monopolar Derivations Using Ear Reference Electrodes:

• Normal Monopolar Derivation

Left ear for left hemispheric derivation and the right ear for right hemispheric

derivation.

• A1 + A2

Shorting both ears (in the electrode junction box).

• A1 → A2 or A1 ← A2

Only one ear.

• A1 ↔ A2

Left ear for right hemispheric and right ear for left hemispheric derivation.

F3 F4

F8F7

FP1 FP2

FZ

CZ

PZ

P3 P4

C4C3T3

A2A1

T4

T6T5

O2O1

133

1 2

19 414

1216624

20 818

5

717

1511

9 10

Nasion

Inion

10-20 system electrode positions

3. PREPARATION


Monopolar Derivations Using Other Site Reference Electrodes:

• Vx (Vertex reference derivation)

Mid-line central position Cz as the reference electrode.

• AV (Average reference derivation)

All electrodes on the scalp, except for the X1 - X11 and BN (+) and BN (−)

electrodes, are connected by resistors to one averaged point which is the AV

reference electrode.

If one or more of the electrodes in the AV electrode contain ECG artifact, or two

or more electrodes show simultaneous abnormal potentials, you need to exclude

any unstable electrodes.

BN (Balanced Noncephalic Reference) Derivation

An electrode on the vertebra prominens spine and an electrode near the right

sternoclavicular joint are connected by a variable resistor to form a noncephalic

reference electrode. The variable resistor lets you balance the ratio of these two

electrode signals in order to minimize the ECG. You can use any three input jacks.

Bipolar Derivation

Electrode pairs are connected to the G1 and G2 inputs of channels. The potential

difference between two electrodes is recorded on each channel.

T1 and T2 Electrodes

The T1 and T2 electrodes are placed on a line 1/3 of the distance from the external

acoustic pore to the lateral orbital margin.

Input jack

Input jack(Vertebra prominens spine electrode)

Variable resistor insideEEG machine

BN derivation

Input jack(right sternoclavicularjoint electrode)

(inside EEG machine)

Noncephalic referenceelectrode (inside EEGmachine)

: buffer amplifier

G1

G2

3. PREPARATION


PG1 and PG2 Electrodes

PG1 and PG2 are the pharyngeal electrodes. A silver ball electrode on the tip of a

thick copper stick is inserted from the nasal foramen and the silver ball electrode is

attached at the rhinopharynx posterior. The EEG of the brainstem, internal

temporal lobe and posterial frontal lobe can be recorded.

Montage (Pattern)

Montage is the combination of derivations for all channels. The instrument

contains 36 patterns per set file and you can program a different montage and other

settings for each pattern.

3. PREPARATION


EEG Scalp Disk Electrodes

1. Clean the area where the electrodes are to be mounted with a gauze pad

moistened in alcohol or a medical soap solution to remove oil from the skin.

Wipe the site with dry gauze.

2. Apply a small amount of EEG paste to a 1 cm diameter circle on the cleaned

skin. Avoid spreading the paste too thin or creating too large a space.

3. Apply a small amount of paste to the disk electrode, and press the electrode

down gently on the previously pasted skin spot.

4. Cover the electrode with a small gauze pad and press the pad around the

electrode. Attach the electrode with surgical tape.

Electrode Positions

This procedure is for the Ten Twenty System.

1. Divide the longitudinal line of the head into halves and attach an electrode at

the Cz point (Fig. 1).

2. Divide the distance between Cz and the nasion in proportions as shown in Fig.

1 and attach an electrode at Fz and Pz. (Do not attach electrodes at Fpz and

Oz.)

3. Divide the transverse line of the head into proportions of 10%, 20%, 20%,

20%, 20% and 10% as shown in Fig. 2 and attach electrodes at T3, T4, C3 and

C4.

4. Divide the peripheral line passing over Fpz, T4, Oz and T3 into proportions as

shown in Fig. 3 and attach electrodes at Fp2, F8, T6, O2, Fp1, F7, T5 and O1.

Attaching the Electrodes tothe Patient

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

CZ

FZ

FPZ

PZ

OZ

T3T4

C3

CZ

C4

FP2

FP1

FPZ

F8

T4

T3

T5

O1

O2

OZ

T6

F7

Disk electrode Lead

PasteScalp

Scalp Disk Electrode Placement

Correct Wrong

3. PREPARATION


5. Take the line passing over F7, Fz and F8 and attach an electrode at the mid-

point (F3) between F7 and Fz as shown in Fig. 4. Attach another electrode at

the mid-point (F4) between F8 and Fz.

6. Take the line passing over T5, Pz and T6 and attach an electrode at the mid-

point (P3) between T5 and PZ. Attach another electrode at the mid-point (P4)

between T6 and PZ.

Earlobe Electrodes

1. Apply a small amount of EEG paste to both earlobes. Gently clip on the

earlobe electrodes.

2. Secure the electrode lead to the neck with surgical tape to prevent electrode

lead movement.

CAUTIONDo not apply excessive pressure to the electrode because this may

cause direct electrode-to-skin contact (not through the paste), and

generate unnecessary polarization voltage.

ECG Electrodes

1. Clean the patient’s skin with alcohol and apply CardioCream (ECG paste) to

the electrode site.

2. Apply CardioCream to the electrode surface of the ECG clip-on limb electrode

and clip the limb electrode on the patient’s arm or leg as required.

Fig. 4

F3 F4

F8F7

FP1 FP2

FZ

CZ

PZ

P3 P4

C4C3T3

A2A1

T4

T6T5

O2O1

133

1 2

19 414

1216624

20 818

5

717

1511

9 10

3. PREPARATION


EEG Electrodes

WARNINGWhen using the JE-207A, JE-209A or JE-212A Electrode junction box,

the JE-208A, JE-210A, JE-213A or JE-214A Mini junction box must be

connected to the electrode junction box. Failure to follow this warning

may cause serious electrical shock or other injury.

After placing the electrodes on the patient’s scalp, connect the electrode lead plugs

to the corresponding jacks on the electrode junction box. Make sure that each

electrode position corresponds to the correct jack.

ECG Electrodes

Procedure:

Connect one end of each ECG electrode lead to the ECG clip on the limb. Connect

the other ends of the electrode leads to any two jacks (X1 to X11) on the electrode

junction box. Refer to the following chart when selecting the ECG lead (Lead I,

Lead II or Lead III).

Connecting ElectrodeLeads to the ElectrodeJunction Box

EEG lead

ECG lead

Respiration pickup lead

G1 (-) G2 (+)

Lead I Right arm Left arm

Lead II Right arm Left leg

Lead III Left arm Left leg

Typical ECG settings:

These settings let you record Lead I on the 32 nd channel.

Connect the left and right arms to input jacks X1 and X2, respectively. Program

the electrode combination for the 32 nd channel so that X2 is set to input G1 (−)

and X1 is set to input G2 (+). Set the sensitivity to 200 µV/mm and the time

constant to 1.0 s on the display.

22 PG1 23 PG2

Z

9 O1 10 O2

1 FP1 2 FP2

19 FZ

24 CZ

20 PZ

3 F3

5 C3

7 P3

13 F7

15 T3

17 T5

12 A2

14 F8

16 T4

18 T6

4 F4

6 C4

8 P4

25 T1 26 T2

11 A1

X1 X3 X5 X7

X2 X4 X6 X8

X9 X11 BN1

X10 BN2

2 5 10 20 50

IMPEDANCE CHECK

LEAD CHECK

X1 X3 X5 X7

X2 X4 X6 X8

X9 X11 BN1

X10 BN2


RESPA(X11)

RESPC(X10)

RESPF(X9)

Extra input jacks

3. PREPARATION


Respiration Pickup

WARNINGOnly connect the following respiration pickups to the RESP jacks.

NOTEWhen the respiration waveform is measured, use the E electrode and

any of the X9, X10 and X11 electrodes. Save the E electrode with EEG

waveforms. Refer to “Selecting the Electrodes to be Saved with EEG

Waveforms” in Section 3.

Montage/Jacks G1 (-) G2 (+)

RESP F (X9) E X9

RESP C (X10) E X10

RESP A (X11) E X11

Model Terminal

TR-0001, TR-0002, TR-761T, TR-762T RESP F (X9)

TR-751T, TR-752TRESP C (X10)

or RESP A (X11)

22 PG1 23 PG2

Z

9 O1 10 O2

1 FP1 2 FP2

19 FZ

24 CZ

20 PZ

3 F3

5 C3

7 P3

13 F7

15 T3

17 T5

12 A2

14 F8

16 T4

18 T6

4 F4

6 C4

8 P4

25 T1 26 T2

11 A1

X1 X3 X5 X7

X2 X4 X6 X8

X9 X11 BN1

X10 BN2

2 5 10 20 50

IMPEDANCE CHECK

LEAD CHECK

X1 X3 X5 X7

X2 X4 X6 X8

X9 X11 BN1

X10 BN2


RESPA(X11)

RESPC(X10)

RESPF(X9)

CZ

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 +BP1

-

X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 X18 X19 X20 +BP2

-

X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27 X28 X29 X30 +BP3

-

X31 X32 X33 BN1 BN2 +BP4

-

RESPA(X11)

RESPC(X10)

RESPF(X9)

PG1

T2

Z PG2

T2

FP2FP1

F7 F3 FZ F4 F8

C4 T4 A2A1 T3 C3

T5 P3 PZ P4 T6

O1 O2

L R

Z

Nz

PG1

B57

X1A26

X2A27

X3A28

X4A29

X5A30

X6A31

X7A32

X8A33

X9A34

X10A35

X11A36

X12A39

X13A40

X14A41

X15A42

X16A43

X17A44

X18A45

X19A46

X20A47

X21A48

X22A49

X23A50

X24A51

X25A52

X26A53

X27A54

X28A55

X39A56

X30A57

X31A58

X32A59

X33A60

X38B1

X39B2

X40B3

X41B4

X42B5

X43B6

X44B7

X45B8

X46B9

X47B10

BN1A37

BIP1(+) BIP2(+) BIP3(+) BIP4(+)

BN2RESPA(X11)

RESPC(X10)

RESPF(X9)

A38BIP1(-) BIP2(-) BIP3(-) BIP4(-)X34A61

X35A62

X36A63

X37A64

FpzB58

AFzB59AF3

B21AF7B39

FzA19

F1B11F5

B29F9B47

FCzB60

FC1B13FC3

B23FC5B31FT7

B41FT9B49

T9B51

C5B33

C1B15

C2B16

C6B34

T10B52

CPzB61

POzB62

OzB63

IzB64

A22

Fp1A1

F3A3F7

A13

PO3B27

PO7B45

P1B19

P5B37

P9B55

CP1B17

CP3B25

CP5B35

TP7B43

TP2B53

O1A9

P3A7

P7A17

T1A24

A1A11

T7A15

A2A12

T8A34

C4A6

CzA20

C3A5

PG2

AF4B22 AF8

B40

F2B12 F6

B30F10B48

FC2B14 FC4

B24 FC6B32 FT8

B42 FT10B50

A23

Fp2A2

F4A4 F8

A14

PO4B28

PO8B46

P2B20

P6B38

P10B56

CP2B18

CP4B26

CP6B36

TP8B44

TP10B54

O2A10

P4A8

P8A18

T2A25

PzA21

L R

You can use the following respiration pickups to measure the respiration

waveform.

• TR-0001/TR-0002 3-port respiration pickup

• TR-751T/TR-752T respiration pickup for chest

• TR-761T/TR-762T respiration pickup for nostril

Connection of the lead tips of the respiration pickup

Programming the montage for respiration measurement

In the default setting, channels 17 and 18 of the pattern IA to IVA, and

channels 13 and 14 of the pattern IB to IIB are programmed for respiration

measurement.

JE-425A

Respiration jacks

Respiration jacks

JE-208A

JE-210A

3. PREPARATION




Section 4 System Program

General .............................................................................................................................. 4.1

Opening the System Program ........................................................................................... 4.2

Closing the System Program ................................................................................... 4.2

Explanation of Each Function ............................................................................................ 4.3

Menu Bar ................................................................................................................. 4.3

File Menu ................................................................................................................. 4.3

Load............................................................................................................... 4.3

Save As ......................................................................................................... 4.3

Initialize .......................................................................................................... 4.3

Close without Saving ..................................................................................... 4.3

Close ............................................................................................................. 4.3

Junction Box Menu .................................................................................................. 4.3

JE-425A (10-20 System) ............................................................................... 4.3

JE-210A (10-10 System)/JE-208A (10-20 System)/JE-213A, 214A (Matrix) . 4.3

JE-910A/911A (10-20 System) ...................................................................... 4.3

JE-912A, 914A (Sleep) .................................................................................. 4.3

EEG-2100 Compatible Mode ......................................................................... 4.3

Help Menu ............................................................................................................... 4.3

About ............................................................................................................. 4.3

Icons ........................................................................................................................ 4.4

Pattern ........................................................................................................... 4.4

Photic ............................................................................................................ 4.4

Table .............................................................................................................. 4.4

System .......................................................................................................... 4.4

Electrodes ..................................................................................................... 4.4

Auto Record................................................................................................... 4.4

Programming Patterns ....................................................................................................... 4.5

General .................................................................................................................... 4.5

Opening the Pattern Table ....................................................................................... 4.5

Selecting the Pattern ............................................................................................... 4.5

Changing the Pattern Name .................................................................................... 4.5

Changing the Montage ............................................................................................ 4.6

Selecting or Deleting Electrodes for AV Derivation .................................................. 4.7

Changing an Amplifier Setting ................................................................................. 4.8


Displaying/Not Displaying a Waveform .................................................................... 4.9

Changing a Waveform Color .................................................................................... 4.9

Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform ................................................ 4.10

Annotating a Channel with a Comment ................................................................. 4.10

Changing the Channel Spacing .............................................................................. 4.11

Selecting the Item Displayed on the Extended Channel Bar .................................. 4.11

Changing the Conversion Range of the DC Input Signals ..................................... 4.12

Programming Automatic Photic Stimulation Modes ......................................................... 4.14

Editing the Waveform Annotations and Patient Information Items ................................... 4.15

Changing the Settings in the System Setting Dialog Box ................................................ 4.17

General .................................................................................................................. 4.17

Opening the System Setting Dialog Box ................................................................ 4.17

Settings in the General Page ................................................................................. 4.18

Selecting Storage Drive ............................................................................... 4.18

Changing Montage Description ................................................................... 4.18

Selecting EEG Sampling Frequency ........................................................... 4.19

Select the Number of Dots to Display the Waveforms ................................. 4.19

Automatically Saving the Waveforms .......................................................... 4.19

Selecting AC Line Frequency ...................................................................... 4.19

Using the Current System Settings in the Review Program ........................ 4.19

Saving the Current System Settings with a Part of EEG Waveforms .......... 4.19

Selecting Reference Electrode for Saved EEG Data .................................. 4.20

Displaying the Patient Image ....................................................................... 4.20

Changing the Settings for Long Term EEG Waveform Monitoring ............... 4.21

Settings in the Junction box, operation, display Page ........................................... 4.23

Resetting the Settings When Pattern Changes ........................................... 4.23

Selecting the Pattern Number When Another Pattern Group is Selected .... 4.23

Selecting the Limitation of the Skin-electrode Impedance Check Time ....... 4.23

Selecting the Electrode Junction Box Time Constant .................................. 4.24

Selecting the Operation Mode of the Impedance Preset Key ...................... 4.24

Selecting the Time Interval of the HV Timer and Post HV Timer Event ....... 4.24

Selecting the Page Display Time ................................................................. 4.24

Selecting the Operation Mode of the Reset Button/Switch ......................... 4.24

Selecting the Time Constant Display Format ............................................... 4.24

Selecting the Range of Selectable High Cut Filter Frequencies .................. 4.24

Substituting the Sensitivity 2.5 for the Sensitivity 3. .................................... 4.25

Entering the Event Name for High Speed Review ....................................... 4.25

Settings in the Standard Page ............................................................................... 4.26

Selecting the Pattern ................................................................................... 4.26

Selecting the ACC Amplifier Settings ........................................................... 4.26

Selecting the Calibration Mode .................................................................... 4.26

Selecting the Recording Mode..................................................................... 4.26

Selecting the Impedance Threshold ............................................................ 4.27

Selecting the Photic Stimulation and Hyperventilation Settings................... 4.27

Selecting the Paper Speed .......................................................................... 4.27

Selecting Whether or Not to Record the Calibration waveform ................... 4.27

Selecting the AC Filter Setting ..................................................................... 4.27

Selecting Whether or Not to Display the Patient Image ............................... 4.27

Settings in the DC input/output, pen recorder Page .............................................. 4.28


Selecting the DC Output Sensitivity ............................................................. 4.28

Selecting the DC Input Sensitivity ............................................................... 4.28

Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition....................................... 4.29

General .................................................................................................................. 4.29

Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition ............................ 4.29

Selecting and Saving the DC Input Channels ........................................................ 4.30

Programming Automatic Recording Modes ..................................................................... 4.32

Saving the System Program Settings in a File ................................................................. 4.34

Calling Up Saved System Program Settings ................................................................... 4.35

Resetting All System Program Settings to the Factory Default Settings .......................... 4.36

Changing the Electrode Junction Box .............................................................................. 4.37

General .................................................................................................................. 4.37

Sampling Frequency and Number of Electrodes that are Used for Waveform

Acquisition ............................................................................................................. 4.38

JE-207A Electrode Junction Box and JE-208A Mini Junction Box .............. 4.38

JE-209A Electrode Junction Box and JE-210A Mini Junction Box .............. 4.38

JE-212A Electrode Junction Box ................................................................. 4.39

Selecting the EEG-2100 Compatible Mode ..................................................................... 4.40

List of Factory Default Settings ........................................................................................ 4.41

Patterns ................................................................................................................. 4.41

Automatic Photic Stimulation Settings ................................................................... 4.45

System Setting Dialog Box Options ....................................................................... 4.46


This pate is intentionally left blank.

Operator’s Manual EEG-1100 4.1

4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

General

This program lets you change the following settings.

• EEG pattern settings

• Automatic photic stimulation settings

• Contents of the table list of the Patient Information and Annotation dialog box

• Settings in the System Setting dialog box

• The electrodes that are used for waveform acquisition and saved in a file with the

EEG waveforms.

• Selecting the electrode junction box

• Long term EEG waveform monitoring settings

• Automatic EEG waveform recording settings

These settings are saved in memory. The Acquisition program and the Review

program use these settings. These settings can be saved in a file or called up from

the file.

NOTEIt is not possible to change System Program settings while the

Acquisition, Review or any other EEG 1100 application program is

open.

4.2 Operator’s Manual EEG-1100

4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Opening the System Program

From the EEG 1000 window, double-click the System icon. The System Program

window opens.


opening the System program. Otherwise, the System program may


To close the System program:

1. Click the File. The File pull down menu opens.

2. There are two ways to close the System program. Do any of the following.

• To close the System program without saving the changed settings, select

Close without Saving.

• To close the System program and save the changed settings, select Close.

The System program returns to the icon.

Closing the SystemProgram


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Explanation of Each Function

Menu Bar

File Menu

Junction Box Menu

Help Menu

You can save the System settings in a file with a “reg” extension, or call them up

from the file.

Load

Opens the Load dialog box to call up the system settings saved in a file.

Save As

Opens the Save As dialog box to save the system settings in the file of a disk.

Initialize

Restores the settings in the System program to the factory default settings.

Close without Saving

Close the System program without saving the changed settings.

Close

Closes the System program and saves the changed settings.

When using the optional electrode junction box and mini junction box, select the

mini junction box in this menu.

JE-425A (10-20 System)

Select this when the JE-425A Electrode Junction Box is used. (Default setting)

JE-210A (10-10 System)/JE-208A (10-20 System)/JE-213A, 214A (Matrix)

Select according to the optional mini junction box to be used.

JE-910A/911A (10-20 System)

Not available for this instrument.

JE-912A, 914A (Sleep)

Select when the optional JE-912AK Sleep Apnea Unit is used.

EEG-2100 Compatible Mode

Select this to save the EEG waveforms in the format of the EEG-2110 Digital

EEG.

About

Displays information about the program.


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Icons Pattern

Opens the Pattern table. The instrument contains 36 patterns per set file. The

pattern is the combination of these settings: montage, amplifier settings

(sensitivity, time constant, high-cut filter and calibration voltage), waveform

display on/off, waveform color, amplitude limitation of the waveform and

comment for each channel. You can change the settings for each pattern.

Photic

Opens the Photic Stimulation dialog box. The instrument has three

programmable automatic photic stimulation modes (Auto 1, Auto 2 and Auto

3) with up to 30 steps each. You can change the photic stimulation frequencies

for each step.

Table

Opens the Table Items dialog box to change or add contents (texts) of the table

list on the Patient Information dialog box and Annotation dialog box.

System

Opens the System Settings dialog box to change the several options provided

in the instrument.

• General settings for the measurement

• Electrode junction box and display mode

• Default settings for the Acquisition program. The Acquisition program

opens with the settings selected in the Standard page on the System Settings

dialog box. During waveform acquisition, you can restore the changed

settings to the settings in the Standard page by selecting “Standard” from

the Tool menu.

• Analog input/output signals

Electrodes

Opens the Electrodes to be Saved dialog box to select the electrodes that are

used for waveform acquisition. The instrument saves the waveforms as an

electrode potential for each electrode.

Auto Record

Opens the Auto Record dialog box to select the automatic EEG waveform

recording mode and settings. You can select the pattern, recording time,

activation settings for each stage.


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Programming Patterns

General

Opening the Pattern Table

Selecting the Pattern

Changing the PatternName

The instrument contains 36 patterns per set file. The pattern is the combination of

the settings: montage, amplifier settings (sensitivity, time constant, high-cut filter

and calibration voltage), waveform display on/off, waveform color, amplitude

limitation of the waveform and comment for each channel. You can change the

settings for each pattern. During acquisition or review, you can temporarily change

pattern settings without losing the original pattern settings.

Click the Pattern icon in the System Program window. The Pattern table opens.

1. Click the Pattern box arrow. The Pattern name list box opens.

2. Click the pattern name. The selected pattern table opens on the table and the

selected pattern name is displayed in the Edit Pattern Name text box.

1. Click the Pattern Name text box. The cursor appears in the box.

2. Type the new name with up to 6 characters. The old pattern name is replaced

with the new name.


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Changing the Montage

Montage


2. Click a pattern name. The selected pattern opens on the table.

3. Select the electrode(s) to change on the pattern table. All selected electrodes

are highlighted. The Montage dialog box opens.

To select one electrode:

Click the electrode name on the table.

To select two or more consecutive channels:

Drag the cursor to select the electrodes.

To select all channel electrodes:

Click the G1 or G2 switch at the top of the column.

4. Click an electrode in the electrode position layout to select it.

The selected G1 or G2 electrode(s) is replaced with the selected new

electrode. The dotted rectangle moves to the next electrode.

0 V button:

When this is selected to either G1 or G2 electrode, the channel displays the

potential between the system reference electrodes (C3/C4) and selected

electrode whichever G1 or G2 electrode which is not set to “0 V”.

5. Click the OK button to close the dialog box.

Electrode position layout


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM


2. Click the pattern name. The selected pattern table opens on the table.

3. Click the AV Derivation button. The AV Derivation Reference Electrode

dialog box opens.

Selecting or Deleting Electrodesfor AV Derivation


1

3

Electrode position layout:

The available electrode name is displayed on the electrode position layout.

The clicked (down) electrode is used for reference voltage calculation (AV

derivation). To add or delete an electrode on the electrode position layout,

click the electrode.

4 Click the electrode for AV derivation.

To delete all the electrodes for AV derivation, click the Initialize button.



4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Changing an AmplifierSetting

NOTEThe selectable high-cut filter frequency settings depend on the

sampling frequency shown below.

Amplifier setting


2. Click the pattern name. The selected pattern opens on the table.

3. Select the Sens, TC, HF or Cal setting to change on the pattern table. The

selected setting is highlighted.

To select one setting:

Click the setting on the table.


Drag the cursor to select the settings.

To select the settings for all channels:

Click the SENS, TC, HF button at the top of the column.

The selection list box for the setting appears.

4 Click the new setting in the selection list box.

The highlighted settings change to the new settings.

5. Click the OK button to close the selection list.

Sampling frequency (Hz) Selectable high-cut filter

100 30 Hz or less

200 60 Hz or less

500 120 Hz or less

1,000 300Hz or less

2,000 600 Hz or less

5,000 1,200 Hz or less

10,000 3,000 Hz or less


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Displaying/Not Displayinga Waveform

Changing a WaveformColor

Color

Display



3. Select the channel to display or not display the waveform. The selected

channel is highlighted.

To select one channel:




To select all channels:

Click the Display button at the top of the column.

The selection list box for the display on/off appears.

4. Click On or Off in the Display box.

5. Click the OK button to close the list box.



3. Select the channel to change the waveform color. The selected channel is

highlighted.






Click the Color button at the top of the column.

The selection list box for the color appears.

4. Click the new color in the selection list box.



4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

You can change the maximum amplitude of a waveform. When the waveform

exceeds the limit, it is clipped.



3. Select the channel to change the maximum amplitude. The selected channel is

highlighted.






Click the Width button at the top of the column.

The selection list box for the maximum amplitude appears .

4. Click the new maximum amplitude in the selection list box.


You can annotate a channel with a comment. The selected comment is displayed

beside the channel number.


2. Click the pattern name. The selected pattern table opens on the pattern table.

3. Select the channel to change the comment. The selected channel is

highlighted.






Click the Comment button at the top of the column.

The Wave Comment dialog box opens.

4. Select the comment in the list box, or type the comment in the text box.


Changing the MaximumAmplitude of a Waveform

Width

Annotating a Channel witha Comment


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

You can change the channel spacing. Example: 3 - corresponds to 3 channel space

This setting applies to the waveform display position “Even Layout”.



3. Select the channel to change the spacing. The selected channel is highlighted.






Click the Spacing button at the top of the column.

The selection list box for the channel spacing appears.

4. Click the new channel spacing in the selection list box.


You can display either the montage or comment on the extended channel bar on the

Acquisition screen and Review screen.



3. Select the channel to change the item. The selected channel is highlighted.






Click the Ch bar button at the top of the column.

The selection dialog box for the extended channel bar appears.

4. Select “Montage” or “Comment” item in the dialog box.


Changing the ChannelSpacing

Selecting the ItemDisplayed on the ExtendedChannel Bar

Spacing

Channel bar


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

When the optional QI-101A Analog input board is installed, DC input signals from

an external instrument can be displayed on the Acquisition screen. You can

convert the DC input signal to the numeric value. The converted numeric value is

displayed on the extended channel bar.

1. Click the DC Conversion button on the pattern table. The DC Input

Conversion Display Setting dialog box opens.

1

Changing the ConversionRange of the DC InputSignals

2. Select the channel that you want to set. The Set a Channel dialog box opens.

Selected channel

3. Select the input/output range, unit and number of scales. To change the

previous or next channel settings, use the Previous or Next button.

2

Initialize button:Change the settings to the factory default settings


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Dialog box options

Previous/Next channel:

To go to the previous or next channel, use this button.

On/Off:

Check this box to use the settings for the channel. When this box is checked,

the conversion values are displayed on the extended channel bar of the

Acquisition screen and Review screen.

Input/Output:

Enter the input range (low and high limit) and conversion value of the DC

input signal that you want to see. The corresponding scales appear on the

Acquisition screen and Review screen when the extended channel bar is

displayed.

Unit:

Select the unit for the conversion value.

Scale lines:

Select the number of scales between the low and high limits.

4. When all settings are complete, click the OK button. The Select a Channel

dialog box closes.

5. Click the OK button on the DC Input Conversion Display Setting dialog box .


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Programming Automatic Photic Stimulation Modes

The instrument has three programmable automatic photic stimulation modes (Auto

1, Auto 2, and Auto 3) with up to 30 steps each. You can change the photic

stimulation frequencies for each step.

1. Click the Photic icon in the System Program window. The Photic Stimulation

dialog box opens.

2. Check the Use photic stimulation check box.

3. Select the Use CA-0048/50/51 [Main unit] option button.

4. Click the frequency of the desired step. A dotted rectangle encloses the

selected frequency.

• To clear all frequency settings after the currently selected step, click the

Clear button.

• To select a new frequency, click the new frequency in the Frequency list box.

The dotted rectangle is replaced with the selected frequency.

5. Repeat step 4 to set the frequency for up to 30 steps.

6. Click the OK button to close the Photic Stimulation dialog box.

To cancel the setting, click the Cancel button.

23

4

1


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

During waveform acquisition or review, you can add annotations to a waveform

and enter patient information in the patient table by selecting items from a list.

Enter the selectable items for each heading in this procedure. You can display the

vertical color line for up to 4 annotations.

Waveform annotation: Event

Patient information: Patient condition, Seizure type, Sleep disorder, Medical

history (patient history), Medication, Physician, Operator,

Department, Patient comment

Channel annotation: Wave comment

1. Click the Table icon in the System Program window. The Table Items dialog

box opens.

Editing the Waveform Annotations and Patient Information Items

2. Click the group selection button at the top side of the dialog box to open the

desired group list.

3. Do one of the following.

• To enter a new item, click the empty column in the list box.

• To change the item name, click the desired item in the list box.

Group selection button

Text box

List box


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

4. Type the character, word or phrase. Up to 40 characters can be entered per line

and up to 40 annotations and items can be entered in the list box.

Enter key: Makes a new line.

Backspace key: Moves the cursor back one space and deletes the character.

Delete key: Deletes the character to the right of the cursor.

5. Type the annotation in Event Name text box on the Color line setting at

specified events area and select the color of the vertical line for the annotation.

Annotations which include the entered text have the same vertical color line.

To select the color, click the color pallet beside the text box. The selection

dialog box opens.

6. Click the OK button to close the Table Items dialog box.


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

The following sections explain the several options in the System Setting dialog

box. The System Setting dialog box has four pages to select:

• General settings for the measurement

• Electrode junction box, operation and display

• Default settings for the Acquisition program. The Acquisition program opens

with the settings selected in the Standard page on the System Settings dialog box.

During waveform acquisition, you can restore the changed settings to the

settings in the Standard page by selecting “Standard” from the Tool menu.

• Analog input/output signals

• Long term EEG waveform monitoring

Click the system icon in the System Program window. The System Settings dialog

box opens.

Changing the Settings in the System Setting Dialog Box

Opening the SystemSetting Dialog Box

General

• To open another page, click the tab of the desired page

• To close the system Setting dialog box, click the OK button.

• To cancel setting, click the Cancel button.


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Settings in the GeneralPage

Selecting Storage Drive

Changing Montage Description

The factory default settings are underlined.

Example:JE-425A Electrode junctionbox is selected.

Storage Drive:

Select the drive in which to save the acquired waveforms and measurement data.

[-c-] Built-in hard disk drive (default setting: when an MO disk drive is not

installed.)

[-d-] Magneto-optical disk drive

You can make a copy of the EEG data file when the EEG data file is closed by

selecting “ Automatic backup at file close”. To change the drive or folder, click the

Change folder button.

NOTEThe “Automatic backup at file close” setting is not available when

the “Use long term monitoring” check box is checked.

Montage Description:

Select the montage description to display the EEG waveforms. You can rename

electrodes with up to 4 characters.

Selection list: 10-20, NK (Nihon Kohden), User, etc

To change montage name or rename an electrode:

1. Click the Change button in the Montage description area. The Electrode Name

dialog box opens.

2. Select the montage.

• To define the electrode name, select User. You can define the electrode name

with up to 4 characters.

• To restore the new electrode name to the original 10-20 electrode name,

click the Initialize button.


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Selecting EEG Sampling

Frequency

Select the Number of Dots to

Display the Waveforms

Selecting AC Line Frequency

Using the Current System

Settings in the Review Program

Automatically Saving the

Waveforms

Saving the Current System

Settings with a Part of EEG

Waveforms

• To rename the DC channel, click the DC channel button.

3. Click the OK button to close the Electrode Name dialog box.

Sampling frequency:

Displays the selected sampling frequency in the Systems Settings - Electrode to be

Saved page.

Aspect Ratio:

Select the number of dots per 5 mm (1 div) to display the waveforms. This setting

is for vertical resolution only (waveform amplitude). The default setting is 17 dots/

50 µV. To restore the setting to the default, click the Initialize button.

Automatically save selected waveform:

Check this box to automatically save the selected part of waveforms and patient

information when the Review screen is closed.

AC filter:

Select the AC line frequency. This setting is used by the AC filter to reduce AC

interference.

Selection list: 50, 60 Hz.

Use current system settings in review:

Check this box to use the current system settings in the Review program.

Save current system settings with EEG data when exploring selected wave:

In the Review screen, a part of EEG waveforms and its information can be saved as

a new file. Check this box to save the system settings in the file together with a

part of EEG waveforms. The EEG waveforms can be reviewed with the saved

system settings.


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Displaying the Patient Image

Selecting Reference Electrode

for Saved EEG Data

Reference electrode for Imp check:

Select the reference electrodes for skin-electrode impedance check.

Selection list

JE-425A electrode junction box: A1/A2, FP1/FP2

JE-208A, JE-210A mini junction box: Fixed at A1/A2

JE-213A mini junction box: Fixed at A11/A12

JE-912AK Sleep apnea unit: Fixed at A1/A2

NOTEWhen the JE-425A electrode junction box, JE-208A/JE-210A mini

junction box or JE-912AK sleep apnea unit is used, the input jacks

A1 and A2 (or FP1 and FP2, JE-425A only) must be attached to the

patient for the electrode impedance check. When the JE-213A mini

junction is used, the input jacks A11 and A12 must be attached to the

patient for the electrode impedance check.

Reference electrodes for EEG:

EEG waveforms are saved in a file as a monopolar derivation.

Before measurement, select the system reference electrodes for waveform

acquisition.

Selection list

JE-425A electrode junction box: F3/F4, C3/C4

JE-208A/JE-210A mini junction box: F3/F4, C3/C4

JE-213A mini junction box: A3/A4, A5/A6

JE-912AK sleep apnea unit: Fixed at C3/C4

NOTEWhen the JE-425A electrode junction box, JE-208A/JE-210A mini

junction box or JE-912AK sleep apnea unit is used, the input jacks

C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4) must be attached to the patient for EEG

measurement even when C3 and C4 are not programmed in any

montage. When the JE-213A mini junction box is used, the input

jacks A5 and A6 (or A3 and A4) must be attached to the patient for

EEG measurement even when A3 and A4 are not programmed in any

montage.

Patient image:

Check the “Use video link” check box to use the QI-224A Serial interface board.

You can control the specified video cassette tape recorder with the Video Link

dialog box by checking the Control VTR by EEG 1000 check box. Refer to the

QI-224A Operator’s manual.

When using the QI-111A Camera interface board, check both the “Enable video

camera” check box and “Show camera window in review” check box. Refer to the

QI-111A Operator’s manual.


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Dialog box options:

Storage drive/VTR/DV region table

Storage drive:

Enter the storage drive to save the EEG waveforms. Up to 2 GB EEG data file

can be created for each stage. The maximum file size differs depending on the

combination of the sampling frequency and the number of electrodes to be

saved. Properly select the sampling frequency and number of electrodes to be

saved. Refer to “Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk - Disk Capacity” in

Section 3. If the file size exceeds 2 GB, the long term monitoring cannot be

started.

VTR:

VTR is the connected video cassette tape recorder number for analog video

link. When one cassette tape recorder is connected, set this to “1”. To use two

or more video cassette tape recorders, contact your Nihon Kohden distributor

or representative.

DV region:

Enter the region to save the patient image for digital video link. Refer to the

QP-110AK Digital video software Operator’s manual.

Recording time/stage:

Select the recording time per stage.

Long term monitoring:

The long term monitoring function lets you continuously save up to 52 GB (2GB ×26 stages) of EEG waveforms in different storage media. For each stage, a new

EEG data file is created and saved in the selected drive as a different EEG data file.

When the optional QP-224A Serial interface board (analog video link) or QP-

110AK Digital video software (digital video link) is installed, you can select the

storage media for the patient image recording. Refer to “Long Term EEG

Waveform Monitoring” in Section 5.

To change the setting, click the stage, the Set aStage dialog box opens. Enter the storage drivefor EEG waveforms, VTR number and the region

for digital video link for each stage.

Changing the Settings for Long

Term EEG Waveform Monitoring

Initialize:Restores the settings to the factorydefault settings.


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Maximum number of stages:

Select the number of stages.

Repeat:

When repeating the long term EEG monitoring, select the number of repeat times and

check the Keep repeating check box.

Interval between stages:

Select the interval between the stages.

Eject MO and video tape when stage changes:

Check this to automatically eject the MO disk when the recording of the stage is

complete.

Impedance check when stage changes:

Check this to automatically check the skin-electrode contact impedance at the beginning

of the stage. The duration for impedance check can be selected with the Duration listbox.

Use spike detector:

The QP-251AK Spike Detection Software can be used in the long term monitoring

(online spike detection). The time delay to start online spike detection after the

beginning of stage can be selected with the Time lag list box.

NOTEThe time delay must be set to 10 seconds or more. Otherwise, the spike

detection software may malfunction.

Detector setting:

Select the electrodes for spike detection.

Use digital video:

The QP-110AK Digital Video Software can be used in the long term monitoring. The

time delay to start saving the patient image and EEG waveforms for each stage can be

selected with the Time lag list box. Enter the region of the video server (patient image

recording area) for each stage in the DV region column in the table. Refer to the QP-

110AK Digital Video Software Operator’s manual.

NOTEThe time delay must be set to 10 seconds or more. Otherwise, the digital

video software may malfunction.

Merge stages when reviewing and creating LIF file:

Select to create the long term monitoring information (LIF) file. This file is used to

continuously review the long term EEG waveform monitoring data (saved as different

EEG data files for each stage) in the review program.

NOTEIf this check box is not checked, the LIF file is not created and you cannot

continuously review the long term EEG waveform monitoring data.


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Settings in the Junctionbox, operation, displayPage

Resetting the Settings When

Pattern Changes

Selecting the Pattern Number

When Another Pattern Group is

Selected

The factory default settings are underlined.

Selecting the Limitation of the

Skin-electrode Impedance

Check Time

Resets the following items when pattern changes:

Pattern number when group changes:

When another pattern group is selected, there are two ways to select the pattern

number.

Selection list

Return to one Number 1 of the selected pattern group is selected.

Same The same number as the current pattern number is selected

Impedance check:

Select the limitation of the skin-electrode impedance check time.

Selection list: No check, 10 min, 30 min

ON OFF

Reference electrode

(default: ON)

Temporary reference electrode settings

are lost when you change the pattern.

Temporary reference electrode settings

remain when you change the pattern.

AC filter

(default: OFF)

The AC filter is turned off when you

change pattern.

The AC filter setting remains when you

change pattern.

Override

(default: ON)

Temporary pattern setting is lost when

you change pattern.

Temporary pattern setting remains when

you change pattern.

Record timer

(default: ON)

The record timer is reset when you

change pattern.

The record timer is not reset when you

change pattern.


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Selecting the Electrode Junction

Box Time Constant

Selecting the Operation Mode of

the Impedance Preset Key

Electrode junction box time constant:

Select the time constant of the electrode junction box. This setting is available only

when the JE-207A, JE-209A or JE-212A electrode junction box is connected.

Selection list: 2 s, 10 s

Impedance threshold switch:

Select the operation mode of the Impedance preset key on the JE-425A/JE-212A

electrode junction box

Selection list: Ascending (2 → 5 → 10 → 20 → 50 kΩ),Descending (50 → 20 → 10 → 5→ 2 kΩ)

HV timer event interval:

Select the time interval for the “HVT mm:ss” event of the HV timer and the “POST

HVT mm:ss” event of the Post HV timer.

Default setting: 30 s

Post HV auto end:

Selects the post hyperventilation time for the Post HV timer. When the selected

time is elapsed, the Post HV timer automatically stops.

Default setting: 300 s

Pause time for reviewing waveforms at high speed:

Selects the pause time when reviewing the EEG waveforms continuously at high

speed.

Selection list: 0 to 10,000 ms in 1 ms step.

Default setting: Pause 1 (250 ms), Pause 2 (500 ms), Pause 3 (750 ms)

Reset switch function:

Select how the Reset button/switch is operated in the Acquisition.

Selection list:

Press and hold The reset function is On while the mouse button is pressed and

held.

Single click: The reset function is on/off by clicking.

Time constant:

Select the time constant display format and unit.

Selection list: seconds (time constant), Hz (low-cut filter)

High cut filter:

In the Acquisition and Review programs you can change the high-cut filter

frequency. The high-cut filter reduces frequency components over the selected

frequency. Choose the selectable frequencies.

Selection list: (30, 60), (35, 70), (30, 70)

Selecting the Page Display Time

Selecting the Range of

Selectable High Cut Filter

Frequencies

Selecting the Time Constant

Display Format

Selecting the Operation Mode of

the Reset Button/Switch

Selecting the Time Interval of

the HV Timer and Post HV Timer

Event


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Sens 3 or 2.5

Check the “Substitute sensitivity 2.5 for sensitivity 3” check box when substituting

the sensitivity 2.5 for the sensitivity 3.

Add events fast view:

When reviewing the EEG waveforms back or forward in high speed on the Review

screen, you can add an annotation to a waveform by pressing the “+” key. Enter

the event name (annotation) in the Event text box and the time when the event is

added to the waveform before pressing the “+” key.

Entering the Event Name for

High Speed Review

Substituting the Sensitivity 2.5

for the Sensitivity 3.


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Settings in the StandardPage

Pattern:

Select the pattern when the Acquisition program opens. (default setting: IA)

ACC (All channel control) Amp settings:

Select the ACC amplifier settings when the Acquisition program opens.

Default settings:

CAL voltage - 50 µV, Sensitivity - 10 µV/mm

Time constant - 0.3 s, High cut filter - 120 Hz

CAL:

Select the calibration mode when the Acquisition program opens.

Selection list: Auto square, Manual square, Auto sine, Manual sine

Acquisition:

Select the default recording mode when the Acquisition program opens.

Selection list: Manual, Auto 1, Auto 2

For the automatic EEG waveform recording, refer to “Programming Automatic

Recording Mode” in this section.

The Acquisition program opens with the settings selected in the Standard page on

the System Settings dialog box. During waveform acquisition, you can restore the

changed settings to the settings in the Standard page by selecting “Standard” from

the Tool menu. The factory default settings are underlined.

Selecting the Pattern

Selecting the ACC Amplifier

Settings

Selecting the Calibration Mode

Selecting the Recording Mode


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Impedance check threshold

Select the impedance threshold for skin-electrode impedance check when the

Acquisition program opens.

Selection list: 2, 5, 10, 20, 50 kΩ

Photic/HV:

Select the photic stimulation and hyperventilation mode when the Acquisition

program opens.

Selection list:

Mode: Auto 1, Auto 2, Auto 3, Manual, Single, HV

Photic

Stimulation time: 10 s (Type from 1 to 99 s in 1 second steps.)

Pause: 10 s ( Type from 0 to 30 s in 1 second steps.)

Hyperventilation

Period: 3 min (Type from 1 to 5 min in 1 min steps.)

Interval 3 s (Type from 2 to 5 s in 1 second steps.)

Paper speed:

Not available for this instrument

Record CAL wave:

The calibration waveform recording is selected when the Acquisition program

opens.

AC filter:

The AC filter is turned on when the Acquisition program opens.

Display patient image:

The patient image window is displayed on the screen when the Acquisition

program opens.

Selecting the Paper Speed

Selecting the Photic Stimulation

and Hyperventilation Settings

Selecting Whether or Not to

Record the Calibration

waveform

Selecting the AC Filter Setting

Selecting Whether or Not to

Display the Patient Image

Selecting the Impedance

Threshold


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Settings in the DC input/output, pen recorder Page

To input or output analog signals, the optional QA-101A Analog input board or

QD-101A Analog output board is required. The factory default settings are

underlined.

DC output sensitivity:

Select the output sensitivity. Select this according to the input sensitivity of your

recorder.

Selection list: 1.0 V/5 mm, 0.5 V/5 mm

DC input sensitivity at 200 mV/mm

Select the input sensitivity.

Selection list: 5 mm/1.0 V, 5 mm/0.5 V

The following settings are not available for this instrument.

Pattern mark analog output in review (Default setting: not selected)

Mark position

(Default setting - Pattern Mark: bottom, Sensitivity/ Manual Mark: top)

Pen parking when not used (Default setting: Off)

Record switch starts filing in acquisition (Default setting: selected)

Play button before starts recording in review(Default setting: not selected)

Extend pen reset period(Default setting: not selected)

Stop feeding at paper fold (Default setting: selected)

Selecting the DC Output

Sensitivity

Selecting the DC Input

Sensitivity


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

The instrument saves the waveforms as an electrode potential for each electrode.

37 electrodes are default settings. Refer to “Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk” in

Section 3 for notes about the number of electrodes to select. The electrode that is

not selected here is displayed in red on the pattern table.

CAUTION• The electrodes that are used for waveform acquisition must be

selected and saved here. If not, EEG waveforms cannot be reviewed

on the Review screen.

• When the respiration waveform is measured, save the E electrode

and any of the X9, X10 and X11 electrodes.

1. Click the Electrodes icon in the System Program window. The Electrodes to be

Saved dialog box selected in the Junction box menu opens.

Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition

General

Selecting and Saving theElectrodes for WaveformAcquisition

2. Click an electrode in the electrode position layout table to save it.

3. Select the electrodes, sampling frequency and Mark 1/Mark 2 settings.

Selectedmontage

Electrode position layout table

Selected electrode

Not selectedElectrodes to be Saved dialog box example- JE-425A Electrode junction box

Selected montage


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Selecting and Saving theDC Input Channels

Dialog box options

Sampling frequency:

Select the sampling frequency considering the number of electrodes that are

used for waveform acquisition, recording time (filing time) and drive capacity.

Refer to “Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk” in Section 3.

Selection list: 100, 200, 500, 1,000 Hz

When you change the sampling frequency, the high cut filter frequency is

automatically changed to the optimum setting. (Sampling frequency should be

at least three times the high-frequency filter setting.) However, changing the

high cut filter frequency does not automatically change the sampling frequency

setting.

Mark 1/Mark 2:

Select the mark signal source for the mark channel.

Selection list: Internal, External, Both, OFF

3. Click the OK button to close the Electrodes to be Saved dialog box. The

selected settings are saved in memory.

1. Click the Electrode icon in the System Program window. The Electrodes to be

Saved dialog box selected in the Junction box menu opens.

Electrodes to be saved dialog box example

- JE-425A Electrode junction box

Not available for DC input

Selected montageSelected electrode

Not selected

2. Click the DC input tab to select the DC input channels


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Dialog box options

Trigger setting:

The input signal from channel 9 to 16 can be used for a trigger. To select the

channel, open the Trigger selection dialog box by clicking the Trigger column.

When “Trigger” is set to ON,

3. Select the DC input channels for DC input signals, trigger channel.

To select the trigger channel:

1) Click the Trigger column. The Trigger selection dialog box opens.

2) Select the channel. To select the previous or next channel, click the

previous/next button.

3) Click ON when the selected DC channel is used for the trigger channel.

4) Type the Threshold voltage and condition for triggering.

5) Click the OK button to close the Trigger selection dialog box.

4. Click the OK button to close the Electrode to be Saved dialog box. The

selected settings are saved in memory.

The DC input signals can be used for the trigger signals of the QP-211A Analysis

software, FOCUS and QP-214A Analysis software, MULTIVIEW.

DC input channel FOCUS trigger

channel

DC09 1

DC10 2

DC11 4

DC12 8

DC13 16

DC14 32

DC15 64

DC16 128


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Programming Automatic Recording Modes

The instrument has two programmable automatic recording modes (Auto 1 and

Auto 2) with up to 25 stages each. You can program the pattern, recording time,

photic stimulation mode, etc. for each stage.

1. Click the Auto Record icon in the System Program window. The Auto Record

dialog box opens.

Dialog box options:

Stage change:

“Time” is only available for this instrument.

Start filing when Auto Record starts:

Select to start filing when the automatic recording mode is started.

Time lag at photic stimulation stage:

Select the delay time to start automatic photic stimulation.

Initialize:

Restores the settings to the factory default settings.


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

2. Select the automatic recording mode by clicking the tab.

3. Click any column of the stage that you want to change. The Set a Stage dialog

box opens.

4. Select the settings for the automatic recording mode. To change the previous

or next stage settings, use the Previous stage or Next stage button.

Dialog box options

Pattern:

Select the pattern.

CAL:

Select “On” to only record the calibration waveforms for the stage.

Rec time:

Select the recording time for the stage.

Paper feed:

Select blank time for before starting waveform acquisition.

Photic:

Select the photic stimulation mode or hyperventilation mode.

Imp check:

Select “On” to perform skin-contact impedance check when the stage is

started.

Pause:

Select “On” to temporarily stop automatic recording when the stage is end.

5. Click the OK button. To cancel the setting, click the close button.

6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 to change the settings for another stage.

7. Click the OK button to close the Auto Record dialog box.


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

The changed settings in the System program can be saved in a file and called up, if

necessary.

All the following settings are saved in a file.

• EEG pattern settings

• Automatic photic stimulation settings

• Contents of the table list of the Patient Information and Annotation dialog box

• Settings in the System Setting dialog box

• The electrodes that are used for waveform acquisition and saved in a file with the

EEG waveforms.

• Long term EEG waveform monitoring settings

• Automatic EEG waveform recording settings

1. From the File menu, select Save As. The Save As dialog box opens.

Saving the System Program Settings in a File

To change the drive or folder, click the Save in box arrow.

2. Type the file name and the extension “reg” in the File name test box.

Example: Test.reg

3. Press the Enter key on the keyboard or click the Save button. All the current

System program settings are saved in the file.

To cancel saving, click the Cancel button.


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

You can call up System Program Settings which were previously saved in a file.

1. From the File menu, select Load. The Open dialog box opens.

Calling Up Saved System Program Settings

To change the drive or folder, click the Look in box arrow.

2. Click the file name. The selected file name is displayed in the File name text

box.

To load the file settings quickly, double-click the file name.

3. Click the OK button to load the file.



4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

This resets all settings in the System program to the factory default settings (listed

in “List of Factory Default Settings”). All changed settings are lost if you do the

following procedure.

1. From the File menu, select Initialize. The confirmation dialog box opens.



Resetting All System Program Settings to the Factory Default

Settings


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Changing the Electrode Junction Box

When using the optional electrode junction box and mini junction box, select the

mini junction box from the Junction box menu. The contents of the Electrode to

be Saved dialog box changes according to the mini junction box.

JE-210A (10-10 System) is selected

JE-213A/214A (Matrix) is selected

General

JE-208A (10-20 System, 64 electrodes) is selected


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Sampling Frequency andNumber of Electrodes thatare Used for WaveformAcquisition

When the optional JE-270A, JE-209A or JE-212A Electrode junction box is used,

the instrument can acquire the waveform at sampling speeds of up to 10,000 Hz.

Depending on the selected sampling frequency, the number of electrodes that can

be saved in the Electrodes to be Saved dialog box (storage electrodes) changes as

shown below.

NOTEWhen the sampling frequency is set to 5,000 or 10,000 Hz, the

instrument cannot output the acquired waveforms from the EXT

OUTPUT connector on the optional QD-101A Analog output board.

JE-209A Electrode Junction Box and JE-210A Mini Junction Box

Sampling frequency (Hz) Number of storageelectrodes

Selectable electrode jack, DC inpt channel and mark channel

100, 200, 500 and 1,000 64Electrode jack: 65 (All)DC input channel: 32 (All)Mark channels: Mark 1 and Mark 2 (All)

2,000 64Electrode jack: 65DC input channel: 32 (All)Mark channel: Mark 1 and Mark 2 (All)

5,000 37

Electrode jack: 33(Fp1, Fp2, F3, F4, C3, C4, P3, P4, O1, O2, F7, F8, T7, T8, P7, P8,Fz, Cz, Pz, PG1, PG2, A1, A2, T1, T2, X1 to X7, E)DC input channel: 32 (All)Mark channel: Not selectable

10,000 19

Electrode jack: 18(Fp1, Fp2, F3, F4, C3, C4, P3, P4, O1, O2, F7, F8, T7, T8, P7, P8,A1, A2)DC input channel: 16 (DC 1 to 16)Mark channel: Not selectable

JE-207A Electrode Junction Box and JE-208A Mini Junction Box

Sampling frequency (Hz) Number of storage

electrodes


100, 200, 500 and 1,000 161

Electrode jack: 129 (All)

DC input channel: 32 (All)

Mark channels: Mark 1 and Mark 2 (All)

2,000 71

Electrode jack: 77

(Fp1, Fp2, F3, F4, C3, C4, P3, P4,O1, O2, F7, F8, T7, T8, P7, P8, Fz,

Cz, Pz, PG1, PG2, A1, A2, T1, T2, X1 to X33, X38 to X47, BN1,

BN2, BP1 to BP4, E)


Mark channel: Mark 1 and Mark 2 (All)

5,000 37

Electrode jack: 33

(Fp1, Fp2, F3, F4, C3, C4, P3, P4, O1, O2, F7, F8, T7, T8, P7, P8,

Fz, Cz, Pz, PG1, PG2, A1, A2, T1, T2, X1 to X7, E) DC input

channel: 32 (All)

Mark channel: Not selectable

10,000 19

Electrode jack: 18

(Fp1, Fp2, F3, F4, C3, C4, P3, P4, O1, O2, F7, F8, T7, T8, P7, P8,

A1, A2)

DC input channel: 16 (DC 1 to 16)



4. SYSTEM PROGRAM


Sampling frequency (Hz) Number of storage

electrodes


100, 200 and 500 201

Electrode jack: 193 (A1 to A64, B1 to B64, C1 to C64, E)



1,000 193

Electrode jack: 193 (A1 to A64, B1 to B64, C1 to C64, E)



2,000 71

Electrode jack: 77 (A1 to A64, B1 to B12, E)


Mark channel: Mark 1 and Mark 2 (All)

5,000 37

Electrode jack: 33 (A1 to A32, E)



10,000 19

Electrode jack: 18 (A1 to A18)

DC input channel: 16 (DC 1 to 16)



4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Selecting the EEG-2100 Compatible Mode

When the EEG-2100 compatible mode is selected, the EEG waveforms are saved

in the format of the EEG-2110 Digital EEG.

Waveforms saved in this format can be opened on an EEG-2110 Digital EEG and

Digital EEG System (PC with the QP-111AJ/AK or QP-223A/AK acquisition

program kit).

To select the EEG-2100 compatible mode, select EEG-2100 Compatible Mode

from File menu.

When this mode is selected, the following settings have a limitation.

Setting Limitation

Number of channels Up to 32

Montage Electrodes

JE-425A/JE-209A/JE-207A:

10-20 type electrodes and X1 to X11

JE-212A: A1 to A38

DC input channels: DC 1 to DC 4

Time constant “0.6 s” is not available.

Pattern table

Number of colors Up to 8

Table Items dialog

box

Number of characters for waveform

annotation and patient information

Up to 20

Number of characters for the

montage description

Up to 3

Electode junction box time constant Fixed at 10 s

High-cut filter “30, 70 Hz” is not available.

System Setting

dialog box

Time constant for the standard

setting

“0.6 s” is not available.

Electrodes that can be saved Electrodes

JE-425A/JE-209A/JE-207A:

10-20 type electrodes and X1 to X11

JE-212A: A1 to A38

DC input channels: DC 1 to DC 4

Sampling frequency 100, 200, 500 and 1,000 Hz

(When optional electrode junction box is used.)

Electrode to be

Saved dialog box

Mark 1 and Mark 2 “OFF” is not available.


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

E - X9: Respiration pickup (Flow)

E - X10: Respiration pickup (Chest)

X1 - X2: EOG

X3 - X4: EMG

X5 - X6: ECG

E electrode is for the respiration pickup.

List of Factory Default Settings

Patterns

Pattern IA Pattern IIA

Montage Amplifer Setting Montage Amplifer SettingCH

G1 (-) G2 (+) SENS TC HF CAL G1 (-) G2 (+) SENS TC HF CAL

1 FP1 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - F7 ACC ACC ACC ACC

2 FP2 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC F7 - T3 ACC ACC ACC ACC

3 F3 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC T3 - T5 ACC ACC ACC ACC

4 F4 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC T5 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC

5 C3 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - F3 ACC ACC ACC ACC

6 C4 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC F3 - C3 ACC ACC ACC ACC

7 P3 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC C3 - P3 ACC ACC ACC ACC

8 P4 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC P3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC

9 O1 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC FP2 - F4 ACC ACC ACC ACC

10 O2 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC F4 - C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC

11 F7 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC C4 - P4 ACC ACC ACC ACC

12 F8 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC P4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC

13 T3 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC FP2 - F8 ACC ACC ACC ACC

14 T4 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC F8 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC

15 T5 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC T4 - T6 ACC ACC ACC ACC

16 T6 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC T6 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC

17 E - X9 200 2.0 30 1000 E - X9 200 2.0 30 1000

18 E - X10 200 2.0 30 1000 E - X10 200 2.0 30 1000

19 X1 - X2 20 2.0 30 100 X1 - X2 20 2.0 30 100

20 X3 - X4 20 0.03 120 100 X3 - X4 20 0.03 120 100

21 X5 - X6 200 1.0 60 1000 X5 - X6 200 1.0 60 1000

ch 22 to 64

FP1 - FP1ACC ACC ACC ACC

ch 22 to 64


Unit µV/mm S Hz mV µV/mm S Hz mV


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

E - X9: Respiration pickup (Flow)

E - X10: Respiration pickup (Chest)

X1 - X2: EOG

X3 - X4: EMG

X5 - X6: ECG

E electrode is for the respiration pickup.

Pattern III A Pattern IV A



1 FP1 - F3 ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP2 ACC ACC ACC ACC

2 F3 - C3 ACC ACC ACC ACC F7 - F3 ACC ACC ACC ACC

3 C3 - P3 ACC ACC ACC ACC F3 - FZ ACC ACC ACC ACC

4 P3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC FZ - F4 ACC ACC ACC ACC

5 FP2 - F4 ACC ACC ACC ACC F4 - F8 ACC ACC ACC ACC

6 F4 - C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC A1 - T3 ACC ACC ACC ACC

7 C4 - P4 ACC ACC ACC ACC T3 - C3 ACC ACC ACC ACC

8 P4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC C3 - CZ ACC ACC ACC ACC

9 FP1 - F7 ACC ACC ACC ACC CZ - C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC

10 F7 - T3 ACC ACC ACC ACC C4 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC

11 T3 - T5 ACC ACC ACC ACC T4 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC

12 T5 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC T5 - P3 ACC ACC ACC ACC

13 FP2 - F8 ACC ACC ACC ACC P3 - PZ ACC ACC ACC ACC

14 F8 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC PZ - P4 ACC ACC ACC ACC

15 T4 - T6 ACC ACC ACC ACC P4 - T6 ACC ACC ACC ACC

16 T6 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC O1 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC

17 E - X9 200 2.0 30 1000 E - X9 200 2.0 30 1000

18 E - X10 200 2.0 30 1000 E - X10 200 2.0 30 1000

19 X1 - X2 20 2.0 30 100 X1 - X2 20 2.0 30 100

20 X3 - X4 20 0.03 120 100 X3 - X4 20 0.03 120 100

21 X5 - X6 200 1.0 60 1000 X5 - X6 200 1.0 60 1000

ch 22 to 64


ch 22 to 64




4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Pattern I B Pattern II B



1 FP1 - T3 ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - C3 ACC ACC ACC ACC

2 T3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC C3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC

3 FP1 - C3 ACC ACC ACC ACC FP2 - C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC

4 C3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC C4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC

5 FP2 - C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - T3 ACC ACC ACC ACC

6 C4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC T3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC

7 FP2 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC FP2 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC

8 T4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC T4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC

9 T3 - C3 ACC ACC ACC ACC T3 - C3 ACC ACC ACC ACC

10 C3 - CZ ACC ACC ACC ACC C3 - CZ ACC ACC ACC ACC

11 CZ - C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC CZ - C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC

12 C4 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC C4 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC

13 E - X9 ACC ACC ACC ACC E - X9 ACC ACC ACC ACC

14 E - X10 ACC ACC ACC ACC E - X10 ACC ACC ACC ACC

15 X1 - X2 ACC ACC ACC ACC X1 - X2 ACC ACC ACC ACC

16 X3 - X4 ACC ACC ACC ACC X3 - X4 ACC ACC ACC ACC

17 X5 - X6 200 2.0 30 1000 X5 - X6 200 2.0 30 1000

18 FP1 - FP1 200 2.0 30 1000 FP1 - FP1 200 2.0 30 1000

19 FP1 - FP1 20 2.0 30 100 FP1 - FP1 20 2.0 30 100

20 FP1 - FP1 20 0.03 120 100 FP1 - FP1 20 0.03 120 100

21 FP1 - FP1 200 1.0 60 1000 FP1 - FP1 200 1.0 60 1000

ch 22 to 64


ch 22 to 64




4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

* VA to VIIIA, IIIB to VIB and VIIIB to VIIID

Pattern VII B Pattern *



1 FP1 - AV ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP1 ACC ACC ACC ACC

2 FP2 - AV ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP1 ACC ACC ACC ACC

3 F3 - AV ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP1 ACC ACC ACC ACC


5 C3 - AV ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP1 ACC ACC ACC ACC

6 C4 - AV ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP1 ACC ACC ACC ACC

7 P3 - AV ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP1 ACC ACC ACC ACC

8 P4 - AV ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP1 ACC ACC ACC ACC

9 O1 - AV ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP1 ACC ACC ACC ACC

10 O2 - AV ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP1 ACC ACC ACC ACC

11 A1 - AV ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP1 ACC ACC ACC ACC

12 A2 - AV ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP1 ACC ACC ACC ACC



15 T3 - AV ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP1 ACC ACC ACC ACC


17 T5 -AV ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP1 ACC ACC ACC ACC


19 FZ - AV ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP1 ACC ACC ACC ACC

20 FC - AV ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP1 ACC ACC ACC ACC

21 PZ - AV ACC ACC ACC ACC FP1 - FP1 ACC ACC ACC ACC

ch 22 to 64


ch 22 to 64




4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Automatic PhoticStimulation Settings

FrequencyStep

AUTO 1 AUTO2 AUTO 3

1 3 Hz 1 Hz 0.5 Hz

2 6 3 -

3 9 5 -

4 12 7 -

5 15 9 -

6 18 11 -

7 21 13 -

8 24 15 -

9 27 17 -

10 30 19 -

11 33 21 -

12 - 23 -

13 - 25 -

14 - 27 -

15 - 29 -

16 - 31 -

17 - 33 -

18 - - -

19 - - -

20 - - -

21 - - -

22 - - -

23 - - -

24 - - -

25 - - -

26


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

System Setting Dialog BoxOptions

General page

Junction box, operation display

page

* When a MO disk drive is not installed.

Setting Factory default setting

Data Storage Storage Drive: C *

Automatic copy after acquisition: Off

C:¥NKT¥EEG1100

Montage description 10-20

Sampling frequency 500 Hz

Aspect ratio 17

Other Settings Automatically save selected waves: Off

Use current system settings in review: Off

Save current system settings with EEG

data when exporting selected wave: Off

2 bed acquisition: Off

AC filter 50 Hz

Reference electrode for Imp check A1/A2

Reference electrode for EEG C3/C4

Patient Image Enable video camera: Off

Use analog video link: Off

Show camera window in review: Off

Control VTR by EEG 1000: Off

Long term monitoring Use long term monitoring: Off

Save settings as an Acquisition shortcut System Setting 1


Reset when pattern changes Reference electrode: On

AC filter: Off

Override: On

Record time: On

Pattern number when group changes Return to one

Impedance check 10 min

Electrode junction box time constant 10 s

Impedacne threshold switch Descending

HV time event interval 30 s

Post HV auto end On, 300 s

Page display time Pause 1: 250 msec

Pause 2: 500 msec

Pause 3: 750 msec

Reset switch function Press and hold

Time constant seconds

High cut filter 30, 60 Hz

Sens 3 or 2.5 Off

Add events in fast review Event: Check

before: 0 s


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Standard page

DC input/output, pen recorder page


Pattern IA

ACC [All chanel control] Amp settings CAL voltage: 50 mV

Sensitivity: 10 mV/mm

Time constant: 0.3 s

High cut filter: 120 Hz

CAL Auto square

Acquisition Manual

Impedacne check threshold 10 kΩPhotic/HV Mode: Auto1

Photic

Stimulation time: 10 s

Pause: 10 s

Hyperventilation

Period: 3 min

Interval: 3 s

Paper speed Not available

Record Cal wave On

AC filter Off

Display patient image Not available


DC output sensitivity 1.0 V/5 mm

DC input sensitivity at 200 mV/mm 5 mm/1.0 V

Pattern mark analog output in review Output current pattern: Off

Mark position Pattern mark: bottom

Sensitivity: top

Manual Mark: top

Pen parking when not used Not available

Record switch starts filing in acquisition Not available

Play button starts recording in review Not available

Extend pen reset period Not available

Stop feeding at paper fold Not available


4. SYSTEM PROGRAM



Section 5 Acquisition Program

General .............................................................................................................................. 5.1

Flowchart of Acquiring EEG Waveforms ....................................................... 5.2

Opening the Acquisition Program ...................................................................................... 5.3

Acquisition Screen ............................................................................................................. 5.4


Menu Bar ................................................................................................................. 5.5

File Menu ................................................................................................................. 5.5

New ............................................................................................................... 5.5

Close ............................................................................................................. 5.5

Patient ........................................................................................................... 5.5

FFT setup ...................................................................................................... 5.5

Exit ................................................................................................................ 5.5

Display Menu ........................................................................................................... 5.6

Display Control .............................................................................................. 5.6

5 s/page ......................................................................................................... 5.6

10 s/page ....................................................................................................... 5.6

15 s/page ....................................................................................................... 5.6

20 s/page ....................................................................................................... 5.6

30 s/page ....................................................................................................... 5.6

60 s/page ....................................................................................................... 5.6

5 min/page ..................................................................................................... 5.6

Even Layout ................................................................................................... 5.6

Channel Layout ............................................................................................. 5.6

Superimpose ................................................................................................. 5.6

Tool Bar ......................................................................................................... 5.6

Event Bar ....................................................................................................... 5.6

Amp Bar ........................................................................................................ 5.6

Tool Menu ................................................................................................................ 5.7

Timer ............................................................................................................. 5.7

Camera .......................................................................................................... 5.7

Voltage Cursor ............................................................................................... 5.7

Time Cursor ................................................................................................... 5.7

Ruler .............................................................................................................. 5.7

Standard ........................................................................................................ 5.7


Auto Record................................................................................................... 5.7

Long term ...................................................................................................... 5.7

FFT Map ........................................................................................................ 5.7

Digital Video .................................................................................................. 5.7

Control Menu ........................................................................................................... 5.8

Activation ....................................................................................................... 5.8

AC Filter ......................................................................................................... 5.8

ECG Filter ...................................................................................................... 5.8

BN Balance.................................................................................................... 5.8

AV Delete ....................................................................................................... 5.8

Pattern Table ................................................................................................. 5.8

CAL Control ................................................................................................... 5.8

Option Menu ............................................................................................................ 5.8

Help Menu ............................................................................................................... 5.8

About ............................................................................................................. 5.8

Amp Bar ................................................................................................................... 5.9

Sens (Sensitivity selection button) ................................................................. 5.9

TC (Time constant selection button) .............................................................. 5.9

HF (High-cut filter selection button) ............................................................... 5.9

Pat (Pattern selection button) ...................................................................... 5.10

Ref (Reference electrode selection button) ................................................. 5.10

Clock ........................................................................................................... 5.10

Elapsed time ................................................................................................ 5.10

Tool Bar .................................................................................................................. 5.11

AC Filter On/Off button ................................................................................. 5.11

Display Pattern Table button ......................................................................... 5.11

CAL Signal button ......................................................................................... 5.11

EEG Signal button ........................................................................................ 5.11

Impedance Check button .............................................................................. 5.11

Reset button ................................................................................................. 5.11

Freeze button ............................................................................................... 5.11

Display Patient Information button ................................................................ 5.11

Display Activation Control button .................................................................. 5.11

Start/Stop Filing button ................................................................................. 5.11

Event Bar ............................................................................................................... 5.12

Starting and Ending EEG Measurement .......................................................................... 5.13

Starting Measurement ........................................................................................... 5.13

Ending the Measurement and Saving the File ....................................................... 5.14

Closing the File Without Saving ............................................................................. 5.15

Entering Patient Information and Other Data ................................................................... 5.16

General .................................................................................................................. 5.16

Opening the Patient Information Dialog Box .......................................................... 5.16

Patient Information Dialog Box Options ................................................................. 5.17

Entering the Patient Information ............................................................................ 5.18

Checking the Skin-electrode Impedance ......................................................................... 5.19

Setting Impedance Threshold ................................................................................ 5.19

Checking Skin-electrode Impedance ..................................................................... 5.20

Displaying the Calibration Waveform ............................................................................... 5.21

Displaying and Saving the Calibration Waveform .................................................. 5.21


Changing the Calibration Waveform ...................................................................... 5.21

Changing the Pattern ....................................................................................................... 5.22

Changing the Measurement Settings ............................................................................... 5.23

Changing Amplifier Settings for All Selected Channels .......................................... 5.23

Setting ACC ................................................................................................. 5.23

Changing the Amplifier Setting .................................................................... 5.24

Changing Amplifier Settings for Individual Channels ............................................. 5.25

Changing Amplifier Settings for One Channel ............................................. 5.25

Changing Amplifier Settings for Two or More Channels .............................. 5.25

Changed Settings and ACC Marks ........................................................................ 5.26

Changing the Montage .......................................................................................... 5.27

Changing the Reference Electrode ........................................................................ 5.29

Selecting or Deleting Electrodes for AV Derivation ................................................ 5.30

Adjusting BN Balance for BN Derivation ................................................................ 5.31

Changing the Waveform Display Settings ............................................................. 5.32

About Display Control Dialog Box ............................................................... 5.32

Displaying the Derivation (Montage) and/or Comment

Beside Each Channel .................................................................................. 5.32

Displaying the Time Scale ........................................................................... 5.32

Displaying the Extended Channel Bar ......................................................... 5.32

Displaying the Vertical Lines for the Events ................................................ 5.32

Displaying the Montage Map Window. ......................................................... 5.32

Changing Waveform Display Positions ........................................................ 5.34

Displaying/Not Displaying a Waveform........................................................ 5.34

Changing the Waveform Display Speed ...................................................... 5.35

Changing a Waveform Color ....................................................................... 5.35

Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform ...................................... 5.35

Returning All Waveforms to the Baseline .................................................... 5.36

Using the AC Filter ................................................................................................. 5.36

Using the ECG Filter .............................................................................................. 5.36

Changing the Various Settings to the Default Settings .......................................... 5.38

Annotating EEG Waveforms ............................................................................................ 5.39

General .................................................................................................................. 5.39

Manually Annotating the Waveforms ..................................................................... 5.40

Adding a Registered Annotation .................................................................. 5.40

Entering an Annotation with the Keyboard ................................................... 5.40

Using the Annotation Dialog Box ................................................................. 5.40

Adding a Screen Comment ......................................................................... 5.41

Using the Timers .............................................................................................................. 5.42

About the Timer Bar ............................................................................................... 5.42

Manual Timer ......................................................................................................... 5.42

Record (Recording) Timer ..................................................................................... 5.43

HV and Post HV Timer .......................................................................................... 5.43

Measuring Amplitude and Time with the Cursors and Ruler ............................................ 5.44

About Cursor Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 5.44

Using the Voltage Cursor ....................................................................................... 5.44

Using the Time Cursor ........................................................................................... 5.45

Using the Ruler ...................................................................................................... 5.46

Photic Stimulation and Hyperventilation .......................................................................... 5.47


About Activation Bar .............................................................................................. 5.48

Photic Stimulation .................................................................................................. 5.50

Automatic Photic Stimulation ....................................................................... 5.50

Manual Photic Stimulation ........................................................................... 5.51

Single Photic Stimulation ............................................................................. 5.51

Hyperventilation ..................................................................................................... 5.52

Creating the FFT Data for DSA Trendgraph .................................................................... 5.53

Automatic EEG Waveform Recording .............................................................................. 5.54

Long Term EEG Waveform Monitoring ............................................................................ 5.56

Setting Example..................................................................................................... 5.56

Procedure .............................................................................................................. 5.57

Displaying the Patient Image ........................................................................................... 5.58

Keyboard Operation ......................................................................................................... 5.59

Recording Marks .............................................................................................................. 5.61

5. ACQUISITION PROGRAM


General

The Acquisition program acquires the EEG waveforms and can display up to 64

channels of EEG waveforms. You can save the EEG waveforms with the patient

information, annotations, amplifier settings and display settings in a hard disk or

MO disk as an EEG data file.

Before or during recording you can temporarily change the measurement settings

and enter patient information. Temporary setting changes are lost when you close

the Acquisition program. Temporary setting changes are either lost or still apply

when you change the pattern - this depends on the Reset when pattern changes

setting. Refer to “Resetting the Settings When Pattern Changes” in Section 3.

Temporary setting changes are indicated on the pattern table (refer to “Changing

the Measurement Settings”).

To permanently change a setting, you must use the System program. Refer to

Section 4.

WARNINGWhen using the instrument for brain death diagnosis, before




CAUTION• During measurement, do not change the date and time. This makes

the order of the saved event data and the time of the saved

waveforms incorrect.

• After measurement, when backing up the EEG data file, use the CD-R

disk. If an MO disk or CD-RW disk is used, the data file may be lost

by being formatted or deleted accidentally.


opening the Acquisition program. Otherwise, the Acquisition

program may not function properly.



Flowchart of Acquiring EEG Waveforms

1. Start the Acquisition program. (New file automatically opens)

2. Enter the patient information.*

3. Attach the electrodes to the patient.

4. Check skin electrode contact impedance.

5. Start EEG measurement (recording).

6. Display and record the calibration waveforms.

7. Measure the waveforms.

8. Measure the waveforms with activation.

9. Display and record the calibration waveforms.

10. End the EEG measurement.

11. Close (save) the EEG file.

12. End the Acquisition program.

After measurement, use the Review program to review and print out the EEG

waveforms.

* Patient information may be entered before, during or after recording.

↓

↓

↓

↓

↓

↓

↓

↓

↓

↓

↓



Opening the Acquisition Program


opening the Acquisition program. Otherwise, the Acquisition

program may not function properly.

From the EEG 1000 window, double-click the Acquisition icon. The EEG

waveforms are displayed and a new EEG file automatically opens with the Patient

Information dialog box.

To close the Acquisition program:

CAUTIONDo not remove the magneto-optical disk until the Acquisition

program is completely closed and the disk drive access lamp is off.

Otherwise, the disk or disk drive may be damaged.

Select Exit from the File menu. The Acquisition program returns to the icon.



Acquisition Screen

To display the extended channel bar, check the “Display extended channel bar” check box in theDisplay Control dialog box. The DC conversion value and the scales corresponding to the DC lowand high limit are displayed.

• To display the extended channel bar, refer to “Changing the Measurement Settings - Changing the

Waveform Display” in this section 4.

• To change the DC conversion settings, refer to the DC input “Programming Patterns - Changing the

Conversion Range of the DC Input Signals” in Section 4.You can display either the montage or comment on the extended channel bar. Refer to “ProgrammingPatterns - Selecting the Item Displayed on the Extended Channel Bar” in Section 4.

Menu bar

Amp bar:You can change the amplifier setting for allchannels whose amplifier setting is set to ACC.

Tool bar:Shortcut buttons frequently usedfor measurement

Event bar:You can manually mark theannotations on the waveforms.

You can move the amp bar, tool bar, activation bar, timer bar and event barto any position on the screen by dragging it. The activation bar and timerbar can be displayed by selecting each command from a menu.When filing is not started, the “Not Filing” message appears.

Electrode namedisplay area

Waveformdisplay area

Extended channel barChannel number Montage




Menu Bar

You can manage files. All EEG measurement data is saved in files.

New

Use this command to create a new file. If any other files are open when you

select New, a message appears so you can save the files before creating a new

file. Refer to “Starting and Ending EEG Measurement - Closing the File

without Saving” in this section.

Close

Closes and saves the current file. Refer to “Starting and Ending EEG

Measurement - Ending the Measurement and Saving the File” in this section.

Patient

Opens the Patient Information dialog box to enter the patient information. You

can also open the Patient Information dialog box by clicking the Display

Patient Information button on the tool bar. Refer to “Entering Patient

Information and Other Data” in this section.

FFT setup

Opens the FFT settings dialog box to select the FFT analysis settings for the

EEG frequency analysis.

Exit

Closes the Acquisition program and reduces it to an icon.

File Menu



You can set the waveform display mode.

Display ControlOpens the Display Control dialog box to select whether or not to display the

electrode name (montage) and vertical lines to indicate time scale, etc.

5 s/pageDisplays a 5 second page on the screen (corresponds to recording at 60 mm/s).






5 min/pageDisplays a 5 minute page on the screen (corresponds to recording at 1 mm/s).

Even LayoutEvenly spaces the baseline positions for all channels in channel order. Channelsthat are temporarily turned off are omitted.

Channel LayoutEvenly spaces the baseline positions for all channels in channel order. Blank

spaces are included to indicate undisplayed channels.

SuperimposeOverlaps consecutive odd and even number channels.

Tool BarDisplays the Tool bar.

Event BarDisplays the Event bar.

Amp BarDisplays the amp bar.

Display Menu



You can use the following tools for EEG measurement.

Timer

Opens the Timer bar to display the recording timer, hyperventilation and post

hyperventilation timer or stopwatch.

Camera

Displays the patient image on the screen. The optional QI-111A Camera

interface board and a video camera are required. The Enable video camera

check box (System program → System Settings → General page) must be

selected in the System Setting window of the System program. Refer to

“Changing the Settings in the System Settings Dialog Box” in Section 3.

Voltage Cursor

Displays the two horizontal cursors to measure the voltage (amplitude)

between the two cursors. This function is available only when the screen is

frozen by clicking the Freeze button on the tool bar.

Time Cursor

Displays the two vertical cursors to measure the time interval between the two

cursors. This function is available only when the screen is frozen by clicking

the Freeze button on the tool bar.

Ruler

Displays the ruler to measure amplitude and time interval of the waveform.

This function is available only when the screen is frozen by clicking the

Freeze button on the tool bar.

Standard

Restores the various settings to the default settings set in the System program.

Auto Record

Opens the Auto Record dialog box for the automatic EEG waveform recording.

Long term

Opens the Long Term bar for the long term EEG waveform monitoring.

FFT Map


Digital Video


Tool Menu



Control Menu

Activation

Opens the activation bar to select the photic stimulation mode, and optional

pulse, frequency and hyperventilation mode. You can also open the activation

bar by clicking the Display Activation Control button on the tool bar.

AC Filter

Turns the AC filter on to reduce the AC interference. You can also turn the AC

filter on by clicking the AC Filter On/Off button on the tool bar.

ECG Filter

Opens the ECG Filter dialog box to reduce the ECG waveform superimposed

on the EEG waveform. When another pattern is selected, the ECG filter is

automatically set to off.

BN Balance

Opens the BN Balance dialog box to adjust the voltage balance between the

BN reference electrodes when the balanced noncephalic derivation is selected.

AV Delete

Opens the AV Delete dialog box to select or delete reference electrodes in the

AV derivation.

Pattern Table

Opens the pattern table to check or temporarily change the currently selected

montage, amplifier settings (sensitivity, time constant, high-cut filter,

calibration voltage), waveform display on/off, waveform color, and amplitude

limit for each channel. You can also open the pattern table by clicking the

Display Pattern Table button on the tool bar.

CAL Control

Opens the CAL Control dialog box to select the calibration mode and voltage.

Installed optional programs can be opened from the Option menu. The EEG

Scope - comparison mode is provided as a standard. For the EEG Scope -

comparison mode, refer to the EEG Scope Operator’s manual.

About

Displays the information about program.

Help Menu

Option Menu



Amp Bar

The amplifier settings (sensitivity, time constant and high-cut filter), pattern and

reference electrodes can be changed for all channels at a time by clicking the

button on the amp bar. You can select whether or not to display the amp bar byclicking the Amp bar button on the tool bar.

Sens (Sensitivity selection button)Opens the Sensitivity dialog box to select the sensitivity. This selection applies

to all channels whose sensitivity setting is set to ACC.

Sensitivity selection list (µV/mm):

1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200OFF: Only the baseline is displayed.

TC (Time constant selection button)Opens the Time Constant dialog box to select the time constant (low-cut filter).

This selection applies to all channels whose Time Constant setting is set toACC. You can select the time constant display format (time constant (s) or

low-cut filter (Hz)) in the System program.

Time constant selection list (s):

0.001, 0.003, 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 0.6, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 10.0

Low-cut filter selection list (Hz):

0.016, 0.032, 0.08, 0.16, 0.27, 0.53, 1.6, 5.3, 53, 160

HF (High-cut filter selection button)Opens the High Cut Filter dialog box to select the high cut filter. This selectionapplies to all channels whose high-cut filter setting is set to ACC.

High-cut filter selection list (Hz):15, 35, 70, 120, 300, 600, 1,200, 3,000

50RP: Reduces frequency components over 50 Hz (-18 dB/oct) to removeartifacts (EMG). Depending on examination circumstances, use the

50RP filter to remove EMG.

NOTEThe selectable settings (buttons) in the HF dialog box change

according to the sampling frequency setting in “Selecting and

Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition” in Section 4.



Pat (Pattern selection button)

Opens the Pattern dialog box to select a programmed EEG pattern.

Programmed pattern list:

I to VIII A, B, C, D and Free A, B, C, D (36 patterns per set file).

A pattern includes the montage and amplifier settings (sensitivity, high-cut

filter, time constant), calibration voltage, waveform display on/off, waveforms

color and amplitude limit.

Ref (Reference electrode selection button)

NOTEWhen the reference electrode is set to A1 + A2 in waveform

acquisition, you cannot change this setting during waveform review.

Opens to select the reference electrode. Only available for monopolar

derivation.

Reference electrode selection list:

A1 → A2: Switches all A1 to A2.

A1 ← A2: Switches all A2 to A1.

A1 ↔ A2: Switches A1 and A2.

A1 + A2: Short-circuits A1 and A2 to each other in the electrode junction

box.

Vx: Switches all A1 and A2 to CZ.

AV: Switches all A1 and A2 to the reference for AV derivation.

BN: Switches all A1 and A2 to the reference for BN derivation.

SD : Switches all A1 and A2 to the reference for Laplacian derivation.

Aav: Switches all A1 and A2 to the averaged reference of A1 and A2.

Org: When the JE-425A electrode junction box, or JE-208A, JE-210A

mini junction box is used:

switches all A1 and A2 to the averaged voltage of C3 and C4 (or

F3 and F4) for the original reference derivation (system

reference).

When the JE-213A mini junction box is used:

switches all A11 and A12 to the averaged voltage of A5 and A6

(or A3 and A4) for the original reference derivation (system

reference).

OFF: Cancels the selection of reference electrode and returns to the

programmed setting.

Clock

Displays the current time.

Elapsed time

Displays the elapsed time from the start of filing.



AC Filter On/Off button


filter on by selecting AC Filter from the Control menu.

Display Pattern Table button




limit for each channel. You can also open the pattern table by selecting Pattern

Table from the Control menu.

CAL Signal button

Displays the calibration waveform.

EEG Signal button

Displays the EEG waveforms.

Impedance Check button

Opens the Impedance Check dialog box to check the skin-electrode contact

impedance. The impedance check starts when this button is pressed and held

for about two seconds.

Reset button

Returns all waveforms to the baseline position. When this button is clicked the

“RESET ON/OFF” annotation is displayed at the bottom of the screen and the

annotation is saved in a file as an event.

Freeze button

Freezes the waveforms. The EEG waveforms can still be acquired while they

are frozen. You can verify the waveforms and measure amplitude or time

interval of the waveform.

Display Patient Information button


can also open the Patient Information dialog box by selecting Patient from the

File menu.

Display Activation Control button

Opens the activation bar to select the photic stimulation mode, and optional

pulse, frequency and hyperventilation mode. You can also open the activation

bar by selecting Activation from the Control menu.

Start/Stop Filing button

Starts/Stops saving the EEG data in a file. The remaining available data

acquisition time (minute) based on the remaining free disk space is displayed

beside this button.

Tool Bar

Units: minutes



You can manually add event marks (annotation) on the waveforms.

To add an annotation to a waveform that you want:

1) Right-click the waveform. The Annotation dialog box opens.

2) Select the annotation in the list or type the annotation.

To add an annotation to the current time on the waveform:

• Click the annotation on the event bar, or press the corresponding function key on

the keyboard. To change the annotation display, click the Next button on the

event bar. You can add an event mark by typing the annotation in the event name

input text box.

• 1) Press the Insert key on the keyboard. The Annotation dialog box opens.

2) Select the annotation in the list or type the annotation.

Refer to “Annotating EEG Waveforms” in this section.

Event Bar

Event name input text box



NOTE• When saving the EEG data file in an MO disk, prepare a formatted

MO disk with a volume number. Refer to “Formatting a Magneto-

optical Disk” in Section 3.

• Before measurement, check the following.

- The electrodes that are used for waveform acquisition and

sampling frequency are properly selected considering the disk

capacity and recording time (Refer to “Selecting and Saving the

Electrode for Waveform Acquisition” in Section 4).

- Storage drive is correctly selected. Refer to “Selecting Storage

Drive - Changing the Settings in the System Setting Dialog Box” in

Section 4.

Click the Start/Stop Filing button on the tool bar to start saving EEG

waveforms. The Recording LED lights to indicate that EEG waveforms are being

saved in the disk.

To stop saving EEG waveforms, click the Start/Stop Filing button again.

The Elapsed box on the amp bar shows the total elapsed measurement time.

The box beside the Start/Stop Filing button shows the remaining available data

acquisition time based on the remaining free disk space.

Starting and Ending EEG Measurement

Starting Measurement

“Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk” in Section 3 explains settings which

determine the amount of disk space used by recording.

To return all waveforms to the baseline position, click the Reset button on the

tool bar When this button is clicked the “RESET ON/OFF” annotation is

displayed at the bottom of the screen and the annotation is saved in a file as an

event.

Time Total elapsedmeasurement time

Remaining available dataacquisition time (minutes)

Lights while saving EEGwaveforms

Start/Stop Filing button



Ending the Measurementand Saving the File CAUTION

Do not remove the magneto-optical disk until the Acquisition

program is completely closed and the disk drive access lamp is off.

Otherwise, the disk or disk drive may be damaged.

NOTE• The patient’s ID and name must be entered in order to close the EEG

file.

• To save the EEG waveforms, do the following steps. Otherwise, the

EEG waveforms are lost.

1. Click the Start/Stop Filing button on the tool bar.

2. Select Close from the File menu. The Close dialog box opens. In the dialog

box, the patient name, ID, examination date, examination number, total

recording time, and file name (EEG data file name) are displayed.

3. Click the OK button to close the EEG data file.

To cancel closing, click the Cancel button. The Patient Information dialog box

opens. Check the contents of the dialog box and continue the measurement.

If a file which has the same ID number but different patient name or sex is

registered in the database manager, the Information dialog box opens.

Select the proper option and click the OK button.



Closing the File WithoutSaving

1. Click the Start/Stop Filing button on the tool bar.

2. Select New from the File menu. The New dialog box opens.


• To close the file without saving, click the No button. A new file

automatically opens.

• To close and save the file, click the Yes button. A new file automatically

opens.

• To continue measurement, click the Cancel button.



NOTEThe patient’s ID and name must be entered in order to close the EEG

file.

You can enter the patient information by either mouse or keyboard.

There are two pages in the patient information dialog box. You can enter the basic

patient information on page 1 and the patient condition such as seizure type, sleep

disorder, medical history, and medication on page 2.

Click the Display Patient Information button on the tool bar, or select Patient

Information from the File menu. The Patient Information dialog box opens.

To open the page 2, click the 2 tab.

To close the Patient Information dialog box, click the OK button.

Entering Patient Information and Other Data

General

Opening the PatientInformation Dialog Box

Patient Information dialog box page 1

Clear All:

Deletes the patient information on pages 1 and 2.

OK:

Closes the Patient Information dialog box.

Search:

Searches for the patient information by ID

number.




Patient Information DialogBox Options

The settings in the list box can be changed. Refer to “Editing the Waveform

Annotation and Patient Information Items” in Section 4.


Entry items for Patient Information dialog box:

• ID (up to 30 characters) • Comment (up to 160 characters)

• Name (up to 40 characters) • Date (Examination date)

(up to 10 characters)

• Sex (M or F) • EEG No. (Examination number)


• Date of Birth (up to 10 characters) • In/Out patient (In or Out)

• Age (up to 5 characters) • Refer. Dept (Referring department)


• Handedness (L or R) • Physician (up to 40 characters)

• Height (up to 5 numbers) • Operator (up to 40 characters)

• Weight (up to 5 numbers)

The Date (Examination date) is automatically entered.

Enter the Date of Birth with the same format as the Date.

The age is automatically calculated when the date of birth is entered.

This function does not support ages of 100 or older.

If the age of the patient is 100 or older, edit the age manually.

The format of the Date and Date of Birth can be changed with the Windows

Control Panel.

Table:

Calls up a list of preset conditions for “Comment”. When one of these conditions

is clicked, it is entered at the cursor position in the Comment window. You can

preset conditions for each item. Refer to “Editing the Waveform Annotations and

Patient Information Items” in section 4.

Clear:

Deletes the patient information on page 1.


Entry items for the Patient Information 2 dialog box:

Up to 180 characters can be entered. You can call up the preset condition list by

clicking the Table button.

1. Patient Condition

2. Seizure Type

3. Sleep Disorder

4. Medical History

5. Medication

Clear:

Deletes the patient information on page 2.



Entering the PatientInformation

NOTE• Patient ID and name must be entered, otherwise the EEG file cannot

be closed.

• The characters “ | ” and “ ’ ” cannot be entered.

• To delete the currently displayed or entered patient information:

Click the Clear button on the dialog box.

• To select a description box:

1) Move the mouse pointer to the description box and click it. The input cursor

appears.

2) Type the text with the keyboard.

• To move the cursor to the next description box:

Press the TAB key. If there is any word in the box, it is highlighted.

• To move the cursor to a previous description box:

Press the TAB and SHIFT keys together. If there is any word in the box, it is

highlighted.

• To insert a character in a description box:

1) Move the mouse pointer to the appropriate position in the box and click it.

The cursor appears at the pointer position.

2) Type a character with the keyboard.

• To change text:

1) Move the mouse pointer to the appropriate word or phrase and double-click

it to select the word or phrase. The selected word or phrase is highlighted.

2) Type the text with the keyboard. The new text replaces the highlighted text.

• To enter text in a table or a selection list box:

The following items have a table or selection list box. The settings are preset in

the System program.

Table: Comment, Patient Condition, Seizure Type, Sleep disorder,

Medical History, Medication

Selection list box: Refer. Dept, Physician, and Operator.


The input cursor appears.

2) Click the table button (the arrow following the box for “Refer. Dept”,

“Physician”, and “Operator”) to open the selection list box.

3) Click the text in the selection list box to enter the text.

• To enter text using a button:

“Sex”, “Handedness” and “In/Outpatient” can be selected by clicking the

corresponding button.



Checking the Skin-electrode Impedance

WARNINGDo not check the skin-electrode contact impedance when using a

needle electrode or intracranial electrode. Failure to follow this

warning injures the patient because these electrodes will be damaged

by electrolyzation inside the body.

NOTE• The impedance can only be checked in the Acquisition program.

• When the JE-425A electrode junction box, or JE-208A, JE-210A mini

junction box is used,

attach the Z, C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4), A1 and A2 (or Fp1 and Fp2, JE-

425A only) electrodes to the patient.

When the JE-213A mini junction box is used,

attach the Z, A5 and A6 (or A3 and A4), A11 and A12 electrodes to the

patient.

Otherwise, the impedance check result may be incorrect.

The instrument checks the skin-electrode impedance for the following electrodes.

• When calibration waveforms are displayed, the electrodes that are included in all

pattern are checked.

• When the EEG waveforms are displayed, the electrodes that are included in the

currently selected pattern are checked.

To select the impedance threshold for the skin-electrode impedance check, press the

impedance preset key on the electrode junction box to select 2, 5, 10, 20 or 50 kΩ.

Setting ImpedanceThreshold

Impedance check key

Impedance preset

key

Impedance display LED




Checking Skin-electrodeImpedance

On the electrode junction box:

1. Press and hold the IMPEDANCE CHECK key on the electrode junction box

for about two seconds to start skin-electrode contact impedance check. After

about one second, the impedance check result is displayed by LEDs on the

electrode junction box and on the screen. The LED continuously lights if the

corresponding electrode’s impedance exceeds the preset value (threshold).

2. Press the IMPEDANCE CHECK key again to complete the impedance check.

On the screen:

1. Move the mouse pointer to the Impedance Check button on the tool bar.

2. Press and hold the left mouse button for about two seconds to start the skin-

electrode impedance check. The Impedance Check dialog box opens on the

screen. The currently selected montage is displayed on the dialog box.

The impedance check result is displayed on the screen with measured

impedance and color, and on the electrode junction box. If an electrode’s

impedance exceeds the preset value (threshold) on the electrode junction box,

it is highlighted on the Impedance Check dialog box.

3. Click the OK button to close the Impedance Check dialog box.




2. Select the new CAL mode.

<CAL Mode>

There are four types of calibration modes.

AUTO : Every two seconds, an upgoing or downgoing pulse is

generated. The polarity of the pulse alternates each time.

The calibration wave stops when the EEG button is clicked.

AUTO : Generates a sine wave when the CAL button is clicked. The

calibration wave stops when the EEG button is clicked.

MANUAL : When the CAL button is pressed and held, an upgoing pulse

is generated; when the CAL button is released, a downgoing

pulse is generated.

MANUAL : Generates a sine wave while the CAL button is pressed and

held.

3. Select the calibration voltage in the CAL Voltage selection list box. All

channels whose CAL Voltage settings are set to ACC are changed to the

selected calibration voltage.


Displaying the Calibration Waveform

Displaying and Saving theCalibration Waveform

Changing the CalibrationWaveform

Usually a calibration waveform is recorded before and after EEG waveform

measurement.

Click the CAL Signal button on the tool bar. The calibration waveforms are

displayed on the screen.

• To stop displaying the calibration waveform, and return to measuring the EEG

waveforms, click the EEG Signal button on the tool bar.

• To save the calibration waveforms, click the Start/Stop filing button

on the tool bar. When the calibration waveforms are displayed, the calibration

waveforms are saved in an EEG data file with the EEG waveforms.

1. Select CAL Control from the Control menu. The CAL Control dialog box

opens.



Changing the Pattern

36 patterns (I to VIII A, B, C, D and Free A, B, C, D) are available per set file. A

pattern includes the montage and amplifier settings (sensitivity, high-cut filter and

time constant), calibration voltage, waveform display on/off, waveform color and

amplitude limit. You can change the preset pattern settings with the System

program (Refer to “Programming Patterns” in Section 4).

1. Click the Pat button on the amp bar. The Pattern selection dialog box

opens.

2. Click the new pattern.

3. Click the OK button to close the Pattern selection dialog box.

4. Click the Start/Stop Filing button on the tool bar to save the EEG

waveform in a EEG data file.

To stop saving, click the Start/Stop Filing button again.

Changes the pattern group.

Changes the pattern inthe selected group. You can set the pattern to FREE A to D during the

EEG measurement. The setting remains in memoryafter the power is turned off.



Changing the Measurement Settings

NOTEThe selectable settings in the HF dialog box and pattern table change


Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition” in Section 4.

The ACC (All Channel Control) setting lets you change amplifier settings for more

than one channel on all patterns at the same time. All channels which have the

amplifier settings set to ACC are linked together. When you change the Sens, TC,

HF on the amp bar or CAL setting, that setting automatically changes for all ACC

channels.

Setting ACC

Use this procedure to set a channel’s amplifier setting to ACC.

Changed amplifier settings during waveform acquisition are temporary changes

and are lost when you close the Acquisition program. In order to keep changes, use

the System program to change the settings.

1. Click the Display Pattern Table button on the tool bar, or select Pattern

Table from the Control menu. The pattern table opens.

2. Select the setting(s) to change. A broken rectangle encloses the selected

setting.



Changing AmplifierSettings for All SelectedChannels

3

1

2






Click the Sens, TC, HF button at the top of column.

The selection list box for the setting appears in the right side of the pattern

table.

3. Click ACC.

4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 to change other settings, if necessary.

5. Click the OK button to close pattern table.

Changing the Amplifier Setting

1. Click the Sens, TC or HF button on the amp bar. The Sensitivity, Time

Constant or High Cut Filter dialog box opens.

Example: Sensitivity dialog box

2. Click the new setting. All channels whose settings are set to ACC are changed

to the selected sensitivity. The selected setting is indicated on the box above

the button.




You can change amplifier settings for individual channels. Even if the setting is

ACC (see “Changing Amplifier Settings for All Selected Channels”), you can still

change settings for individual channels using this procedure.

Changing Amplifier Settings for One Channel

This setting change is lost when another pattern is selected or when you close the

Acquisition program.

1. Click the channel number on the left side of the waveform. The channel

number of the selected channel is highlighted.



Changing AmplifierSettings for IndividualChannels

3. Click the new settings


Changing Amplifier Settings for Two or More Channels

This setting change, except for a free pattern, is lost when another pattern is

selected or when you close the Acquisition program.





2. Select the setting(s) to change on the pattern table. The selected setting is

enclosed by a dotted rectangle.






Click the Sens, TC, HF button at the top of column.


table.

3. Click the new setting in the selection list box.

The settings enclosed by the dotted rectangles changes to the new settings. An

“*” mark is displayed before all changed settings which are temporary

changes.

4. Click the OK button to close the pattern table.

Changed settings and ACC are indicated on the pattern table as follows:Changed Settings andACC Marks

When you change Sens, TC, HF or CAL on the amp bar, all ACC settings are

changed. If you select and change any individual setting in the pattern table, only

that setting is changed. If an ACC setting is set to an individual value, it can be

changed individually.

Mark Meaning

$ Temporarily changed reference electrode

* Any other temporarily changed settings.

Highlighted Sensitivity, TC, HF or CAL setting which is not set to ACC.

Not highlighted Sensitivity, TC, HF or CAL setting which is set to ACC.



You can change the montage by changing electrodes. An “*” mark appears to the

right of all changed electrodes as temporary changes. This setting change, except

for a free pattern, is lost when another pattern is selected or when you close the

Acquisition program.

NOTEElectrodes that are not saved with EEG waveforms are displayed in

red on the Pattern table and Electrode position layout table. You

cannot review the EEG waveforms in a montage which includes

unsaved electrodes. To save an electrode, refer to “Selecting and

the Electrodes to be Saved with EEG Waveforms” in Section 4.




are enclosed by dotted rectangles. The Electrode position layout table opens.






Click the G1 or G2 button at top of column.




Reference electrode:

AV: The reference for AV derivation.

BN: The reference for BN derivation.

SD : The reference for Laplacian derivation.

Aav: The averaged reference of A1 and A2.

0 V button:


potential between the system reference (C3/C4) and selected electrode which

is not set to “0 V”.

3. Click an electrode in the Electrode position layout table to select it.

The selected G1 or G2 electrode(s) enclosed by the broken rectangle is

replaced with the selected new electrode. The dotted rectangle moves to the

next electrode.





Changing the ReferenceElectrode

NOTEWhen the reference electrode is set to A1 + A2 in acquisition, you

cannot change this setting during review.

When the EEG waveforms are displayed with monopolar montages using A1 and

A2 electrodes, you can change the reference electrode. Changed electrodes are

displayed with a “$” mark.

1. Click the Ref button on the amp bar. The Reference electrode

selection dialog box opens.





A1 + A2: Short-circuits A1 and A2 to each other in the electrode junction

box.









F3 and F4) for the original reference derivation (system reference).


switches all A11 and A12 to the averaged voltage of A5 and A6 (or

A3 and A4) for the original reference derivation (system

reference).


programmed setting.

2. Click a reference electrode to change the reference electrode. The A1 and A2

electrodes on the pattern table and the waveform is replaced with the selected

reference electrode name.

3. Click the OK button to close the Reference electrode selection dialog box.



1. Select the AV Delete from the control menu. The AV Delete dialog box opens

and the Electrode position layout table and the currently selected montage

appears on the dialog box.

Pattern table:

Displays the montage for the current pattern. All channels can be displayed by

using the scroll bar.


The reference electrode names are displayed on the Electrode position layout.

The electrodes used for reference voltage calculation are highlighted. To add

or delete an electrode on the electrode position layout, click the electrode.

2. Click an electrode to highlight or unhighlight it. Highlighting indicates that the

electrode is selected for AV derivation. “*” appears beside changed electrodes

(“*” means temporary changes).

3. Click the Save button to save the changed settings. The settings are saved in

each pattern.

4. Click the OK button to close the AV Delete dialog box.

Selecting or DeletingElectrodes for AVDerivation

Pattern table




Adjusting BN Balance forBN Derivation

To adjust the voltage balance between the BN1 and BN2 reference electrodes when

the balanced non-cephalic derivation is selected, use the BN balance dialog box.

1. Select BN Balance from the Control menu. The BN Balance dialog box opens.

When the reference electrode is changed to BN, the BN Balance dialog box


Balance:

The voltage balance between the BN1 electrode and the BN2 electrode. The

displayed value is the ratio of the BN1 electrode.

3. Click the ↑ or ↓ arrow to minimize the ECG waveform overlapped on the EEG

waveform. You can type the ratio with the keyboard.

4. Click the OK button to close the BN Balance dialog box.



Changing the WaveformDisplay Settings

About Display Control Dialog Box

You can select the waveform display settings in the Display Control dialog box

To open this dialog box, select Display Control from the Display menu.

Displaying the Derivation (Montage) and/or Comment Beside Each

Channel

You can display or not display the derivation beside each channel. To display the

derivation and/or comment beside each channel, click the Display Montage and/or

Comment check box in the Montage and Comment area. You can select the

derivation and comment display position by clicking the Left Side or Right Side

option button.

Displaying the Time Scale

To display the time scale in the Time Mark area, select the 1 s or 200 ms option on

the Time Scale area.

OFF: A vertical line is not displayed.

1 s: Displays a vertical line every one second.

200 ms: Displays a vertical line every 200 milliseconds.

Displaying the Extended Channel Bar

You can display the montage and calibration voltage on the extended channel bar.

To display the extended channel bar, check the Extended channel bar check box.

Displaying the Vertical Lines for the Events

You can display the vertical light gray lines for annotations. To display the vertical

lines, check the Display event color line check box. For the specified event, you

can assign a color vertical line. Refer “Editing the Waveform Annotations and

Patient Information Items” in Section 4.

Displaying the Montage Map Window.

The montage map window displays the montage on the electrode position layout.

To display the montage window, check the Display montage map check box.



• The electrodes that are selected to be saved in the System program are displayed

with a green circle “ ”. Refer to “Selecting and Saving the electrodes for

Waveform Acquisition” in Section 4.

The electrode that are not selected to be saved in the system program is displayed

with a red circle “ ”.

• The electrode combination is displayed with an electrode combination line. The

blue electrode combination line shows both the G1 and G2 electrodes are

selected to be saved in the System program. The dotted red electrode

combination line shows either electrode or both either electrodes are not selected

to be saved in the System program.

• To move the montage map window, drag it.

To change the size of the window, drag the corner of the window.

NOTEThe electrode combination line can be displayed when:

• The JE-425A, JE-208A, JE-210A, JE-910A/AG or JF-911A/AG

electrode junction box is used.

• The G1 or G2 electrode is set to Fp1, Fp2, F3, F4, C3, C4, P3, P4, O1,

O2, F7, F8, T3, T4, T5, T6, A1, A2, Fz, Cz, Pz, T1, T2, PG1 or PG2

• The reference electrode is set to A1 →→→→→ A2, A1 ←←←←← A2 or A1 ↔↔↔↔↔ A2.

About the montage map window

The electrodes correspondingto Fp1 and Fp2 are displayed.

Channel numberMonopolar derivation:The G2 electrode is set to A1 or A2,the channel number is displayedbeside the G1 electrode.

Bipolar derivation:The channel number is displayedbetween the two electrodes.

Pattern The reference electrode name isdisplayed when the referenceelectrode is not set to “OFF”



Changing Waveform Display Positions

To change the position of all channels:

There are three waveform display position setting modes.

Even Layout: Evenly spaces the baseline positions for all channels in channel

order. Channels that are temporarily turned off are omitted.

Channel Layout: Evenly spaces the baseline positions for all channels in channel

order. Blank spaces are left for undisplayed channels.

Superimpose: Overlaps consecutive odd and even channels. Channels are

omitted if their time constant is not set to ACC.

From the Display menu, select the appropriate layout command to select the

waveform display position.

Display

To change the position of a specific channel:

1. Click the channel number on the left side of the screen to select the channel.

The selected channel number is highlighted.

2. Move the mouse pointer to the selected channel number.

3. Press and hold down the left mouse button, then move the mouse pointer to the

appropriate position.

4. Release the mouse button to fix the waveform position.

5. Click the waveform window to release the channel selection.

Displaying/Not Displaying a Waveform



2. Click the Display column of the channel to open the selection list box on the

pattern table. The selected column is enclosed by a dotted rectangle.

3. Click ON or OFF in the selection list box.

4. Click the OK button to close the table.

Even layout Channel layout Superimpose



Changing the Waveform Display Speed

From the Display menu, select the speed.

5 s/page: Displays a 5 second page on the screen (corresponds to recording at 60

mm/s).

10 s/page: Displays a 10 second page on the screen (corresponds to recording at

30 mm/s).


20 mm/s).


15 mm/s).


10 mm/s).


mm/s).

5 min/page: Displays a 5 minute page on the screen (corresponds to recording at 1

mm/s).

Changing a Waveform Color



2. Click the Color column of the channel to open the selection list box on the




Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform





2. Click the Width column of the channel to open the selection list box on the




Color

Width



Returning All Waveforms to the Baseline

Click the Reset button on the tool bar to return all waveforms to the baseline

position. When this button is clicked the “RESET ON/OFF” annotation is

displayed at the bottom of the screen and the annotation is saved in a file as an

event.

To turn on the AC filter, click the AC Filter On/Off button on the tool bar, or

select AC Filter from the Control menu.

When ECG waveforms are superimposed on the EEG waveforms, use the ECG

filter to reduce the ECG waveform on each EEG channel. This filter works in the

following way to subtract the ECG components from the EEG waveforms.

1) The time point when the ECG waveforms exceed the trigger level of the trigger

channel is used as averaging trigger.

2) The part of the EEG waveforms synchronized with the trigger is averaged in

each channel.

3) The averaged waveform is subtracted from the next trigger point of the EEG

waveform in the averaging period in each channel.

Using the ECG Filter

Using the AC Filter

Averaged waveforms when the ECGwaveforms exceed the trigger level.When the ECG filter is turned on, the EEGwaveforms subtracted from the averagedwaveforms are displayed.

ECG waveforms superimposed onthe EEG waveform

Trigger level



Caution when using the ECG filterThe ECG filter detects the ECG waveforms superimposed on the EEG

waveforms by triggering the QRS wave of the ECG waveforms and

averaging. When the ECG filter is turned on, if a large artifact with

continuously varying, such as body movement, EMG or respiration

waveform which amplitude varies continuously, is superimposed on

the EEG waveforms, the ECG waveform (averaging result) cannot be

correctly measured. This may distort the EEG waveforms or the EEG

waveforms may not be displayed continuously. When the EEG

waveforms are not displayed continuously, click the Reset button on

the ECG filter dialog box to reset the ECG filter.

Be careful using the ECG filter when there is a large artifact. The

ECG filter is useful to reduce the ECG waveforms superimposed on

the EEG waveforms when the EEG waveforms are stable and there is

no large artifact.

1. Select ECG Filter from the Control menu. The ECG Filter dialog box opens.

NOTERequires application of dedicated ECG electrodes on patient and

ECG channel displayed in the montage.

2. Click the Trigger Channel box arrow to select the ECG trigger channel.

3. Click to select the trigger mode.

AUTO: The trigger level is set automatically. The trigger level cursor is

not displayed on the screen.

MANUAL: You can set the trigger level manually with the trigger level cursor

displayed over the trigger channel on the screen. Move the cursor

with the Trigger Level ↑ or ↓ arrow so that the cursor position is at

half of the peak amplitude of the QRS wave.

4. Click the ECG filter On check box to turn the ECG filter on.

To turn off the ECG filter, click it again.

When you close the Acquisition program or change the pattern, the ECG filter

is automatically set to Off.

Trigger level cursor



Changing the VariousSettings to the DefaultSettings

You can change the following settings to the default settings set in the System

Program. Refer to “Settings in the Standard Page - Changing the Settings in the

System Setting Dialog Box” in Section 4.

To change the settings to the default settings, select Standard from the Tool menu.



Annotating EEG Waveforms

General While acquiring the EEG waveforms, event marks (annotations) can be added on the

waveforms. The following annotations are automatically added on the waveforms and

registered in the event log. You can also manually add annotations on the waveforms. Up to

5,000 annotations can be saved in the event log.

The time interval of the “HVT mm:ss” event and “Post HVT mm:ss” event can be changed.

Refer to “Changing the Settings in the System Settings Dialog Box - Junction Box, Operation,

Display Page” in Section 4.

Annotation Meaning

REC START EEG waveform acquisition started

PAT....EEG Patterns changed

PAT....CAL Calibration waveform applied

PHOTO....Hz Photic stimulation started (When the stimulation frequency is changed

according to the preset program, this event mark is also saved in the event

log.)

HV START Hyperventilation started

HV END Hyperventilation finished

HV mm:ss Elapsed time after start of hyperventilation (every 30 seconds)

POST HV mm:ss Elapsed time after start of post hyperventilation (every 30 seconds)

HVT mm:ss Elapsed time after HV timer started (default setting: every 30 seconds)

POST HVT

mm:ss

Elapsed time after Post HV timer started (default setting: every 30 seconds)

HVT START HV timer started

HVT END HV timer stopped

IMP CHECK ON Impedance check started

IMP CHECK OFF Impedance check finished

MARK ON Mark switch pressed

MARK OFF Mark switch released

RESET ON Reset function on

RESET OFF Reset function off

A1 + A2 ON A1 + A2 reference electrode selected

A1 + A2 OFF A1 + A2 reference electrode released



Manually Annotating theWaveforms

Adding a Registered Annotation

When the Acquisition program is opened, 10 annotations appear on the event bar

at the bottom of the screen. These annotations correspond to the function keys on

the keyboard and optional PV-102A Control panel unit. To display different

annotations, click the NEXT button on the event bar or press the F11 key on the

keyboard.

To add an annotation on the waveforms, click the annotation on the event bar or

press the function key on the keyboard. The annotation is added to the latest point

on the waveform.

Entering an Annotation with the Keyboard

The annotation is added to the latest point on the waveform.

1. Click the Event name input text box on the event bar or press the F12 key.

2. Type the annotation with up to 40 characters.

3. Press the Enter key on the keyboard. The annotation is marked on the

waveforms.

Using the Annotation Dialog Box

To add an annotation to any specified time on the waveform:

1. Right-click the waveform that you want to add an annotation mark. The

Annotation dialog box opens.

2. Click the annotation on the list box or type the annotation in the Manual Input

text box with up to 40 characters. The annotation is added to the waveform at

the point where you right-clicked. When a new waveform overwrites the

point where you right-clicked, the time of the point is saved in memory and

the annotation is added to the point.

3. Click the OK button to close the Annotation dialog box.

To add an annotation to the current time on the waveform:

1. Press the Insert key. The Annotation dialog box opens.

2. Click the annotation on the list box or type the annotation in the Manual Input

text box with up to 40 characters. The annotation is added to the waveform at

the point where you press the Insert key.


Event name input text box



Adding a Screen Comment

You can add a text and attach a picture file to a waveform as a screen comment.

The attached file is saved together with the EEG data file.

1. Right-click the waveform that you want to add an annotation mark. The

Annotation dialog box opens.

2. Click the Screen Comment button on the Annotation dialog box. The

Comment Edit dialog box opens.

3. Type a comment with up to 384 characters.

To attach a picture file as a screen comment.

1) Click the Ref button on the Comment Edit dialog box. The Open dialog

box opens.

2) Select the file.

3) Click the Open button. The Open dialog box closes.

4. Click the OK button. The screen comment is added to the waveform at the

point where you right-clicked as a P-COMMENT. When a new waveform

overwrites the point where you right-clicked, the time of the point is saved in

memory and the comment is added to the point.

To cancel adding the comment, click the Cancel button.

The screen comment can be displayed on the Review screen. To edit the

screen comment. Refer to “Editing the Annotation Added to the Waveforms”Screen comment on the Reviewscreen. The attached picture is shownas an icon.



Using the Timers

About the Timer Bar

Manual Timer

The Timer bar provides a Manual, Record, HV and Post HV timer. An LED

indicates the selected timer. The time for the selected timer is displayed in the time

indicator. The timer can count up to 99 minutes 59 seconds.

MAN: The timer can be manually started and stopped by clicking the Start/

Stop button on the Timer bar.

REC: The time indicator displays the total saving time of the selected

pattern.

HV: The time indicator displays the elapsed hyperventilation time. Timing

is started with the Start button. When this button is clicked, an “HVT

START” annotation is automatically marked on the EEG waveforms.

P HV: The time indicator displays the elapsed post hyperventilation time.

Timing is started with the P HV button. When this button is clicked, a

“HVT END” annotation is automatically marked on the EEG

waveforms.

Start/Stop: Starts and stops the Timer. After the timer is started, the name on this

button changes from Start to Stop.

Reset: Resets the Timer.

To open the Timer bar, select Timer from the Tool menu.

1. Select Timer from the Tool menu. The Timer dialog bar opens.

2. Click the MAN button. The MAN LED lights.

3. Click the Start/Stop button to start the timer.

To reset counting, click the Reset button.

4. Click the Start/Stop button to stop the timer.



1. Select Timer from the Tool menu. The Timer bar opens.

2. Click the REC button. The REC LED lights.

3. Click the Start/Stop button in the box. The “REC START” message appears in

the dialog box. When the EEG waveform saving starts, the timer starts

counting.

4. Click the Start/Stop Filing button on the tool bar to start saving the

EEG waveform. The timer starts counting.

To reset counting, click the Reset button. When the pattern is changed, the

timer is reset.

5. Click the Start/Stop button to stop counting. You can restart counting by

clicking this button again.

1. Select Timer from the Tool menu. The Timer bar opens.

2. Click the HV button to select hyperventilation timer. The HV LED lights.

3. Click the Start/Stop button to start counting elapsed hyperventilation time. An

“HVT START” annotation is marked on the EEG waveforms at the start of

counting and the “HVT mm:ss” event indicating the elapsed time is marked on

the waveform every 30 seconds after that.

To reset counting, click the Reset button. The timer is reset to “00:00”.

Click the Start/Stop button to stop counting temporarily. You can restart the

counting by clicking this button again.

4. Click the P HV button to start counting elapsed post hyperventilation time. An

“HVT END” annotation is marked on the EEG waveforms at the start of

counting and the “Post HVT mm:ss” event v indicating the elapsed time is

marked on the waveform every 30 seconds after that.

To reset counting, click the Reset button. The timer is reset to “00:00” and

stops counting.

The time interval of the “HV mm:ss” event and the “ Post HV mm:ss” event can be

changed. Refer to “Changing the Settings in the System Settings Dialog Box -

Junction Box, Operation, Display Page” in section 4.

Record (Recording) Timer

HV and Post HV Timer



You can measure the voltage (amplitude) or time interval of the waveform by

displaying the two vertical cursors, horizontal cursors or ruler on the screen when

the waveforms are frozen. The voltage and time cursors can be displayed at the

same time.

The Cursor dialog box is displayed together with the voltage and/or time cursors to

indicate the amplitude and time interval between the two cursors.

Frequency: Displays the frequency calculated from the time interval.

Amplitude: Displays the amplitude between the two voltage cursors.

Time: Displays the time interval between the two time cursors.

Lock cursor interval: When checked, the intervals between the two cursors are

fixed. When the voltage cursors and time cursors are

displayed, the rectangle enclosed by 4 cursors and the

rectangle can be moved with the mouse

1. Click the Freeze button on the tool bar to freeze the EEG waveforms.

2. Select Voltage Cursor from the Tool menu. The two horizontal (voltage)

cursors appear on the screen.

Measuring Amplitude and Time with the Cursors and Ruler

3. Click the right mouse button to select the cursor. The selected cursor changes

color.

4. Click the appropriate position to move the cursor to, or drag the cursor to the

appropriate position. The voltage between the two cursors is displayed on the

Cursor dialog box.

To measure the voltage of a channel, click the channel No. on the left side of

the screen.

About Cursor Dialog Box

Using the Voltage Cursor

Voltage cursors



Using the Time Cursor 1. Click the Freeze button on the tool bar to freeze the EEG waveforms.

2. Select Time Cursor from the Tool menu. The two vertical (time) cursors

appear on the screen.


color.



The time interval and frequency between the two cursors are displayed on the

Cursor dialog box.

Time cursors



Using the Ruler 1. Click the Freeze button on the tool bar to freeze the EEG waveform.

2. Select Ruler from the Tool menu. The ruler appears on the screen.

3. Click the appropriate position to measure the amplitude or time of the

waveform. Or, drag the ruler to the position.

To change the scale of the ruler, click the right mouse button.

Ruler



Photic Stimulation and Hyperventilation

WARNING• All activation testing must be applied under the supervision of the

physician in charge. Mouth gags, tongue depressors and gauze

sponges must always be prepared for use to prevent the patient from

biting his tongue or injuring himself during testing because any

pattern of flash stimulation may induce seizure activity.

• When performing the photic stimulation, If an abnormal waveform

appears due to photo-paroxymal response, stop the photic

stimulation immediately to prevent the patient from evoking seizure





• Do not perform hyperventilation activation when the patient has

serious heart disease, acute cerebrovascular disease or respiratory

insufficiency.

CAUTION• Do not use the photic stimulator continuously over 5 minutes in any

mode. When photic stimulation is performed for a long time, the

flash lamp assembly gets very hot and causes burn if touched. If the

photic stimulator is continuously used for 5 minutes, do not use it

for at least 20 minutes to let it cool down.

• Firmly fix the flash lamp assembly to prevent the flash lamp

accidentally touching the patient during examination. The flash lamp

very hot and causes burn if touched.

The flash lamp is put 20 to 30 cm from the patient’s eyes.



The instrument provides the three photic stimulation modes: auto, manual, single

and hyperventilation mode. You can start activation and change the stimulation

settings by opening the Activation bar.

About Activation Bar

Mode: Select the photic stimulation mode.

Selection list:

AUTO1, AUTO2, AUTO3:

Performs the programmed automatic photic

stimulation. Up to 30 steps can be set for each

automatic photic stimulation mode.

MANUAL Performs manual photic stimulation.

SINGLE: Performs manual single photic stimulation.

Frequency: Select the photic stimulation frequency.

Sel: Select the photic stimulation or hyperventilation mode. The LED

indicates the selected activation mode.

Setup: Opens the Photo/HV Setup dialog box to select the photic stimulation

pulse mode, stimulation time, pause time, delay time or interval time

for photic stimulation or hyperventilation.

P HV: Stops the hyperventilation pacing and starts the Post HV timer.

Reset: Cancels the current photic stimulation or hyperventilation activation.

Start: Starts the selected activation.

• To temporarily stop activation, click this button.

• To restart activation, click this button again.

Close: Closes the activation bar.

To open the activation bar, click the Display Activation Control button on the

tool bar, or select Activation from the Control menu.

The timer bar can be opened together with the activation bar. Refer to “Changing

the Settings before Measurement - Changing the Display Settings” in Section 3.



Photo/HV Setup dialog box

Photo

Pulse: Selects the photic stimulation pulse mode for each photic

stimulation mode. The default setting is Normal.

Normal: Sequentially generates regular single pulses at the

preset frequency.

Random: Generates single pulses at a random frequency

which is within ±50 % of the preset frequency.

Double: Generates regular double pulses at the preset

frequency. You can change the time interval

between the two pulses.

Stim Time (s): Sets the stimulation time duration from 1 to 99 s in 1 s steps

(available in both automatic and manual photic stimulation).

Pause (s): Sets the stimulation pause time from 0 to 30 s in 1 s steps

(available only in automatic photic stimulation).

Delay (ms): Sets the time interval between double pulses from 10 to 990 s

in 10 ms steps (available only in double photic stimulation).

HV

Interval (s): Sets the duration of one hyperventilation.

Period (min): Sets the total period of all hyperventilations.

OK:

Closes the Photo/HV Setup dialog box.

→ ←Time interval: Delay

Double pulses



Photic Stimulation Photic stimulation is performed from low frequency to about 30 Hz at 2 Hz or 3 Hz

intervals. There are two ways to perform the photic stimulation:

• With a rest time between stimulation periods

• Continuous stimulation by changing frequency

The instrument provides the automatic and manual modes. In automatic mode, the

frequency and duration of each step is preset and stimulation is completely

automatic. To program the stimulation frequency for each step, use the System

program (See “Programming Automatic Photic Stimulation Modes” in Section 4).

In manual mode, you must change the frequency and start and stop each step

manually.

Automatic Photic Stimulation

1. Click the Display Activation Control button on the tool bar, or select

Activation from the Control menu. The Activation bar opens.

2. Click the Sel button to select the photic stimulation mode. The PH LED lights.

3. Select “AUTO1”, “AUTO2” or “AUTO3” from the Mode list box.

4. Select the stimulation time (Stim Time), pause time (Pause) and/or photic

stimulation pulse mode (Pulse).

1) Click the Setup button on the Activation bar. The Photo/HV Setup dialog

box opens.

To change the stimulation time:

Click the Stim Time list box arrow, then click the appropriate stimulation

time.

To change the pause time:

Click the Pause Time list box arrow, then click the appropriate pause time.

To change the photic stimulation pulse mode, click the appropriate button

in the PHOTO Pulse area. When DOUBLE is selected, select the delay

time with the Delay list box.

2) Click the OK button to close the Photo/HV Setup dialog box.

5. Click the Start button on the Activation bar to start photic stimulation. The

stimulation automatically stops when the preset steps are complete.

• To temporarily stop the stimulation, click the Start/Stop button.

• To restart the stimulation, click the Start/Stop again. The automatic

stimulation is restarted from the current step.

• To cancel the stimulation, click the Reset button.



Manual Photic Stimulation




3. Select “MANUAL” from the Mode list box.

4. Select the stimulation frequency from the Frequency list box.

5. Select the stimulation time (Stim Time) and photic stimulation pulse mode

(Pulse).

1) Click the Setup button. The Photo/HV Setup dialog box opens.

To change the stimulation time:

Click the Stim Time list box arrow, then click the appropriate stimulation

time.

To change the photic stimulation pulse mode:

Click the appropriate button in the PHOTO Pulse area. When DOUBLE is

selected, select the delay time with the Delay list box.

2) Click the OK button to close the PHOTO/HV Setup dialog box.

6. Click the Start button on the Activation bar to start the manual photic

stimulation. The Start button changes to the Stop button.

To stop the stimulation, click the Stop button.

Single Photic Stimulation

Every time the Start button is pressed or a trigger pulse is input from an external

instrument, a single photic stimulation is generated.




3. Select “SINGLE” from the Mode list box.

4. Click the Start button on the Activation bar to generate a single photic

stimulation.



Hyperventilation The Acquisition program can control the optional ZE-510AK hyperventilation unit.

For cable connection and operation, refer to the Operator’s manual of the

hyperventilation unit. This section explains hyperventilation procedures when

using the hyperventilation unit. The HV timer can be operated together with the

hyperventilation unit. Refer to “Changing the Settings before Measurement -

Changing the Display Settings” in Section 3.

If the hyperventilation unit is not used, use the HV timer to tell the patient when to

hyperventilate.

The following annotations are automatically marked on the EEG waveforms.

HV START Hyperventilation started.

HV mm:ss Every 30 seconds during hyperventilation.

HV END Hyperventilation stopped.

PostHV mm:ss Every 30 seconds during post hyperventilation.


Activation from the Control menu. The activation bar opens.

2. Click the Sel button to select the hyperventilation mode. The HV LED lights.

3. Select the duration of one hyperventilation (Interval) and the total period of all

hyperventilations (Period).

1) Click the Setup button. The Photo/HV Setup dialog box opens.

2) Select the duration of one hyperventilation with the Interval list box.

3) Select the total period of all hyperventilations with the Period list box.

4) Click the OK button to close the Photo/HV Setup dialog box.

4. Click the Start button on the activation bar to start the hyperventilation pacing.

The HV timer automatically starts counting. The “HV mm:ss.” annotation is

recorded every 30 seconds.

When the hyperventilation tone sounds, the HV mark is automatically recorded

on the mark channel.

• To temporarily stop hyperventilation, click the Stop button.

• To restart hyperventilation, click this button again.

• To cancel the current hyperventilation, click the Reset key.

• To stop hyperventilation and start Post HV mode, click the P HV button. The

PostHV timer automatically starts counting.

When the preset total period is complete, hyperventilation pacing automatically

stops, the PostHV timer automatically starts counting and the PostHV LED

lights. The “PostHV mm:ss.” annotation is recorded every 30 seconds.

• To reset the Post HV timer, click the Reset button.




components and displays amplitude for each frequency as a DSA (Density Spectral

Array) trendgraph on the review screen and EEG Scope - Comparison mode.

During waveform acquisition, the instrument can create the FFT data to display the

DSA trendgraph.

1. From the File menu, select FFT setup. The FFT settings dialog box opens.

2. Select the following options to create the FFT data.

Creating the FFT Data for DSA Trendgraph

FFT settings dialog box options

Create FFT data during acquisition:

Check this box to create the FFT data during waveform

acquisition.

FFT pattern:

The settings in the FFT pattern area can be saved with a pattern

name. To change the pattern name, click the Rename button.

FFT channel:

Select the electrode for the FFT calculation.

To select all electrodes, click the Select all button.

To cancel electrode selection, click the Clear button.

NOTEWhen all electrodes are selected, the recording time is

about 20% shorter. Depending on the number of selected

electrodes, CPU performance is reduced and the display

drawing becomes unsmooth.

Reference:

Select the reference electrode for the FFT calculation.

DSA pattern:

In the Review screen, to select the DSA trendgraph display

settings. Refer to “Displaying a DSA Trendgraph - Changing the

DSA Trendgraph Display Settings” in Section 6.


To cancel settings, click the Cancel button.



In the automatic EEG waveform recording mode, the skin-electrode contact

impedance check, calibration waveform recording, pattern changing and activation

are automatically performed according to the automatic recording settings. To

program the automatic recording settings, refer to “Programming Automatic

Recording Modes” in Section 4.

NOTEMake sure that the “Start filing when Auto Record starts” check box

on the Auto Record dialog box - System program is checked.

Otherwise, the filing does not start when the Start button on the Auto

Record dialog box is clicked.

1. From the Tool menu, select Auto Record. The Auto Record dialog box opens.

Automatic EEG Waveform Recording

2. Check the Auto 1 or Auto 2 option button to select the automatic recording

mode.

3. Click the Start button to start waveform acquisition. The filing automatically

starts at the same time. When the final stage waveform acquisition is

complete, the automatic recording automatically stops.

• To temporarily stop waveform acquisition, click the Start/Stop

filing button on the tool bar.

• To resume waveform acquisition, click the Start/Stop filing button again.

• To stop automatic recording, click the Exit button.

• To start automatic recording from the stage 1 during recording, click the

Reset button.

23

1



• To start automatic recording mode from the stage that you want:

1) Click the stage in the list box.

2) Click the Start button.

• To change the stage during recording:

Double-click the stage in the list box. The waveform acquisition continues

from the selected stage.

1

2



Long Term EEG Waveform Monitoring

The long term monitoring function lets you save up to 52 GB (2 GB × 26 stages) of

EEG waveforms in different storage media. For each stage, a new EEG data file is

created and saved in the selected drive as a different EEG data file. Up to 2 GB

EEG data file can be saved for each stage. When the optional QP-224A Serial

interface board (analog video link) or QP-110AK Digital video software (digital

video link) is installed, you can save the patient image during long term EEG

waveform monitoring. The QP-251AK Spike Detection Software (version

20000714NK or later) can be used in the long term monitoring (online spike

detection).

For setting, refer to “Changing the Settings for Long Term EEG Waveform

Monitoring” in Section 4. In the following example, up to 50 hours EEG

waveforms are saved in a different EEG data file for each stage.

Setting Example

50 hours

Stage 1(10 hours)

Stage 2(10 hours)

Stage 3(10 hours)

Stage 4(10 hours)

Stage 5(10 hours)

Start filing

File File File File File

Interval (10 s)

End filing

Total recording time: 50 hours

Number of stages: 5

Interval between stages: 10 s

NOTEIf the file size exceeds 2 GB, the long term monitoring cannot be

started. File size differs depending on the combination of the

sampling frequency and electrodes to be saved. Refer to

“Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk - Disk Capacity” in Section 3.



1. Check and change the long term monitoring settings (System program →System icon → System Settings dialog box - General page → Long term

monitoring).

To continuously review the long term EEG waveform monitoring data (saved

as different EEG data files for each stage) in the review program, check the

Merge stages when reviewing and creating LIF file to create the long term

monitoring information (LIF) file.

2. Open the Acquisition program.

3. From the Tool menu, select Long term. The Long term bar opens.

Procedure

NOTEDuring long term EEG waveform monitoring, other functions are

not available.

4. Select the starting stage to start long term EEG waveform monitoring.

5. Click the Start button. A new EEG data file is created in the selected storage

media. The stage is automatically changed at the preset recording time.

To stop the long term monitoring, click the Stop button.

6. When the filing of all the stages is complete, the Acquisition dialog box opens.

Check the filing result and click the OK button.

NOTEWe recommend that you close the Acquisition program and shut

down the computer because the system may be unstable after long

time filing.

7. From the File menu, select Exit to close the Acquisition program.

8. From the Start menu, select Shut Down. If necessary, restart the computer.

Displays the settings of the EEG data file storage media, VTR numberand disk region for digital video for each stage. The current stagesettings are highlighted.

Lights in green during filing

Changes to the Stopbutton during filing



You can display the patient image on the screen. The optional QI-111A Video

camera interface board and a video camera are required. The Enable video camera

option must be selected in the System Setting window of the System program.

Refer to “Changing the Settings in the System Settings Dialog Box” in Section 4.

To display the patient image, select Camera from the Tool menu.

Displaying the Patient Image



You can operate the instrument with the following keys in the Acquisition screen.

You can change the key function by changing the “[Common] - AccSelectType”

setting in the E11CFG.INI file in C:\nfx11 directory. Refer to “PC Unit Setting” in

Section 2 of the Service manual.

NOTEKeyboard operation is only available when the Acquisition program

window is active.

Keyboard Operation

AccSelectType = 1

When the setting is highlighted, use the ↑ or ↓ key and Enter key to change the

setting.

AccSelectType = 0 (default setting) Operation Key (Label)a) Changes to the pattern in the current group. 1: Pattern I (Pat I),

2: Pattern II (Pat II),3: Pattern III (Pat III),4: Pattern IV (Pat IV)

b) Changes to the free pattern in the currentgroup.

5 (Free)

c) Changes the pattern group. Pattern I isautomatically selected. Each operationchanges the selection as follows:A → B → C → D → A

6 (Group)

d) Opens the Sensitivity dialog box. Q (SENS)e) Opens the TC dialog box. W (TC)f) Opens the HF dialog box. E (HF)g) Opens the Pattern dialog box. R (Pat)h) Opens the Reference dialog box. T (Ref)

Operation Key (Label)a) Changes to the pattern in the same group. 1: Pattern I (Pat I),

2: Pattern II (Pat II),3: Pattern III (Pat III),4: Pattern IV (Pat IV)

b) Changes to the free pattern in the same group. 5 (Free)c) Changes the pattern group. Pattern I is

automatically selected. Each operationchanges the selection as follows:A → B → C → D → A

6 (Group)

d) Highlights the setting in the Sens text box onthe Amp bar.

Q (SENS)

e) Highlights the setting in the TC text box on theAmp bar.

W (TC)

f) Highlights the setting in the HF text box on theAmp bar.

E (HF)

g) Highlights the setting in the Pat text box on theAmp bar.

R (Pat)

h) Highlights the setting in the Ref text box onthe Amp bar.

T (Ref)



Both AccSelectType = 0 and 1

When the Activation bar or Timer bar is open, use the Tab key to select another

setting and use the ↑ or ↓ key and Enter key to change the setting.

Operation Key (Label)i) Turns the AC filter on/off. Y (AC-F), or Alt + - keyj) Displays the calibration waveforms. A (CAL), or Alt + Ck) Displays the EEG waveforms. S (EEG), or Alt + Gl) Performs the skin-electrode contact impedance

check.D (IMP), or Alt + M

m) Returns all waveforms to the baseline position. F (RESET), or Alt + Sn) Opens the Patient Information dialog box. Z (Patient), or Alt + Ao) Opens the Activation bar and highlights the

Start button. When the Activation bar isopen, highlights the Start button. You can startthe photic stimulation by pressing the Enterkey.

X (Photo)

p) Opens the Timer bar and highlights the Startbutton. When the Timer bar is open,highlights the Start button. You can startcounting by pressing the Enter key.

C (Timer)

q) Starts or stops filing. Alt + [Space] (Record)r) Closes and saves the current file. Ctrl + [Space] (Close)s) Opens the Auto Record dialog box. V (AutoRecord)



Recording Marks

When the optional PV-102A Control Panel Unit is used, the following marks can be displayed on

the mark channel.

Event mark

Displayed when a function key is pressed.

Calibration mark

Displayed once during calibration waveform recording.

Pattern mark

Displayed every 5 seconds.

Function key mark Next key mark


Section 6 Review Program

General .............................................................................................................................. 6.1

Flowchart of Reviewing EEG Waveforms ...................................................... 6.2

Opening the Review Program ............................................................................................ 6.3

Opening the EEG Data File ............................................................................................... 6.5

Opening the EEG Data File in a Drive ..................................................................... 6.5

Selecting the EEG Data File in a Folder .................................................................. 6.6

About the Open File Dialog Box .............................................................................. 6.7

Menu Bar ....................................................................................................... 6.7

Tool Bar ......................................................................................................... 6.9

Searching for a File ................................................................................................. 6.11

Searching for a File by a Keyword ................................................................ 6.11

Searching for a File by the Examination Date ............................................. 6.12

Reviewing the Patient History ................................................................................ 6.12

Reviewing the Patient Information ......................................................................... 6.13

Backing Up the Database ...................................................................................... 6.13

Review Screen................................................................................................................. 6.14

Explanation of Each Function .......................................................................................... 6.15

Menu Bar ............................................................................................................... 6.15

File Menu ............................................................................................................... 6.15

Open ............................................................................................................ 6.15

Save ............................................................................................................ 6.15

Export .......................................................................................................... 6.15

Patient Information ...................................................................................... 6.15

Print ............................................................................................................. 6.15

Printer setup ................................................................................................ 6.15

FFT setup .................................................................................................... 6.15

FFT reanalysis ............................................................................................. 6.15

Delete FFT data ........................................................................................... 6.15

Exit .............................................................................................................. 6.15

Display Menu ......................................................................................................... 6.16

Display Control ............................................................................................ 6.16

5 s/page ....................................................................................................... 6.16

10 s/page ..................................................................................................... 6.16

15 s/page ..................................................................................................... 6.16


20 s/page ..................................................................................................... 6.16

30 s/page ..................................................................................................... 6.16

60 s/page ..................................................................................................... 6.16

5 min/page ................................................................................................... 6.16

Zoom ........................................................................................................... 6.16

Even Layout ................................................................................................. 6.16

Channel Layout ........................................................................................... 6.16

Superimpose ............................................................................................... 6.16

Impedance Check ........................................................................................ 6.16

Tool Bar ....................................................................................................... 6.17

Jump Bar ..................................................................................................... 6.17

Amp Bar ...................................................................................................... 6.17

Page Control Bar ......................................................................................... 6.17

Jump Menu ............................................................................................................ 6.17

Event ........................................................................................................... 6.17

Time ............................................................................................................. 6.17

Tool Menu .............................................................................................................. 6.18

Wave Select ................................................................................................ 6.18

Voltage Cursor ............................................................................................. 6.18

Time Cursor ................................................................................................. 6.18

Ruler ............................................................................................................ 6.18

Modify Event ................................................................................................ 6.18

Copy Page ................................................................................................... 6.18

Video Link .................................................................................................... 6.18

Show DSA in Jump Bar ............................................................................... 6.18

Note Waveform ............................................................................................ 6.18

Control Menu ........................................................................................................ 6.19

AC Filter ....................................................................................................... 6.19

ECG Filter .................................................................................................... 6.19

BN Balance.................................................................................................. 6.19

AV Delete ..................................................................................................... 6.19

Pattern Table ............................................................................................... 6.19

CAL Control ................................................................................................. 6.19

Help Menu ............................................................................................................. 6.19

About ........................................................................................................... 6.19

Amp Bar ................................................................................................................. 6.20

Sens (Sensitivity selection button) ............................................................... 6.20

TC (Time constant selection button) ............................................................ 6.20

HF (High-cut filter selection button) ............................................................. 6.20

Pat (Pattern selection button) ...................................................................... 6.21

Ref (Reference electrode selection button) ................................................. 6.21

Clock ........................................................................................................... 6.22

Elapsed time ................................................................................................ 6.22

Epoch .......................................................................................................... 6.22

Tool Bar ................................................................................................................. 6.23

AC Filter On/Off button ................................................................................ 6.23

Display Pattern Table button ........................................................................ 6.23

Display Voltage Cursor button ..................................................................... 6.23

Display Time Cursor button ......................................................................... 6.23


Display Ruler button .................................................................................... 6.23

Display Patient Information button ............................................................... 6.23

Print Current Page button ............................................................................ 6.23

Video Link button ......................................................................................... 6.23

Zoom button ................................................................................................ 6.23

Screen Comment button .............................................................................. 6.23

Select Displayed Page and Advance button ................................................ 6.24

Display Note Waveform button .................................................................... 6.24

Page Control Bar ................................................................................................... 6.25

Rewind button .............................................................................................. 6.25

Fast Forward button .................................................................................... 6.25

1 Page Back button ..................................................................................... 6.25

1 Page Forward button ................................................................................ 6.25

1 s Back button ............................................................................................ 6.25

1 s Forward button ....................................................................................... 6.25

Centering button .......................................................................................... 6.25

Stop button .................................................................................................. 6.25

Play button................................................................................................... 6.25

Jump Bar ............................................................................................................... 6.26

Time (Beginning/Ending Time of File) .......................................................... 6.26

Previous/Next Section button ...................................................................... 6.26

Previous Event button ................................................................................. 6.26

Next Event button ........................................................................................ 6.26

Select Event button ..................................................................................... 6.26

Reviewing the EEG Waveforms....................................................................................... 6.27

Searching for Waveforms ................................................................................................ 6.28

Searching by the Event Name ............................................................................... 6.28

Searching by the Event Jump Bar ......................................................................... 6.29

Searching by the DSA Jump Bar ........................................................................... 6.30

Changing the Range of the Event Mark Display Area and DSA Trend Graph Display

Area ....................................................................................................................... 6.30

Searching by Time ................................................................................................. 6.31

Changing the Pattern ....................................................................................................... 6.32

Changing the Measurement Settings ............................................................................... 6.33

Changing Amplifier Settings for All Selected Channels .......................................... 6.33

Setting ACC ................................................................................................. 6.33

Changing the Amplifier Setting .................................................................... 6.34

Changing Amplifier Settings for Individual Channels ............................................. 6.35

Changing Amplifier Settings for One Channel ............................................. 6.35

Changing Amplifier Settings for Two or More Channels .............................. 6.35

Changed Settings and ACC Marks ........................................................................ 6.36

Changing the Montage .......................................................................................... 6.37

Changing the Reference Electrode ........................................................................ 6.39

Selecting or Deleting Electrodes for AV Derivation ................................................ 6.40

Adjusting BN Balance for BN Derivation ................................................................ 6.41

Changing the Calibration Voltage .......................................................................... 6.41

Changing the Waveform Display Settings ............................................................. 6.42

About the Display Control Dialog Box.......................................................... 6.42

Displaying the Derivation (Montage) and/or Comment beside Each Channel6.42


Displaying the Time Scale ........................................................................... 6.42

Changing the Pause Time ........................................................................... 6.42

Changing the Display Mode......................................................................... 6.42

Displaying the Event .................................................................................... 6.43

Drawing a High Speed Sampled Waveforms Quicker ................................. 6.43

Displaying the Extended Channel Bar ......................................................... 6.43

Displaying the Screen Comment ................................................................. 6.43

Displaying the Vertical Lines for the Selected Events .................................. 6.43

Selecting the Zoom in Area ......................................................................... 6.43

Displaying the Measurement Date and Time When Using the Time Cursor 6.43

Displaying the Montage Map Window ......................................................... 6.43

Changing Waveform Display Positions ........................................................ 6.44

Displaying/Not Displaying a Waveform........................................................ 6.44

Changing the Waveform Display Speed ...................................................... 6.45

Changing a Waveform Color ....................................................................... 6.45

Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform ...................................... 6.45

Using the AC filter .................................................................................................. 6.46

Using the ECG Filter .............................................................................................. 6.46

Measuring Amplitude and Time with the Cursors and Ruler ............................................ 6.48

About the Cursor Dialog Box ................................................................................. 6.48

Using the Voltage Cursor ....................................................................................... 6.48

Using the Time Cursor ........................................................................................... 6.48

Using the Ruler ...................................................................................................... 6.50

Zooming In the Waveform...................................................................................... 6.51

Entering Patient Information and Other Data ................................................................... 6.52

Opening the Patient Information Dialog Box .......................................................... 6.52

Patient Information Dialog Box Options ................................................................. 6.53

Entering the Patient Information ............................................................................ 6.54

Editing the Annotation Added to the Waveforms .............................................................. 6.55

Deleting an Annotation ........................................................................................... 6.55

Changing an Annotation ........................................................................................ 6.56

Adding an Annotation ............................................................................................. 6.57

Adding an Annotation by Specifying the Time ............................................. 6.57

Adding an Annotation in High Speed Review .............................................. 6.58

Moving an Annotation ............................................................................................ 6.58

Adding a Screen Comment .................................................................................... 6.59

Editing the Screen Comment: ...................................................................... 6.60

Deleting the Screen Comment..................................................................... 6.60

Selecting the Events .............................................................................................. 6.61

Selecting Parts of the Waveforms.................................................................................... 6.62

Selecting All Waveforms on a Page............................................................. 6.63

Displaying a DSA Trendgraph .......................................................................................... 6.64

Displaying a DSA Trendgraph................................................................................ 6.64

About the DSA Jump Bar ....................................................................................... 6.65

Changing the Range of the DSA Trend Graph Display Area ................................ 6.65

Creating the FFT Data for DSA Trendgraph .......................................................... 6.66

Displaying the DSA Trendgraph in Detail ............................................................... 6.67

Changing the DSA Trendgraph Display Settings ................................................... 6.68

Copying Parts of Waveforms ........................................................................................... 6.70


Displaying the Note Waveform Window................................................................. 6.70

Copying Part of Waveforms ................................................................................... 6.72

Copying Part of the Waveforms with a Mouse ............................................. 6.72

Copying Part of the Waveforms at the Center of the Review Window......... 6.73

Copying Part of the Waveforms Using the Time Cursor. ............................. 6.74

Registering the Copied Waveforms as a Sample Data .......................................... 6.75

Changing the Title of the Copied Waveforms ........................................................ 6.76

Displaying the Copied Waveforms ......................................................................... 6.76

Displaying the Copied Waveforms for the Current Patient. ......................... 6.76

Displaying the Copied Waveforms for All Patients (Sample Data) ............... 6.77

Printing the Copied Waveform ............................................................................... 6.77

Deleting Copied Waveforms .................................................................................. 6.77

Reviewing the Long Term EEG Waveforms ..................................................................... 6.78

Printing ............................................................................................................................. 6.79

Setting Up the Printer ............................................................................................ 6.79

Printing Waveforms and Patient Information ......................................................... 6.79

Selecting the Information for Waveform Printing ................................................... 6.81

Saving the EEG Waveforms ............................................................................................ 6.83

Saving the Changed Data in the Currently Selected File ....................................... 6.83

Saving All or Part of the File as a New File ............................................................ 6.84

ASCII File Format and File Name .......................................................................... 6.85

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


General

To review the EEG waveforms saved in the file, use the Review program. This

program lets you do the following:

• Sort and search for EEG data files

• Review the waveforms at normal or high speed

• Change the measurement settings (Reformat and Refiltering)

• Edit the patient information and annotations

• Select parts of waveforms to print or save in a file

When reviewing the EEG data files saved by an EEG-2110, EEG-9100 Series

electroencephalograph, digital EEG system (PC with the QP-111AJ/AK, QP-223A/

AK acquisition program kit), the EEG data file opens on the Review screen with

the settings in which the file was acquired. Refer to the Operator’s manual for each

instrument.

NOTEWhen reviewing an EEG data file saved by another

electroencephalograph or digital EEG system, the file is not

registered in the system database. To register the file in the system

database, use the Register command in the File Utility program.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


↓

↓

↓

↓

↓

↓

Flowchart of Reviewing EEG Waveforms

1. Start the Review program.

2. Select the EEG file.

3. Play the waveforms back.

4. Review the waveforms with different conditions and settings.

5. Edit the patient information if necessary.

6. Print the waveforms and patient information.

7. Saving the file.

8. Close the EEG file.

9. End the Review program.

↓

↓

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Opening the Review Program

CAUTIONDo not remove the magneto-optical disk until the disk drive access

lamp is off. Otherwise, the disk or disk drive may be damaged.

NOTE• To use the Review program, 100 MB or more hard disk free space is

required.

• Turn off any screen saver and close all application programs before

opening the Review program. Otherwise, the Review program may


• It is not possible to open the Review program while the Acquisition,

System program or any other EEG-1100 application program is open.

1. From the EEG 1000 window, double-click the Review icon. The Open File

window opens.

To find files, you can use the search function. Refer to “Opening the EEG

Data File” in this section.

2. In the list, select the EEG data file you want to review.

3. Click the Review button. The selected EEG data file opens on the

Review screen.

1

2

3

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


To close the Review program:



1. Select Exit from the File menu to close the Review program. The Open File

windows opens.

2. Click the Close button on the Open File dialog box, or select Exit from the File

menu.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Opening the EEG Data File

1. From the EEG 1000 window, double-click the Review button. The Open File

window opens.

2. If the EEG data file that you want to review is saved in an MO disk, insert the

disk into the MO disk drive. Select the drive from the Drive list box by

clicking the Drive box list arrow. The patient information for each EEG data

file in the selected drive are displayed in the patient file list.

NOTEWhen the EEG data file is saved in a CD-R disk, copy it to a hard disk

and change the file attribution to “Archive”. If not, you cannot

change the patient information as a new file.

To display all EEG data files registered in the database, click the Database

button.

3. Click the file that you want to review. The selected file is highlighted.

4. Click the Review button or double click the selected file. The

selected EEG data file opens on the Review screen with the settings in which

the file was acquired.

Opening the EEG Data Filein a Drive

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


1. Select Open from the File menu. The Open EEG Data dialog box opens.Selecting the EEG DataFile in a Folder

2. Use the Look in text box (arrow) to select the drive and folder where the file

that you want to review is saved.

3. Select a file with an “.eeg” extension.

4. Click the OK button. The selected EEG data file opens on the Review screen.

To cancel it, click the Cancel button.

Select a file with an “.eeg” extension.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


About the Open File DialogBox

Menu Bar

File Menu

Open:

Opens the Open EEG Data dialog box to select an EEG data file in a folder.

Close:

Closes the File Open dialog box.

View menu

Select Drive:

Displays all patient information in the EEG data files saved in the currently

selected drive. You can also display all patient information by clicking the

Selected Drive button.

Patient Database:

Displays all patient information in the EEG data files registered in the system

database. You can also display all patient information by clicking the Database

button.

Reset Column Width:

Resets the column width to the factory default setting.

Refresh:

Use this command to refresh the patient file list when another drive is selected or

another MO disk is inserted.

You can search for an EEG data file to review. Before opening the file, you can

review the patient information and patient history.

Information aboutthe selected file

To change the column width, drag here.To reset it, select Reset Column Width from the View menu.

Click the item name at the top ofthe column to sort records.

Menu bar

Tool bar

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Launch menu

Review:

Opens the selected EEG data file on the Review screen.

Use LIF Settings:

When the EEG waveforms are measured with the long term EEG monitoring

function, The EEG waveforms for each stage are saved as a different EEG data

file. To continuously review the EEG waveforms, select the corresponding EEG

data files and check this command

Use this file’s acquisition settings:

In the review screen, the EEG waveforms are displayed with the pattern settings

when they were acquired. When reviewing the EEG waveforms in another

instrument, the pattern settings of the other instrument is applied. This is because

each instrument may have different pattern settings. To use the pattern settings of

the instrument which the waveforms were acquired, check this command.

NOTEThis function is only available when “Use current system settings in

review” is set to “On” (System Settings dialog box → General page

→ Other Settings area) when the waveforms were acquired.

Tools menu

Set Patient List Items:

Opens the Set Patient List Items dialog box to select the items displayed in the

patient list. Use the “>”, “>>”, “<” and “<<“ buttons to add or remove the items.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Change File Attributes:

Remove the read-only attribute of the selected file.

Help menu

About:

Displays the information about the program.

Tool Bar

Option:

Opens the Other dialog box to select the database backup schedule and select the

item (Refer Dept, Physician or Operator) to group the patient information in the

patient history. To automatically back up the database, check the “Use automatic

database backup” check box on the database page. The database is backed up as

the E11system_backup.mdb file in C:\nfx11\backup folder.

Review button:

Opens the selected EEG data file on the Review screen.

Selected Drive button:

Displays all patient information in the EEG data files saved in the currently

selected drive. You can also display all patient information by selecting Selected

Drive from the View menu.

Database button:

Displays all patient information in the EEG data files registered in the system

database. You can also display all patient information by selecting Patient

Database from the View menu.

Refresh button:

Use this button to refresh the patient file list when another drive is selected or

another MO disk is inserted.

Close button:

Closes the File Open dialog box. You can also close the File Open dialog box by

selecting Close from the File menu.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Search By:

Searches for the EEG data file by ID, Name, EEG No., Refer Dept

(Department), Physician and/or Operator. To search for the EEG data file,

type the keyword.

Search by Date:

Searches for the EEG data file by Date (examination date). To search for the

EEG data file, open the calender by clicking the box arrow.

Drive:

Select the drive where the EEG data files are saved.

Patient List page:

Displays the patient information for each EEG data file in the selected drive

or system database.

Patient History page:

Each set of patient information is grouped into a folder by Refer Dept,

Physician or Operator. To change the item to group the patient information,

use the Other dialog box - Other page (Tools menu → Option).

Patient Information page:

Displays the patient information of the selected EEG data file.

Use pen recorder or DC output:

Check this box to output the waveforms from the optional QD-101A analog

output board.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Searching for a File You can search for a file by a keyword and/or date. If one or more keywords/dates

are entered, the program searches for all files which satisfy all of the entered

keywords/dates. Searching starts when the keyword is entered.

Searching for a File by a Keyword

1. Select one or two items in the Search By box arrows.

2. Type the keyword. Searching automatically starts.

For Refer Dept, Physician and Operator, you can use the box arrow to enter the

keyword.

Use of “*”:

*123: Searches for characters which end with “123”.

*123*: Searches for characters which include “123”.

12*3: Searches for characters which start with “12” and end with “3”.

• To clear the entered keywords, click the Clear button.

• To refresh the patient file list in the selected drive, click the Refresh button.

ID, Name, EEG No.

Refer Dept, Physician, Operator

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Reviewing the PatientHistory

Searching for a File by the Examination Date

1. Click the Search by date box arrow. The calender appears.

2. Click the examination date.

• To search for files between two dates, select the beginning date with the left

box and the ending date with the right box.

• To select the year, click the year on the top of the calender (The up/down

arrow appears).

• To select the month, click the left/right arrow or month on the top of the

calender

3. Click the Search button.

• To clear the entered date, click the Clear button.

• To refresh the patient file list, click the Refresh button.

Each set of patient information is grouped into a folder by Refer Dept, Physician or

Operator. To change the item to group the patient information, use the Other

dialog box - Other page (Tools menu → Option).

To open the Patient History page, click the Patient History tab.

Refer Dept, Physician or Operator

Click the Review button to open theselected file on the Review screen.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Reviewing the PatientInformation

To open the Patient Information Page, click the Patient Information tab.

NOTEThe contents of the Patient Information page cannot be changed in

the Open File dialog box.

The EEG data file is managed by the Database manager program. The patient

information, disk No are saved in system the database. Refer to Section 7

“Database Manager Program”. The database can be automatically backed up as the

E11system_backup.mdb file in C:\nfx11\backup folder. To back up the database,

use the Other dialog box (Tools menu → Option).

Backing Up the Database

To automatically back up the database,check the “Use automatic databasebackup” check box.

Select the backup schedule.

Click here to see more information.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Review Screen

You can move the amp bar, page control

bar, tool bar and jump bar to any position

on the screen by dragging it.

Menu bar

Amp bar:You can change the amplifier setting for allchannels whose amplifier setting is set to ACC.

Tool bar: Shortcut buttons frequently used for review.

Jump bar:You can display any part of the EEG waveformby clicking any position on the Jump bar.

Electrode name

Page control bar:You can play back the EEG waveformsand scroll the frozen waveforms.

Annotation list box:You can jump to thewaveform annotatedby the event.

Beginning time of filing Ending time of filing

• To display the extended channel bar, check the “Display extended channel bar” check box in the

Display Control dialog box.

• To display the extended channel bar, refer to “ Changing the Measurement Settings - Changing the

Waveform Display” in this section 4.You can display either the montage or comment on the extended channel bar. Refer to “ProgrammingPatterns - Selecting the Item Displayed on the Extended Channel Bar” in Section 4.

Extended channel barChannel number Montage

Waveform display

DSA trendgraph:Displays the amplitudefor each frequencycomponent.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Menu Bar

File Menu


You can save the changed data to the currently selected file and print it on the

paper.

Open

Opens the Open File window to select a patient file.

Save

Saves the changed data to the currently selected file.

Export

Opens the Export dialog box to save all or part of waveforms in a new file.

Patient Information

Opens the Patient Information dialog box to review and change the patient

information. You can open the Patient Information dialog box by clicking the

Display Patient Information button on the tool bar.

Print

Opens the Print dialog box to print the waveform.

Printer setup

Opens the Print setup dialog box to select the printer settings. Refer to your

printer’s instruction manual.

FFT setup

Opens the FFT settings dialog box to select the FFT analysis settings for the

EEG frequency analysis.

FFT reanalysis

Analyzes the EEG data according to the settings in the FFT setting dialog box.

Delete FFT data

Deletes the FFT data saved with the EEG waveform data.

Exit

Closes the Review program.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


You can set the waveform display mode.

Display Control

Opens the Display Control dialog box to select the display mode, and whether or

not to display the electrode name (montage) and vertical lines to indicate time

scale.

5 s/page

Displays a 5 second page on the screen (corresponds to recording at 60 mm/s).

10 s/page


15 s/page


20 s/page


30 s/page


60 s/page


5 min/pageDisplays a 5 minute page on the screen (corresponds to recording at 1 mm/s).

Zoom

Displays the magnifying glass to zoom in the waveforms. You can also displaying

the magnifying glass by clicking the Zoom button on the tool bar.

Even Layout

Evenly space the baseline positions for all channels on the screen in channel order.

Channels that are temporarily turned off are omitted.

Channel Layout

Evenly spaces the baseline positions for all channels in channel order. Blank

spaces are included to indicate undisplayed channels.

Superimpose

Overlaps consecutive odd and even number channels.

Impedance Check

Displays the most recent impedance check result before the currently displayed

waveforms.

Display Menu

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Tool Bar

Displays the Tool bar.

Jump Bar

Displays the Jump bar.

Amp Bar

Displays the amp bar. You can also display the amp bar by clicking the

Amp button on the tool bar.

Page Control Bar

Displays the Page control bar.

Event

Opens the annotation list box to display the EEG waveform by specifying the

event (annotation on the waveform). You can also open the Event Jump dialog

box by clicking the Select Event button on the jump bar.

Time

Opens the Time Jump dialog box to display the EEG waveform by specifying

the time. You can also open the Time Jump dialog box by clicking the button

on the clock time display area or elapsed time display area.

Jump Menu

Clock time / Elapsed time display area

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Wave Select

Opens the Wave Select dialog box to select part of the waveform.

Voltage Cursor


between the two cursors. You can also display the voltage cursors by clicking

the Display Voltage Cursor button on the tool bar. This function is

available only when the screen is frozen.

Time Cursor


cursors. You can also display the time cursors by clicking the Display Time

Cursor button on the tool bar. This function is available only when the screen

is frozen.

Ruler


You can also display the ruler by clicking the Display Ruler button on the

tool bar. This function is available only when the screen is frozen.

Modify Event

Opens the Modify Event dialog box to change, add or delete the event name

(annotation) that is manually marked on the waveform.

Copy Page

Copies the currently displayed waveforms to the clipboard. You can copy the

clipboard data to another Windows application, such as a word processor.

Refer to the Windows online help.

Video Link

Opens the Video Link dialog box and the patient image window when the QI-

224A Serial interface board is installed. You can also open the Video link

dialog box and the patient image window by clicking the Video Link button

on the tool bar. This function is available only when the screen is frozen.

Show DSA in Jump Bar

Displays the DSA trendgraph. The DSA trendgraph displays the amplitude for

each frequency component.

Note Waveform

Displays the note waveform window. You can copy the waveforms in the note

waveform window to compare the waveforms. You can also display the note

waveform window by clicking the Display Note Waveform button on the

tool bar.

Tool Menu

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


AC Filter


filter on by clicking the AC Filter On/Off button on the tool bar.

ECG Filter

Opens the ECG Filter dialog box to reduce the ECG waveform superimposed

on the EEG waveform.

BN Balance

Opens the BN Balance dialog box to adjust the voltage balance between the

BN reference electrodes when the balanced noncephalic derivation is selected.

AV Delete

Opens the AV Delete dialog box to select or delete reference electrodes in the

AV derivation.

Pattern Table




limit for each channel. You can also open the pattern table by clicking the

Display Pattern Table button on the tool bar.

CAL Control

Opens the CAL Control dialog box to select the calibration voltage.

About


Control Menu

Help Menu

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Amp Bar

The amplifier settings (sensitivity, time constant and high-cut filter), pattern and

reference electrodes can be changed for all channels at the same time by clicking

the button on the amp bar. You can select whether or not to display the amp bar by

clicking the Amp bar button on the tool bar.

Sens (Sensitivity selection button)

Opens the Sensitivity dialog box to select the sensitivity. This selection applies

to all channels whose sensitivity setting is set to ACC.

Sensitivity selection list (µV/mm):

1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200

OFF: Only the baseline is displayed.

TC (Time constant selection button)Opens the Time Constant dialog box to select the time constant (low-cut filter).

This selection applies to all channels whose Time Constant setting is set toACC. You can select the time constant display format (time constant (s) or

low-cut filter (Hz)) in the System program.

Time constant selection list (second):

0.001, 0.003, 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 0.6, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 10.0

Low-cut filter selection list (Hz):

0.016, 0.032, 0.08, 0.16, 0.27, 0.53, 1.6, 5.3, 53, 160

HF (High-cut filter selection button)

Opens the High Cut Filter dialog box to select the high cut filter. This selection

applies to all channels whose high-cut filter setting is set to ACC.

High-cut filter selection list (Hz):

15, 35, 70, 120, 300, 600, 1,200, 3,000

50RP: Reduces frequency components over 50 Hz (-18 dB/oct) to remove

artifacts (EMG). Depending on examination circumstances, use the

50RP filter to remove EMG.

NOTEThe selectable settings (buttons) in the HF dialog box change

according to the sampling frequency setting.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Pat (Pattern selection button)

Opens the Pattern dialog box to select a programmed EEG pattern.

Programmed pattern list:

I to VIII A, B, C, D and Free A, B, C, D (36 patterns per set file), Trace as

Acquired.

A pattern includes the montage and amplifier settings (sensitivity, high-cut

filter, time constant), calibration voltage, waveform display on/off, waveforms

color and amplitude limit.

Trace as Acquired: Displays the waveforms with the pattern setting in which

the waveforms were acquired.

Ref (Reference electrode selection button)



Opens to select the reference electrode. Only available for monopolar

derivation.














reference).




reference).


programmed setting.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Clock

Displays the date and time of the left side of the waveform.

Elapsed time

Displays the elapsed time from the start of filing.

Epoch

Displays the epoch number of the currently displayed EEG waveforms. One

epoch corresponds to 10 seconds of data.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Tool Bar

AC Filter On/Off button


filter on by selecting AC Filter from the Control menu.

Display Pattern Table button




limit for each channel. You can also open the pattern table by selecting Pattern

Table from the Control menu.

Display Voltage Cursor button


between the two cursors. This function is available only when the screen is

frozen.

Display Time Cursor button


cursors. This function is available only when the screen is frozen.

Display Ruler button


This function is available only when the screen is frozen.

Display Patient Information button


can also open the Patient Information dialog box by selecting Patient

Information from the File menu.

Print Current Page button

Prints the currently displayed screen on the printer on a one page.

Video Link button

Displays the Video Link dialog box and the patient image when the QI-224A

Serial interface board is installed.

Zoom button

Displays the magnifying glass to zoom in the waveforms.

Screen Comment button

Opens the Comment Edit dialog box to add a screen comment. The entered

comment can be displayed on the screen.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Select Displayed Page and Advance button

Selects all waveforms on the current page and its information in the Wave

Select dialog box, then displays the next page. The selected waveforms can be

printed or exported.

Display Note Waveform button

Displays the Note waveform window. You can copy the waveforms in the

Note waveform window to compare the waveforms.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Page Control Bar You can review the EEG waveforms by clicking the desired button on the page

control bar. “( )” shows the keyboard shortcut.

NOTEWhen reviewing the waveform forward or backward at high speed by

using the Rewind or Fast Forward button, if you want to scroll the

waveform by using the 1 Page Back, 1 Page Forward, 1 s Back or 1 s

Forward button, first click the Stop button to freeze the waveform

then click the desired button.

Rewind buttonReviews the waveform backward at high speed. (7)

Fast Forward buttonReviews the waveform forward at high speed. (9)

1 Page Back buttonScrolls one page of the displayed waveform backward. (4)

1 Page Forward buttonScrolls one page of the displayed waveform forward. (6)

1 s Back buttonScrolls the displayed waveform backward one second. (1)

1 s Forward buttonScrolls the displayed waveform forward one second. (3)

Centering buttonWhen this button is clicked, the mouse pointer changes to “”. You can

move the selected waveform to the center by clicking the waveform with this

pointer.

Stop buttonStops reviewing the waveform and freezes the waveform. (0)

Play buttonReviews the waveform continuously. (.)Analog signal output is available in this mode when the optional QD-101A

Analog output board is installed.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Event mark display area

Time (Beginning/Ending Time of File)

Displays the beginning/ending time of the file. You can also display the

beginning or ending of the EEG waveform by clicking the button.

Previous/Next Section button

Scrolls the event mark display area backward/forward one hour. This button is

only available when the range of the event mark display area is set to “HOUR”.

Previous Event button

Displays the EEG waveform marked by the previous event mark.

Next Event button

Displays the EEG waveform marked by the next event mark.

Select Event button

Opens the annotation list box to display the EEG waveform by specifying

the event name (annotation on the waveform). You can also open the

annotation list box by selecting Event from the Jump menu.

Jump Bar

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Reviewing the EEG Waveforms

When the EEG data file opens on the Review screen, the first page of the

waveforms appears. You can review the EEG waveforms by clicking the desired

button on the page control bar.

NOTEWhen reviewing the waveform forward or backward at high speed by

using the Rewind or Fast Forward button, if you want to scroll the

waveform by using the 1 Page Back, 1 Page Forward, 1 s Back or 1 s

Forward button, at first click the Stop button to freeze the waveform,

then click the desired button.

Rewind/Forward button:Reviews the waveform backward/

forward at high speed.

1 Page Back/Forward button:Scrolls one page of the displayedwaveform backward/forward.

1 s Back/Forward button:Scrolls the displayed waveformbackward/forward one second.

Stop buttonStops reviewing the waveform andfreezes the waveform.

Play button:Reviews the waveform continuously.

Centering button

When reviewing the EEG waveforms backward or forward

at high speed, the Speed Control dialog box opens. You can

select the scroll speed and scroll mode with the dialog box.

A pause time and display mode can be changed in the

Display control dialog box (Display menu → Display

Control). After each page sweeps, the waveform is frozen

on the screen for the specified pause time. You can also add

an annotation to the waveform while reviewing the

waveform backward or forward at high speed .

• To display the EEG waveform by specifying the event

name (annotation) added to the waveform, use the

annotation list box or jump bar at the bottom of the screen.

Refer to “Searching for Waveforms”.

• To display the EEG waveforms by specifying the time, use

the Time Jump dialog box. Refer to “Searching by Time”.

• To move the waveform to the center, use the centering

button. When this button is clicked, the mouse pointer

changes to “ ”. You can move the selected waveform

to the center by clicking the waveform with this pointer.

• To add an annotation to a waveform when reviewing the

EEG waveforms backward or forward at high speed, press

the “+” key on the number keys. The event name and the

time when the annotation is added before pressing the “+”

on the number keys are selected in the “Add events in fast

review” area in the System Setting dialog box- Junction

box, operation, display page.

Jumps to the next or previousevent at high speed

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Searching for Waveforms

You can quickly display the waveform by specifying the event name or time. This is

only available when the waveforms are frozen.

1. Click the Stop button to freeze the EEG waveform.

2. Click the Select Event button on the Jump bar, or select Event from the

Jump menu. The annotation list box opens.

Annotation list box options

Single-click: Single-click to jump to the waveform annotated by the event.

Event/Note wave

Event: Displays the annotations in the list box.

Note wave: Display the note waveform window and the list of the copied

part of waveforms in the list box. Refer to “Copying Parts of

waveforms” in this section.

Mask area

Select: Opens the Event Select dialog box to select the event names .

The selected event names are displayed in the annotation list

and the event marks are displayed in the Event Jump bar.

When the Select option is selected, you can also type an event name with up to

40 characters. All events that include the entered characters are displayed on

the annotation list. You can type two or more event names. To enter two or

more event names, separate the event names with “,”.

3. Double-click the event name you want to jump to in the annotation list. The

specified waveform is displayed on the screen.

4. Click the Select Event button again. The annotation list box closes.

The annotation list box can be openedfrom the Event Jump bar.1) Right-click the event mark

display area on the Event Jumpbar. The pop-up menu opens.

2) Select Event Select from theEvent Mark menu. Theannotation list box opens.

Searching by the EventName

Click the item name at the topof the column to sort events.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Searching by the EventJump Bar

You can display any part of the EEG waveform by clicking any place on the Event

jump bar at the bottom of the screen.

Event mark display area:

• To display any part of the EEG waveform, click any position on the Jump bar.

• To display the EEG waveform marked by the event mark, click the vertical line.

• To display the clock time information, move the mouse pointer on the desired position and leave it for about

1 second.

• To display the name of the event mark, move the mouse pointer onto the vertical line and leave it for more

than 1 second.

• To open the annotation list box:

1) Right-click the event mark display area on the Event Jump bar. The pop-up menu opens.

2) Select Event Select from Event Mask menu. The annotation list box opens.

During measurement, when the date changes, a green vertical line appears.

System events which can be deleted are displayed in black and manual events which cannot be deleted are

displayed in blue.

Screen Comment:

The screen comment can be displayed when the Display screen comment check box on the Display Control

dialog box is checked. The attached picture can be displayed by clicking the picture icon on the screen

comment.

Currently displayed waveforms Vertical lines indicate event marks

Previous/Next Section button:Scrolls the event mark display area backward/forward one hour. These buttons are availableonly when the range of the event markdisplay area is set to “HOUR”.

Previous/Next Event button:Displays the EEG waveform marked by theprevious/next event mark.

Beginning/ending time of filing:Displays the beginning/ending time of filing.You can also display the beginning or endingof the EEG waveform by clicking the button.

Select Event button:Opens the annotation list box to display the EEGwaveform by specifying the event name.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


1. Right-click the display area. The pop-up menu opens.

2. Select the range from the menu.

Selection list:

All Displays the beginning to end of the file.

Hour Displays an hour of the file.

Hour/2 Displays a half hour of the file.

Hour/4 Displays a quarter hour of the file.

You can scroll the event mark display area backward or forward by clicking

the Previous or Next Section button when “Hour”, “Hour/2” or “Hour/4” is

selected.

Searching by the DSAJump Bar

You can display any part of the EEG waveform by clicking any place on the DSAjump bar at the bottom of the screen. The DSA trendgraph displays amplitude foreach frequency component every 2.5 seconds.

Changing the Range of theEvent Mark Display Areaand DSA Trend GraphDisplay Area

Voltage scale/DSA color scale:The voltage scale shows the slectedamplitude range. The DSA colorscale shows the correspondingamplitude (µV).

DSA trendgraph:Amplitude for each frequency component is displayed incolor. The amplitude is smaller toward the purple end andlarger toward the red end. You can display thecorresponding waveform by clicking any place on thetrendgraph. The trendgraph display area can be changed.Refer to ”Searching by the Event Jump Bar - To changethe range of the event mark display area”.

Upper Arrow:Displays the Long term DSA window to reviewthe DSA trendgraph for long term EEGmonitoring data or polysomnography data.

DSA Setup:Opens the DSA settings dialog box toselect DSA trendgraph display settings.

DSA group:Display the DSA pattern. You can change the DSAtrendgraph display settings by changing the pattern.

Frequency scale (0 to 20 Hz)

6. REVIEW PROGRAM



2. Select Time from the Jump menu, or click the button in the clock display area

or Elapsed time display area. The Event Jump dialog box opens.

Searching by Time

3. Select the Elapsed time or Clock time option. The selectable date is displayed

in the Date list box when “Clock Time” is selected.

4. Type the time in the following format.

Elapsed time: “hhhh:mm:ss”

Clock time: “hh:mm:ss”

5. Click the OK button


6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Changing the Pattern

A pattern includes the montage and amplifier settings (sensitivity, high-cut filter

and time constant), calibration voltage, waveform display on/off, waveform color

and amplitude limit. When the EEG data file opens, waveforms are displayed with

the pattern settings in which they were acquired. You can change the pattern to any

of 36 programmed patterns (I to VIII A, B, C, D and Free A, B, C, D).

When an EEG data file opens, “Trace as Acquired” is automatically selected.

1. Click the Pat button on the amp bar. The Pattern selection dialog

box opens.

2. Click the new pattern.

3. Click the OK button to close the Pattern selection dialog box.

When individually changing the montage, reference electrode, the setting value

above all buttons in the amp bar is displayed in black. In this case, “Trace” mode

is off and the waveforms are displayed with the currently selected pattern and

amplifier settings.

When changing the amplifier setting (sensitivity, time constant or high-cut filter),

the setting value above the Sens, TC or HF button in the amp bar is displayed in

black. In this case, the waveforms are displayed with the currently selected

amplifier setting. But the trace mode for the montage and reference electrode

remain.

Changes the pattern group.

Changes the pattern inthe selected group.

Displays the waveforms with the pattern setting in which they wereacquired. When this setting is selected, “TRACE” is displayed onthe Pat button in blue and each amplifier setting above the buttonin the amp bar is also displayed in blue.

Displayed in blue

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Changing the Measurement Settings

Changing AmplifierSettings for All SelectedChannels

You can change the amplifier settings for all channels or individual channels.

NOTEThe selectable settings in the HF dialog box and pattern table change


Saving the electrodes for Waveform Acquisition” in Section 4.

The ACC (All Channel Control) setting lets you change amplifier settings for more

than one channel on all patterns at the same time. All channels which have the

amplifier settings set to ACC are linked together. When you change the Sens, TC

or HF on the amp bar or the CAL setting, that setting automatically changes for all

ACC channels.

Setting ACC

Changed amplifier settings during waveform review are temporary changes and are

lost when you close the Review program. To keep the changes, change the settings

in the System program.



2. Select the setting(s) to change. A broken rectangle encloses the selected

settings.



1

2

3

6. REVIEW PROGRAM





Click the Sens, TC, HF button at the top of the column.


table.

3. Click ACC.

4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 to change other settings, if necessary.


Changing the Amplifier Setting



2. Click the new setting. All channels whose settings are set to ACC are changed

to the selected sensitivity. The selected setting is indicated on the box above

the button in black.



6. REVIEW PROGRAM


You can change amplifier settings for individual channels. Even if the setting is

ACC (see “Changing Amplifier Settings for All Selected Channels”), you can still

change settings for individual channels using this procedure.

Changing Amplifier Settings for One Channel

This setting change is lost when another pattern is selected or when you close the

Review program.

1. Click the channel number on the left side of the waveform. The channel

number of the selected channel is highlighted.

2. Click the Sens, TC, or HF button on the amp bar. The Sensitivity, Time


Changing AmplifierSettings for IndividualChannels


3. Click the new settings


Changing Amplifier Settings for Two or More Channels

This setting change, except for a free pattern, is lost when another pattern is

selected or when you close the Review program.



6. REVIEW PROGRAM


2. Select the setting(s) to change on the pattern table. The selected settings are

enclosed by a dotted rectangle.






Click the Sens, TC, HF button at the top of the column.


table.

3. Click the new setting in the selection list box.

The settings enclosed by the dotted rectangles changes to the new setting. An

“*” mark is displayed before all changed settings which are temporary

changes.


Changed settings and ACC are indicated on the pattern table as follows.Changed Settings andACC Marks

When you change Sens, TC, HF or CAL on the amp bar, all ACC settings are

changed. If you select and change any individual setting in the pattern table, only

that setting is changed. If an ACC setting is selected individually, it is changed

individually.

Mark Meaning

$ Temporarily changed reference electrode

* Any other temporarily changed settings.

Highlighted Sensitivity, TC, HF or CAL setting which is not set to ACC.

Not highlighted Sensitivity, TC, HF or CAL setting which is set to ACC.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


You can change the montage by changing electrodes. An “*” mark appears to the

right of all changed electrodes as temporary changes. This setting change, except

for a free pattern, is lost when another pattern is selected or when you close the

Review program.

Electrodes that are not saved with EEG waveforms are displayed in red on the

Pattern table and Electrode position layout table. You cannot review the EEG

waveforms in a montage which includes unsaved electrodes. To save an electrode,

refer to “Selecting and the Electrodes to be Saved with EEG Waveforms” in

Section 4.





are enclosed by dotted rectangles.






Click the G1 or G2 button at top of the column.

The Electrode position layout table opens.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM



Reference electrode:

AV: The reference for AV derivation.

BN: The reference for BN derivation.

SD : The reference for Laplacian derivation.

Aav: The averaged reference of A1 and A2.

0 V button:


potential between the reference electrodes (C3/C4) and whichever G1 or G2

electrode is not set to “0 V”.

3. Click an electrode in the Electrode position layout table to select it.

The selected G1 or G2 electrode(s) enclosed by the broken rectangle are

replaced with the selected new electrode. The dotted rectangle moves to the

next electrode.


6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Changing the ReferenceElectrode



When the EEG waveforms are displayed with monopolar montages using A1 and

A2 electrodes, you can change the reference electrode. Changed electrodes are

displayed with a “$” mark.

1. Click the Ref button on the amp bar. The Reference electrode

selection dialog box opens.














reference).




reference).


programmed setting.

2. Click an electrode to change the reference electrode. The corresponding

electrode name on the pattern table and the waveform is replaced with the

selected electrode name.

3. Click the OK button to close the Reference electrode selection dialog box.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


1. Select AV Delete from the control menu. The AV Delete dialog box opens and

the Electrode position layout table and the currently selected montage appears

on the dialog box.

Selecting or DeletingElectrodes for AVDerivation

Pattern table


Pattern table:

Displays the montage for the current pattern. All channels can be displayed by

using the scroll bar.


The reference electrode names are displayed on the Electrode position layout.

The electrodes used for reference voltage calculation are highlighted. To add

or delete an electrode on the electrode position layout, click the electrode.

2. Click an electrode to highlight or unhighlight it. Highlighting indicates that the

electrode is selected for AV derivation. “*” appears beside changed electrodes.

3. Click the Save button to save the changed settings. The settings are saved in

each pattern.

4. Click the OK button to close the AV Delete dialog box.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Adjusting BN Balance forBN Derivation

To adjust the voltage balance between the BN1 and BN2 reference electrodes when

the balanced noncephalic derivation is selected, use the BN balance dialog box.

1. Select BN Balance from the Control menu. The BN Balance dialog box opens.

When the reference electrode is changed to BN, the BN Balance dialog box


Balance:

The voltage balance between the BN1 electrode and the BN2 electrode. The

displayed value is the ratio of the BN1 electrode.

2. Click the ↑ or ↓ arrow to minimize the ECG waveform overlapped on the EEG

waveform. You can type the ratio with the keyboard.

3. Click the OK button to close the BN Balance dialog box.

1. From the Control menu, select CAL. The CAL dialog box opens.

2. Select the desired calibration voltage from the list box. All channels whose

calibration settings are set to ACC are changed to the selected voltage.

3. Click the OK button to close the CAL dialog box.

Changing the CalibrationVoltage

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Changing the WaveformDisplay Settings

About the Display Control Dialog Box

You can select the waveform display settings in the Display Control dialog box. To

open this dialog box, select Display Control from the Display menu.

Displaying the Derivation (Montage) and/or Comment beside Each

Channel

You can display or not display the derivation beside each channel. To display the

derivation and/or comment beside each channel, click the Display Montage and/or

Comment check box in the Montage and Comment area. You can select the

derivation and comment display position by clicking the Left Side or Right Side

option button.

Displaying the Time Scale

To display the time scale in the Time Mark area, select the 1 s or 200 ms option on

the Time Scale area.

OFF: A vertical line is not displayed.

1 s: Displays a vertical line every one second.

200 ms: Displays a vertical line every 200 milliseconds.

Changing the Pause Time

When reviewing the EEG waveforms continuously in high speed, you can select a

pause time and display mode to easily observe the waveform. After each page

sweeps, the waveform is frozen on the screen for the specified pause time.

To select the pause time, click the OFF, 0.250 s, 0.500 s or 0.750 s option in the

Page Display Time Area.

Changing the Display Mode

When reviewing the EEG waveforms continuously in high speed, you can select

either of two display modes to easily observe the waveform. To select the display

mode, click the Overwrite or Page option in the Fast Review Mode area.

Overwrite: The waveforms are fixed on the screen and the new waveforms

continuously overwrite the previous waveforms.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Page: The waveforms are fixed on the screen and the display is updated

one page at a time.

Displaying the Event

To display the events on the screen, check the Display event check box.

Drawing a High Speed Sampled Waveforms Quicker

When the EEG waveforms are acquired in at a high sampling frequency, the

review program can draw the waveforms on the screen quicker when the Fast

screen draw and/or Fast screen draw in high speed review check box is checked.

Displaying the Extended Channel Bar

You can display the montage and calibration voltage on the extended channel bar.

To display the extended channel bar, check the Display extended channel bar check

box.

Displaying the Screen Comment

You can display the screen comment by checking the Display screen comment

check box. To add a comment, open the Comment Edit dialog box by clicking the

Screen Comment button on the tool bar when the waveforms are frozen.

Displaying the Vertical Lines for the Selected Events

You can display the vertical light gray lines for annotations. To display the vertical

lines, check the Display event color line check box. For the specified event, you

can assign a color vertical line. Refer “Editing the Waveform Annotations and

Patient Information Items” in Section 4.

Selecting the Zoom in Area

Select the duration to zoom in. You can zoom in a part of the waveforms by

clicking the magnifying glass.

Selection list: 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000 ms

Displaying the Measurement Date and Time When Using the Time

Cursor

The Cursor dialog box can display measurement date and time for the time cursors.

To display the measurement date and time, check the Display date and time with

cursor check box.

Displaying the Montage Map Window

The montage map window displays the montage on the electrode position layout.

To display the montage window, check the Display montage map check box.

For the montage window, refer to“Changing the Measurement Settings- Changing the Waveform Display -Displaying the Montage MapWindow” in Section 5.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Changing Waveform Display Positions

To change the position of all channels:

There are three waveform display position setting modes.

Even Layout: Evenly spaces the baseline positions for all channels in channel

order. Channels that are temporarily turned off are omitted.

Ch. Layout: Evenly spaces the baseline positions for all channels in channel

order. Blank spaces are left for undisplayed channels.

Superimpose: Overlaps consecutive odd and even channels. Channels are omitted

if their time constant is not set to ACC.

From the Display menu, select the appropriate layout command to select the

waveform display position.

Even layout Channel layout Superimpose

Display

To change the position of a specific channel:

1. Click the channel number on the left side of the screen to select the channel.

The selected channel number is highlighted.

2. Move the mouse pointer to the selected channel number.

3. Press and hold down the left mouse button, then move the mouse pointer to the


4. Release the mouse button to fix the waveform position.

5. Click the waveform window to release the channel selection.

Displaying/Not Displaying a Waveform



2. Click ON or OFF in the Display box.

3. Click ON or OFF in the selection list box.


6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Changing the Waveform Display Speed

From the Display menu, select the speed.


mm/s).


30 mm/s).


20 mm/s).


15 mm/s).


10 mm/s).


mm/s).

5 min/page: Displays a 5 minute page on the screen (corresponds to recording at 1

mm/s).

Changing a Waveform Color



2. Click the Color column of the channel to open the selection list box on the




Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform





2. Click the Width column of the channel to open the selection list box on the




Color

Width

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


To turn on the AC filter, click the AC Filter On/Off button on the tool bar, or

select AC Filter from the Control menu.

When ECG waveforms are superimposed on the EEG waveforms, use the ECG

filter to reduce the ECG waveform on each EEG channel. This filter works in the

following way to subtract the ECG components from the EEG waveforms.

1) The time point when the ECG waveforms exceed the trigger level of the trigger

channel is used as an averaging trigger.

2) The part of the EEG waveforms synchronized with the trigger is averaged in

each channel.

3) The averaged waveform is subtracted from the next trigger point of the EEG

waveform in the averaging period in each channel.

Using the AC filter

Using the ECG Filter

Averaged waveforms when the ECGwaveforms exceed the trigger level.When the ECG filter is turned on, the EEGwaveforms subtracted from the averagedwaveforms are displayed.

ECG waveforms superimposed onthe EEG waveform

Trigger level

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Caution when using the ECG filterThe ECG filter detects the ECG waveforms superimposed on the EEG

waveforms by triggering the QRS wave of the ECG waveforms and

averaging. When the ECG filter is turned on, if a large artifact with

continuously varying, such as body movement, EMG or respiration

waveform which amplitude varies continuously, is superimposed on

the EEG waveforms, the ECG waveform (averaging result) cannot be

correctly measured. This may distort the EEG waveforms or the EEG

waveforms may not be displayed continuously. When the EEG

waveforms are not displayed continuously, click the Reset button on

the ECG filter dialog box to reset the ECG filter.

Be careful using the ECG filter when there is a large artifact. The

ECG filter is useful to reduce the ECG waveforms superimposed on

the EEG waveforms when the EEG waveforms are stable and there is

no large artifact.

1. Select ECG Filter from the Control menu. The ECG Filter dialog box opens.

NOTERequires application of dedicated ECG electrodes on patient and

ECG channel displayed in the montage.

2. Click the Trigger Channel box arrow to select the ECG trigger channel.

3. Click to select the trigger mode.

AUTO: The trigger level is set automatically. The trigger level cursor is

not displayed on the screen.

MANUAL: You can set the trigger level manually with the trigger level cursor

displayed over the trigger channel on the screen. Move the cursor

with the Trigger Level ↑ or ↓ arrow so that the cursor position is at

half of the peak amplitude of the QRS wave.

4. Click the ECG filter On check box to turn the ECG filter on.

To turn off the ECG filter, click it again.

When you close the Acquisition program or change the pattern, the ECG filter

is automatically set to Off.

Trigger level cursor

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


You can measure the voltage (amplitude) or time interval of the waveform by

displaying the two vertical cursors, horizontal cursors or ruler on the screen when

the waveforms are frozen. The voltage and time cursors can be displayed at the

same time.

The Cursor dialog box is displayed together with the voltage and/or time cursors to

indicate the amplitude and time interval between the two cursors.

Frequency: Displays the frequency calculated from the time interval.

Amplitude: Displays the amplitude between the two voltage cursors.

Time: Displays the time interval between the two time cursors.

C1 box/C2 box: Displays the elapsed time or measurement date and time

of each time cursor. The default setting is the elapsed

time. To display the measurement date and time, check

the Display date and time with cursor check box in the

Display Control dialog box.

C1 box: For the left time cursor

C2 box: For the right time cursor

Lock cursor interval: When checked, the intervals between the two cursors are

fixed. When the voltage cursors and time cursors are

displayed, the rectangle enclosed by 4 cursors and the

rectangle can be moved with the mouse

1. Click the Stop button on the tool bar to freeze the EEG waveforms.

2. Click the Display Voltage Cursor button on the tool bar, or select Voltage

Cursor from the Tool menu. The two horizontal (voltage) cursors appear on

the screen.

Using the Voltage Cursor

Measuring Amplitude and Time with the Cursors and Ruler

About the Cursor DialogBox

Voltage cursors

6. REVIEW PROGRAM



color.



The voltage between the two cursors is displayed on the Cursor dialog box.

To measure the voltage of a channel, click the channel No. on the left side of

the screen.

1. Click the Stop button on the tool bar to freeze the EEG waveforms.

2. Click the Display Time Cursor button on the tool bar, or select Time Cursor

from the Tool menu. The two vertical (time) cursors appear on the screen.


color.

Time cursors

Using the Time Cursor



The time interval and frequency between the two cursors are displayed on the

Cursor dialog box.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Using the Ruler 1. Click the Stop button on the tool bar to freeze the EEG waveform.

2. Click the Display Ruler button on the tool bar or, select Ruler from the

Tool menu. The ruler appears on the screen.

3. Click the appropriate position to measure the amplitude or time of the

waveform. Or, drag the ruler to the position.

Ruler

To change the scale of the ruler, clickthe right mouse button.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


You can zoom in a part of the waveforms.

1. Click the Zoom button on the tool bar or select Zoom from the Display

menu. The mouse pointer changes to the magnifying glass.

2. Click anywhere on the screen you want to zoom in with the magnifying glass.

The waveforms in the selected duration in the Zoom in area/page option of the

Display Control dialog box are enlarged and displayed in one page.

To return to the original size, click anywhere on the screen or unselect Zoom in

the Display menu.

To change the duration,

1) From the Display menu, select Display Control. The Display Control

dialog box opens.

2) Select the duration in the “Zoom area/page” list box.

Selection list: 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000 ms

Zooming In the Waveform

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


NOTEThe patient’s ID and name must be entered in order to close the EEG

file.

You can change the patient information by either mouse or keyboard.

There are two pages in the patient information dialog box. You can enter the basic

patient information on page 1 and the patient condition such as seizure type, sleep

disorder, medical history, and medication on page 2.

Click the Display Patient Information button on the tool bar, or select Patient

Information from the File menu. The Patient Information dialog box opens.

To open the page 2, click the 2 tab.


Entering Patient Information and Other Data

General

Opening the PatientInformation Dialog Box



6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Patient Information DialogBox Options

The settings in the list box can be changed. Refer to “Editing the Waveform

Annotation and Patient Information Items” in Section 4.


Entry items for Patient Information dialog box:

• ID (up to 30 characters) • Comment (up to 160 characters)

• Name (up to 40 characters) • Date (Examination date)


• Sex (M or F) • EEG No. (Examination number)


• Date of Birth (up to 10 characters) • In/Out patient (In or Out)

• Age (up to 5 characters) • Refer. Dept (Referring department)


• Handedness (L or R) • Physician (up to 40 characters)

• Height (up to 5 numbers) • Operator (up to 40 characters)

• Weight (up to 5 numbers)

The Date (Examination date) is automatically entered.

Enter the Date of Birth with the same format as the Date.

The age is automatically calculated when the date of birth is entered.

This function does not support ages of 100 or older.

If the age of the patient is 100 or older, edit the age manually.

The format of the Date and Date of Birth can be changed with the Windows

Control Panel.

Table:

Calls up a list of preset conditions for “Comment”. When one of these conditions

is clicked, it is entered at the cursor position in the Comment window. You can

preset conditions for each item. Refer to “Editing the Waveform Annotations and

Patient Information Items” in section 4.


Entry items for the Patient Information 2 dialog box:

Up to 180 characters can be entered. You can call up the preset condition list by

clicking the Table button.

1. Patient Condition

2. Seizure Type

3. Sleep Disorder

4. Medical History

5. Medication

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


NOTE• Patient ID and name must be entered, otherwise the EEG file cannot

be closed.

• The characters “ | ” and “ ’ ” cannot be entered.

• To select a description box:

1) Move the mouse pointer to the description box and click it. The input cursor

appears.

2) Type the text with the keyboard.

• To move the cursor to the next description box:

Press the TAB key. If there is any word in the box, it is highlighted.

• To move the cursor to a previous description box:

Press the TAB and SHIFT keys together. If there is any word in the box, it is

highlighted.

• To insert a character in a description box:


The cursor appears at the pointer position.

2) Type a character with the keyboard.

• To change text:

1) Move the mouse pointer to the appropriate word or phrase and double-click it

to select the word or phrase. The selected word or phrase is highlighted.

2) Type the text with the keyboard. The new text replaces the highlighted text.

• To enter text in a table or a selection list box:

The following items have a table or selection list box. The settings are preset in

the System program.

Table: Comment, Patient Condition, Seizure Type, Sleep disorder,

Medical History, Medication

Selection list box: Refer. Dept, Physician, and Operator.


The input cursor appears.

2) Click the table button (the arrow following the box for “Refer. Dept”,

“Physician”, and “Operator”) to open the selection list box.

3) Click the text to enter the description box.

•· To enter text using a button:

“Sex”, “Handedness” and “In/Outpatient” can be selected by clicking the

corresponding button.

Entering the PatientInformation

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Editing the Annotation Added to the Waveforms

You can change and delete the event marks (annotations) added to the waveforms

during acquisition, or add a new annotation to the waveform.

NOTEAn annotation marked with type “S” cannot be deleted.

1. From the Tool menu, select Modify Event. The Modify Event dialog box

opens.

Deleting an Annotation

2. Select the event in the Annotation list box. The selected annotation is

highlighted.

To select one event:

Click the event.

To select consecutive events:

1) Click the first event.

2) Press and hold the Shift key while you click the last event.

Or, drag the cursors to select the event.

To select two or more events out of sequence:

Press and hold the Ctrl key while you click each event.

3. Click the Delete button. The confirmation dialog box opens.


To cancel deleting, click the Cancel button.

The event can be deleted in the annotation list box by pressing the Delete key on

the keyboard.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


On screen

NOTEBlue annotations cannot be deleted.

1. Click the Stop button on the page control bar to freeze the EEG waveforms.

2. Double-click the annotation. The confirmation dialog box opens.


To cancel deleting, click the Cancel button.

NOTEAn annotation marked with type “S” cannot be changed.


opens.

Changing an Annotation

2. Click the annotation in the Annotation list box. The selected annotation is

highlighted.

3. Click the Modify button. The Modify dialog box opens and the selected

annotation is displayed in the Event text box.

4. Keyboard:

Type the annotation with up to 40 characters.

Mouse:

1) Click the Event list box arrow. The Event name list box opens.

2) Click the annotation.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


The annotation displayed in the Event text box is replaced with the selected

annotation. The measurement time of the previous annotation is displayed in

the description box.

To change the time, use the keyboard.


To cancel the change, click the Cancel button.

Adding an Annotation by Specifying the Time


opens.

Adding an Annotation

2. Click the Add button. The Add dialog box opens.

3. Keyboard:

Type the annotation with up to 40 characters.

Mouse:

1) Click the Event list box arrow. The Event name list box opens.

2) Click the annotation.

4. Type the measurement time with the “hhhh:mm:ss” format.


To cancel the change, click the Cancel button.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


On screen

NOTEClose the measuring cursors (voltage cursor, time cursor and ruler),

if used. If not, the Annotation dialog box cannot be opened.

1. Click the Stop button to freeze the EEG waveforms.

2. Right-click the waveform where you want to add an annotation.

3. Click the right mouse button. The Annotation dialog box opens.

4. Click the annotation on the list box or type the annotation in the manual Input

text box with up to 40 characters. The annotation is marked on the waveform.


Adding an Annotation in High Speed Review

You can add an annotation to a waveform when reviewing the EEG waveforms

backward or forward at high speed. To add an annotation to a waveform, press the

“+” key in the number keys. A beep sounds. The event name and the time when

the event is added before pressing the “+” key in the number keys are selected in

the “Add events in fast review” area in the System Setting dialog box- Junction

box, operation, display page.

Within the currently displayed EEG waveforms, you can move annotations

displayed in black to another position.

NOTEBlue annotations cannot be moved.


2. Move the mouse pointer to the annotation.

3. Drag the annotation to the position where you want to move.

The confirmation dialog box appears.

4. Click the OK button. The annotation moves.

To cancel moving, click the Cancel button.

Moving an Annotation

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Adding a Screen Comment When the waveforms are frozen, you can add a text and attach a picture file to a

waveform as a screen comment. The attached file is saved together with the EEG

data file.

The screen comment can be displayed when the Display screen comment check

box on the Display Control dialog box is checked. The attached picture can be

displayed by clicking the picture icon on the screen comment. The screen

comment can be moved anywhere on the page


2. Click the Screen Comment button on the tool bar. The Comment Edit

dialog box opens.

3. Type a comment with up to 384 characters.

To attach a picture as a screen comment.

1) Click the Ref button on the Comment Edit dialog box. The Open dialog

box opens.

2) Select the file.

3) Click the Open button. The Open dialog box closes.

4. Click the OK button. The comment is saved as a P-COMMENT and displayed

on the screen.

To cancel adding the comment, click the Cancel button.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Editing the Screen Comment:

1. Right-click the comment. The screen comment menu opens.

2. Select Edit. The Comment Edit dialog box opens. The comment is displayed

on the text box and the attached picture file name is displayed on the Link text

box.

3. Change or add the comment in the text box.

To delete the comment or picture:

1) Select the comment or picture

2) Click the Delete button

4. Click the OK button. The changed or added comment is displayed on the

screen.

To cancel editing, click the Cancel button.

Deleting the Screen Comment

1. Right-click the comment. The screen comment menu opens.

2. Select Delete. The screen comment is deleted.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


You can select events in the annotation list box and Event Jump bar. The selected

event names are displayed in the annotation list and the event marks are displayed

in the Event Jump bar.




Annotation list box options

Single-click: Single-click to jump to the waveform annotated by the event.

Event/Note wave

Event: Displays the annotations in the list box.

Note wave: Display the note waveform window and the list of the copied

part of waveforms in the list box. Refer to “Copying Parts of

waveforms” in this section.

Mask area

Select button:Opens the Event Select dialog box to select the event names .

The selected event names are displayed in the annotation list

and the event marks are displayed in the Event Jump bar.

Selecting the Events

When the Select option is selected, you can also type an event name with up to

40 characters. All events that include the entered characters are displayed on

the annotation list. You can type two or more event names. To enter two or

more event names, separate the event names with “,”.

3. Double-click the event name you want to jump to in the annotation list. The

specified waveform is displayed on the screen.

The latest 6 events selected in the annotation list that you jumped to are saved

in memory.

To display and select the saved events:

1) Right-click the event mark display area on the Event Jump bar. The pop-

up menu opens.

2) Select the Event Mask. The saved event are displayed in the pop-up

menu.

The annotation list box can be openedfrom the Event Jump bar.1) Right-click the event mark

display area on the Event Jumpbar. The pop-up menu opens.

2) Select Event Select from theEvent Mask menu. Theannotation list box opens

Click the item name at the top ofthe column to sort events.

All:

Displays all event names on the

annotation list.

Select:

Displays the selected event names on

the annotation bar.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


You can select part of the waveforms and its information in the Wave Select dialog

box. Selected waveform parts can be printed or exported. Up to 100 parts of the

waveforms in one second steps can be selected.

NOTE• When saving several parts of waveforms, the selected parts must not

overlap each other.

• When saving a file as an ASCII file, select parts of waveforms that are

less than 5 minutes. 500 Hz sampling time, 20 channels, 5 minutes of

waveforms uses 25 MB file space. If the file is 25 MB or more,

another application may be unable to open the file.

1. Click the Stop button to freeze the waveform.

2. From the Tool menu, select Wave Select. The Wave Select dialog box opens

and two vertical cursors appear on the screen.

Selecting Parts of the Waveforms

3. Move the cursors to select part of the waveforms by clicking the left mouse

button.

To change a cursor, click the right mouse button.

4. Click the Set button in the Wave Select dialog box. The waveforms between

the two cursors, its beginning and ending time, pattern number, and display

speed are saved and displayed in the list.

Later, you can display the selected waveform parts by double-clicking the data

in the list. You can print or export the selected waveform parts.

Cursors

Selected part

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Wave Select dialog box options

Rewind button/Forward button:

Reviews the selected waveform data in the list backward or forward at high

speed.

Set:

Saves the selected part of waveforms between two cursors.

Exchange:

Exchanges the waveform data in the list for the part of waveforms between the

two cursors.

Delete:

Deletes the selected waveform data in the list.

5. Click the OK button. The Wave Select dialog box closes and the cursors

disappear.

Selecting All Waveforms on a Page

To select all waveforms on a page, click the Select Displayed Page and

Advance button on the tool bar. When waveforms are selected, the next page

appears.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM



components and displays amplitude for each frequency as a DSA (Density Spectral

Array) trendgraph on the review screen and EEG Scope - Comparison mode. The

DSA trendgraph let you easily find the EEG waveforms when ictus epileptic

seizure occurs or a specific frequency band of the EEG waveform, such as alpha

wave, delta wave or stage of spindle in sleep study,

During waveform acquisition, the instrument can create the FFT data to display the

DSA trendgraph. Refer to “Creating the FFT Data for DSA Trendgraph” in Section

5. If the FFT data is not created, create it. Refer to “Creating the FFT Data for

DSA Trendgraph” in this section.

Displaying a DSA Trendgraph

Displaying a DSATrendgraph

From the Tool menu, select show DSA in Jump Bar.

Or,

1. Right-click the display area the jump bar.

The pop-up menu opens.

2. Select Display DSA .

The DSA jump bar opens at the bottom of the screen.

DSA jump bar

Around here, the DSA trendgraph is almost red. This showsthat amplitude and frequency components of the EEGwaveforms suddenly change. You can jump to the EEGwaveforms by clicking here.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


1. Right-click the display area. The pop-up menu opens.

2. Select the range from the menu.

Selection list:

All Displays the beginning to end of the file.

Hour Displays an hour of the file.

Hour/2 Displays a half hour of the file.

Hour/4 Displays a quarter hour of the file.

You can scroll the event mark display area backward or forward by clicking

the Previous or Next Section button when “Hour”, “Hour/2” or “Hour/4” is

selected.

About the DSA Jump Bar You can display any part of the EEG waveform by clicking any place on the DSAtrendgraph. The DSA trendgraph displays amplitude for each frequencycomponent every 2.5 seconds.

Changing the Range of theDSA Trend Graph DisplayArea

DSA trendgraph:Amplitude for each frequency component is displayed incolor. The amplitude is smaller toward the purple end andlarger toward to red end. You can display thecorresponding waveform by clicking any place on thetrendgraph. The trendgraph display area can be changed.Refer to ”Searching by the Event Jump Bar - To changethe range of the event mark display area”.

Upper Arrow:Displays the Long term DSA window to reviewthe DSA trendgraph for long term EEGmonitoring data or polysomnography data.

DSA Setup:Opens the DSA settings dialog box toselect DSA trendgraph display settings.

DSA group:Display the DSA pattern. You can change the DSAtrendgraph display settings by changing the pattern.

Frequency scale (0 to 20 Hz)

Example:

Alpha waves Spindle waves Delta waves

Voltage scale/DSA color scale:The voltage scale shows the slectedamplitude range. The DSA colorscale shows the correspondingamplitude (µV).

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Creating the FFT Data forDSA Trendgraph

1. From the File menu, select FFT setup. The FFT settings dialog

box opens.

2. Select the following options to create the FFT data.

FFT settings dialog box options

FFT pattern:

The settings in the FFT pattern area can be saved with a pattern

name. To change the pattern name, click the Rename button.

FFT channel:

Select the electrode for the FFT calculation.

To select all electrodes, click the Select all button.

To cancel electrode selection, click the Clear button.

Reference:

Select the reference electrode for the FFT calculation.

DSA pattern:

In the Review screen, to select the DSA trendgraph display

settings. Refer to “Changing the DSA Trendgraph Display

Settings”.



4. From the File menu, select FFT reanalysis. The confirmation

dialog box opens.

To create or overwrite the FFT analysis data, click the OK button.

To cancel creating or overwriting, click the Cancel button.

5. When the FFT data is created, the message dialog box opens.

Click the OK button. The DSA jump bar automatically opens.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Displaying the DSATrendgraph in Detail

The DSA trendgraph can be displayed in detail by opening the Long Term DSA

window. To open the window, click the upper arrow on the DSA jump bar.

This box is useful to review the EEG waveforms measured for long time in sleep

study.

OK:Closes the Long TermDSA window.

DSA trendgraph/Event jump bar:You can display any part of the EEG waveform byclicking any place on the DSA trendgraph or jump bar.

EventsEvent marks for up to 5 events can be displayed with avertical color line in the Event jump bar. The selectedevent names are displayed Refer to “Changing the DSATrendgraph Display Settings”.

Use the scroll bar to view theinformation beyond the borders of thewindow.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Changing the DSATrendgraph DisplaySettings

To change the DSA trendgraph display settings, use the DSA settings dialog box.

1. Click the upper arrow on the DSA jump bar. The DSA settings dialog box

opens.

2. Change the settings.

DSA settings dialog box options

DSA pattern:

The settings in the DSA Pattern area can be

saved with a DSA pattern name. To change the

pattern name, click the Rename button. Up to

40 characters can be used.

DSA Pattern area

FFT channels used for DSA:

The FFT data is saved in every derivation that are selected in the FFT channel

area of the FFT settings dialog box . You can select the derivations to display

the DSA trendgraph.

• To select all derivations, click the Select all button.

• To select two or more consecutive derivations, drag the cursor to select the

derivations.

• To select the derivations, click the derivations while pressing the Ctrl key.

Maximum color voltage (µV):

Selects the maximum voltage for the trendgraph

DSA:

Selects whether or not to display the DSA data in the DSA trendgraph.

Edge:

Displays the edge frequency for each analysis period. You can set E% from 0

to 100% in the text box.

Peak:

Displays the peak frequency for each analysis period. You can set the range of

the peak frequency between 0 to 20 Hz in the text box.

Either “Edge” or Peak is selectable.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Long Term DSA area

Time scale:

Selects the time range for each row of the DSA trendgraph

Hide DSA

Does not display the DSA trendgraph on the Long Term DSA window.

Auto close after jump:

Closes the Long Term DSA window when you jump to any part of waveform

Tranparent DSA window:

Displays the transparent Long Term DSA window.

Event bar:

OFF: Closes the Event jump bar.

Normal: Displays all event marks for all events.

Detailed: Displays the event marks for the event that is selected in the Table

Items dialog box in the System program. Refer to “ Editing the

Waveform Annotations and Patient Information Items”.



6. REVIEW PROGRAM


You can copy any part of the waveforms in the note waveform window. Up to 1000

parts of the waveforms can be copied. You can review the waveforms while

comparing with the copied waveforms. The copied waveforms can be registered

in the instrument as sample data. Up to 100 sample data can be registered. You

can also review waveforms while comparing with sample data.

NOTE• When several review windows are opened, the note waveform

window is only available for the currently selected review window.

• After 1000 waveform parts are copied in the note waveform window,

new waveforms overwrites the oldest waveforms.

• After 100 sample data are registered in the instrument, new sample

data overwrites the oldest sample data.


2. Click the Display Note Waveform button on the tool bar, or select Note

Waveform from the Tool menu. The note waveform window opens.

• The list of the copied part of waveforms can be displayed in the annotation

list box. To display the note waveform list, click the Select Event button

on the Jump bar, or select Event from the Jump menu.

• To close the note waveform window, click the Display Note Waveform

button.

Copying Parts of Waveforms

Displaying the NoteWaveform Window

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Click the item name at the topof the column to sort items

Note waveform windowDisplays the copied part of waveforms.The waveforms are displayed with the current waveform displaysettings The dotted line shows the center of the copied part ofwaveforms.

Moves 1/10 backward or forward.

Note waveform list:Information about the copied part ofwaveforms are listed. Sample data isindicated by an “S” mark.

To change the window size, dragthe corner of the window.

The time point (measurement date and time) of the dotted line is displayedat the bottom of the window. When no part of waveforms is copied in thenote waveform window, the “Drag and drop a note waveform” messageappears at the bottom of the note waveform window.

Single-click:Single-click to jump to the waveform.Event:Displays the annotations in the list box.Note:Display the list of the copied part ofwaveforms in the list box.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Copying Part ofWaveforms

A 20-second part of the waveforms can be copied in the note waveform window by

the following ways.

• 10 seconds before and after the time point where you click.

• 10 seconds before and after the time point at the center of the review window.

• 10 seconds before and after the time point where you select with the time cursor.

Copying the Part of Waveforms with a Mouse

The waveforms for 10 seconds before and after the time point where you click can

be copied.




3. Display the waveforms that you want to copy.

4. Click the center of the area you want to copy.

5. Drag it to the note waveforms window. The note waveform information dialog

box opens.

6. Type the title of the part of the waveforms in the Title text box with up to 40

characters.

7. Click the OK button. The information of the copied waveforms is displayed in

the note waveform list.

To cancel copying the waveforms, click the cancel button.

Patient information

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Copying the Part of the Waveforms at the Center of the Review

Window

The waveforms for a 10 seconds before and after the time point at the center of the

review window can be copied.





4. Right-click anywhere on the note waveform window. The pop-up menu opens.

5. Select “Save as note waveform”. The note waveform information dialog box

Patient information

opens.


characters.




6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Copying Part of the Waveforms Using the Time Cursor

The waveforms for 10 seconds before and after the time point where you select

with the time cursor can be copied.



3. Click the Display Time Cursor button on the tool bar, or select Time Cursor

from the Tool menu. The two vertical (time) cursors appear on the screen.

4. Click the center of the waveforms that you wan to copy.




7. Select “Save as note waveform”. The note waveform information dialog box

opens.

Time cursor

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Patient information


characters.




You can register the copied waveforms in the instrument as a sample data. Up to

100 sample data can be registered.

1. From the note waveform list, select the part of waveforms.


3. Select “Save in drive C”. The attribute of the registered waveforms changes to

“S” in the note list and the “Save in drive C” in the note waveform information

dialog box changes from “No” to “Yes”.

Registering the CopiedWaveforms as a SampleData

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Patient information

Changing the Title of theCopied Waveforms

The title of the copied waveforms can be changed.


2. Select “Note waveform information”. The Note waveform information dialog

box opens.

3. Type the new title in the Title text box with up to 40 characters. To change the

patient information, use the patient information dialog box.


To cancel changing, click the Cancel button.

Copied waveforms can be displayed by selecting the copied waveforms in the

annotation list box. You can display the copied waveforms for all patients

registered in the instrument.

Displaying the Copied Waveforms for the Current Patient.




3. Select the Note wave option. The list of the copied waveforms for the current

patient is displayed.

4. Select the waveforms that you want to display.

Displaying the CopiedWaveforms

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Displaying the Copied Waveforms for All Patients (Sample Data)

The sample data (copied waveforms that are registered in the instrument) can be

displayed.


2. To display the list of sample data, select “Show note waveforms saved in drive

C”.

To display the list of copied waveforms for all patients, select “Display all

patient list”.

3. Select the waveforms that you want to display

To delete the copied waveforms, use any of following commands from the pop-up

menu.

Delete:

Delete the selected copied waveforms in the note waveform list

Delete all unsaved note waveforms:

Deletes the copied waveforms that are not registered in the instrument.

Delete all saved note waveforms:

Deletes the copied waveforms that are registered in the instrument.

To print the copied waveform, display them on the note waveform window and

select Current Page option in the Print Range area of the Print dialog box.

For the Print dialog box, refer to “Printing” in this section.

Deleting CopiedWaveforms

Printing the CopiedWaveform

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Reviewing the Long Term EEG Waveforms

When the EEG waveforms are measured with the long term EEG monitoring

function, the EEG waveforms for each stage are saved as a different EEG data file.

You can continuously review these EEG data files for a patient.

1. From the EEG 1000 window, double-click the Review icon. The Open File

window opens.

2. From he Launch menu, Select Use LIF Settings.

3. In the list, select any EEG data file that is measured with the long term EEG

monitoring function.

To find files, you can use the search function. Refer to “Opening the EEG

Data File” in this section.

4. Click the Review button. The selected EEG data file opens on the

Review screen.

Previous/Next stage button:Displays an EEG data file in the previous or next stage

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Printing

Setting Up the Printer

Printing Waveforms andPatient Information

Before printing, you can select the data, format, printer setting, and some options.

Refer to Print dialog box, Image Option dialog box, and Printer Setup dialog box.

Refer to your printer’s instruction manual for an explanation of printer setup

options.

Selected printer

Print Setup dialog box example

1. From the File menu, select Printer setup. The Print Setup dialog box opens.

2. Select the print options.

3. Click the OK button to close the Print Setup dialog box.

1. From the File menu, select Print. The Print dialog box opens.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


About the Print dialog box options

Print Range:

Select the part of the EEG waveform data on the screen to print.

Selected Range: Prints the currently selected part of the EEG waveform data.

Current Page: Prints the page currently displayed on the screen.

Epoch: Prints the selected epochs. One epoch corresponds to 10

seconds of data.

from: Type the beginning epoch.

to: Type the ending epoch.

Print Item:

Select the data to print.

(Patient Information, EEG Data, Event Log, Impedance Check and/or Pattern)

Print Speed:

Select the printing speed of the EEG waveform data per page. This mode is in

effect when the Print Range is set to Epoch.

5 s/page: Prints 5 second EEG waveform per page.



20 s/page: Prints 20 second EEG waveform data per page.



5 min/page: Prints 5 minute EEG waveform data per page.

Wave Print Mode:

Select the pattern to print the EEG waveforms. This option is available when

the Print Range is set to Epoch.

Use Current Pattern: Prints the EEG waveforms in the currently selected

pattern.

Use Acquired Pattern: Prints the EEG waveforms in the pattern in which

they were acquired.

Printer Setting:

Select the printer, orientation, and paper type, etc. by opening the Printer Setup

dialog box. Refer to your printer’s instruction manual.

Print Option:

Select what to print.

2. Select the waveforms to print.

• To print the selected part of the EEG waveforms, click the Selected Range

option. To select a part of waveforms, refer to “Selecting and deleting Parts

of the Waveforms”.

• To print the currently displayed EEG waveforms, click the Current Page

option.

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


• To print the EEG waveforms by specifying the epoch:

1) Click the Epoch option in the Print Range area.

2) Type the beginning epoch in the from box and the ending epoch in the

to box.

3. Click the desired printing item in the Print Item group.

4. Click the desired options in the Print Speed and/or Wave Print Mode area when

Epoch option in Print Range is selected.

5. Click the OK button to start printing

To cancel printing, click the Cancel button.

1. Click the Print Option button on the Print dialog box. The Print Option dialog

box opens.Selecting the Informationfor Waveform Printing

About the Print Option dialog box

Print Information:

Select the information to be printed with the EEG waveform data.

Clock Time: Time of the waveform acquisition

Date: Date of the waveform acquisition

Amplifier Settings: Amplifier settings (Sens, TC and HF) set to ACC.

Annotation:

ID: Patient’s ID

Name: Patient’s name

Amplitude Scale: Amplitude scale and reduced scale

Montage:

Comment: Comment beside each channel

Extended channel bar:

Screen comment: Screen comment for each page

Event color line: Vertical color line for the specified event

Time scale:

Display Montage Map:

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Time Scale:

Select the time scale interval printing.

1 s Time Scale: Prints a solid, dotted line every second or off.

0.2 s Time Scale: Prints a solid, dotted line every 200 ms or off.

Header:

The words entered in the text box are printed on every page.

Paper:

Select the paper size.

Selection list 115% A3 size, 100% B4 size (equal to the screen size), 84%

A4 letter, 71% B5 size, 50% A5 size

When using A3 paper, select “100% B4 size”.

Wave:

Type the thickness of the trace. The default setting is 15.

2. Select the Time Scale and Print Information options. Type the page header, if

necessary.


6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Saving the EEG Waveforms

There are two ways to save files.

• Saves the changed data in the currently selected file (overwrite)

• Saves all or part of the file in a new file (export)

This procedure overwrites the original data with the changed data.

NOTEThe patient’s ID and name must be entered in order to save the

changed data.

1. From the File menu, select Save. The confirmation message appears.

2. Click the Yes button.


Saving the Changed Datain the Currently SelectedFile

6. REVIEW PROGRAM


Saving All or Part of theFile as a New File

This procedure creates a new file and saves the selected data in it.

NOTE• When saving several parts of waveforms, the selected parts must not

overlap each other.

• When saving a file as an ASCII file, select parts of waveforms that are

less than 5 minutes. 500 Hz sampling time, 20 channels, 5 minutes of

waveforms uses 25 MB file space. If the file is 25 MB or more,

another application may be unable to open the file.

1. Select part of the file. Refer to “Selecting Parts of the Waveform” in this

section.

2. From the file menu, select Export. The Export dialog box opens.

Export dialog box options

Name, ID, EEG.Date, EEG. No:

Name, ID, Date and EEG No. of the file are displayed.

EEG Data:

Select the EEG data that you want to save.

All: Saves the currently selected EEG file as a new file.

Selected: Saves the currently selected part of the EEG waveforms as a new

file.

Unselected: Saves the unselected part of the EEG waveforms as a new file.

Storage Drive:

Select the drive in which to save the waveforms and measurement data.

Save as ASCII:

Saves the selected EEG file as an ASCII file.

3. Select options. Name, ID and EEG.Date cannot be changed.

4. Click the OK button to start saving.


6. REVIEW PROGRAM


ASCII File Format

First line

Time Points: Number of data for each channel

Channels: Number of channels

Begin Sweep [ms]: Delay time from 0 point, (always 0)

Sampling Interval [ms]: Sampling interval

Bins/uV: Value corresponds to 1 µV (always 1)

Second line (Montage)

When “org” or “0V” is set to the G2 electrode, only the electrode name is saved.

Example

Montage: Fp1-A1, Fp2-A2, F3-A1, F4-A2 .......

C3-A1, C4-A2, P3-A1, P4-A2 .......

Electrode name: Fp1, Fp2, F3, F4, C3, C4, P3, P4

After third line

Amplitude for all channels in every time point (µV)

ASCII File Name

A file is named based on the EEG data file name with extension “.m**”. When

selecting parts of waveforms and saving them as ASCII files, a different ASCII file

is created for each part. The extension changes according to the number of files

that are created at the same time.

File name example: CA001001 or CC001001 (Default setting)

1st digit: Type of the EEG instrument (Fixed tag)

2nd digit: Language data (Country, A: English, C: Chinese)

3rd to 5th digits: Instrument serial number

6th to 9th digits: Total number of created EEG data files (File Number)

For details about the EEG data file name, refer to “Writing Down the File and MO

Data Before PC Unit or Hard Disk Replacement” in Section 7 of the Service

manual.

When 5 ASCII files are created from the EEG data file “CA001001”, the following

files are created.

1st part: CA001001.m00

2nd part: CA001001.m01

3rd part: CA001001.m02

4th part: CA001001.m03

5th part: CA001001.m04

Before saving the file, you can change the file name.

ASCII File Format and FileName

6. REVIEW PROGRAM




Section 7 Database ManagerProgram

General .............................................................................................................................. 7.1

Opening the Database Manager Program ......................................................................... 7.2


About the Database Manager Dialog Box................................................................ 7.3

File Menu ................................................................................................................. 7.4

Menu Bar ................................................................................................................. 7.4

Load............................................................................................................... 7.4

Save .............................................................................................................. 7.4

Append .......................................................................................................... 7.4

Print Preview ................................................................................................. 7.4

Print ............................................................................................................... 7.4

Close ............................................................................................................. 7.4

Edit Menu ................................................................................................................ 7.5

Delete ............................................................................................................ 7.5

Edit Patient Information ................................................................................. 7.5

Select All ........................................................................................................ 7.5

Invert Selection .............................................................................................. 7.5

View Menu ............................................................................................................... 7.5

View All Information ....................................................................................... 7.5

View by ID ..................................................................................................... 7.5

Reset Column Width ...................................................................................... 7.5

Refresh .......................................................................................................... 7.5

Database Menu ....................................................................................................... 7.6

User Database............................................................................................... 7.6

System Database .......................................................................................... 7.6

Network Database ......................................................................................... 7.6

Tool Menu ................................................................................................................ 7.6

List Set .......................................................................................................... 7.6

Help Menu ............................................................................................................... 7.6

About ............................................................................................................. 7.6

Tool Bar ................................................................................................................... 7.7

Open button ................................................................................................... 7.7

Preview button ............................................................................................... 7.7


Print button .................................................................................................... 7.7

Delete button ................................................................................................. 7.7

Edit button ..................................................................................................... 7.7

Refresh button ............................................................................................... 7.7

Close button .................................................................................................. 7.7

Selecting Records in the Database.................................................................................... 7.8

Sorting Files ............................................................................................................. 7.8

Searching for a File .................................................................................................. 7.9

Searching for a File by a Keyword ................................................................. 7.9

Searching for a File by the Examination Date ............................................. 7.10

Saving the Current Database in Another Folder or Drive .................................................. 7.11

Displaying the Patient Information in Another Database .................................................. 7.13

Converting the Database File ................................................................................ 7.14

Appending Records to the System Database or Network Database ............................... 7.15

Deleting Records from the Database ............................................................................... 7.16

Editing the Patient Information ......................................................................................... 7.17

Printing the Patient formation in the Database................................................................. 7.18

Previewing the List of Patient Information ............................................................. 7.18

Printing the List of Patient Information ................................................................... 7.19

7. DATABASE MANAGER PROGRAM


General

This program manages EEG-1100 database files. You can save the patient information as a database

file. Each file contains patient name, exam date, exam number, Refer dept. (Referring department), disk

volume No. and other patient information.

When the Acquisition program is closed, the data listed above are automatically saved in the database

file.

The Database Manager program has the following functions.

• Searching and sorting patient information

• Saving an entire database or selected records in a file

• Loading a database from a folder or drive to append to the system database or network database

• Appending all or selected records to the system database or network database

• Deleting individual records from a database

• Printing the patient information

• Editing the patient information

When the file is saved in the disk, it is saved with a “.mdb” or “.MDB” extension. If the extension is

not specified, “.mdb” is automatically assigned.

To use the database to view patient information files, call up the desired information from the database

to the patient file list, using the “Selecting Records in the Database” procedure.

When saving or deleting the record, it is convenient to select a patient information in advance by using

this function.

Only the database in the hard disk of the instrument (System database) is active. To do anything with

individual files, the database must be loaded into the hard disk (drive C).

To append files to a database, refer to “Appending Records to the System Database or Network

Database”.

CAUTIONBackup the database every week to prevent loss of data. If the hard disk drive is

damaged you may lose important patient database data.

Refer to “Saving the Current Database in Another Folder or Drive” in this section.

NOTEYou can review the EEG data file which was acquired and saved in an EEG-2110, EEG-

1100, EEG-9100 digital EEG or digital EEG system (PC with the QP-223A/AK or QP-

111AJ/AK acquisition program kit). However the file information is not added to the

system database in this instrument. To add the file information to the system

database, refer to “Adding Files to the System Database” in Section 8.



Opening the Database Manager Program

NOTETurn off any screen saver and close all application program before

opening the Database manager program. Otherwise, the Database

manager program may not function properly.

From the EEG 1000 window, double-click the Database Manager button. The

Database manager dialog box opens.



To close the Database manager program, click the Close button or select Close

from the File menu.




About the DatabaseManager Dialog Box

Information about theselected file

To change the column width, drag here.To reset it, select Reset Column Widthfrom the View menu.

Menu bar

Tool bar

Enter the keyword or date tosearch for the files.

Patient file list




Menu Bar

File MenuYou can manage the database.

Load

Opens the Load dialog box to load a database in another drive or folder as a

user database. You can also open the Load dialog box by clicking the Open

button on the tool bar. The patient information in the user database are

displayed in the patient list. You can review, change, add or delete the patient

information in the user database. This operation does not append the user

database to the system database or network database. To append the records,

refer to “Appending Records to the System Database or Network Database”.

CSV format files cannot be opened with the Load dialog box.

Save

Opens the Save As dialog box to save the selected files as a database in another

disk or drive. You can save the records as either EEG-1100 database format or

text (CSV) format.

Append

Appends the selected records in the user database to the system database or the

network database.

Print Preview

Displays the list of patient information on the Print Preview window before

printing. You can also display the list of patient information by clicking the

Preview button on the tool bar.

Print

Prints the list of patient information. You can also print the list of patient

information by clicking the Print button on the tool bar.

Close

Closes the Database manager program. You can also close the Database

manager program by clicking the Close button on the tool bar.



Edit Menu

View Menu

Delete

Deletes the record from the database. You can also delete the database by

clicking the Delete button.

Edit Patient Information

Displays the Patient Information to edit the patient information in the database.

You can also display the Patient Information page by clicking the Edit

button. Changing the patient information in the database does not change the

patient information in the EEG data file.

Select All

Selects all records displayed in the patient file list.

Invert Selection

Changes the selected records to unselected and the unselected records to

selected.

View All Information

Use to display all records in the currently selected database in the patient file

list after searching for files.

View by ID

When records have the same ID and Name, this merges the duplicate ID and

Name cells for easier viewing.

Reset Column Width

Resets the column width to the default setting.

Refresh

Refreshes the patient file list. You can also refresh the file list by clicking the

Refresh button on the tool menu.



User Database

Displays the patient information in a database which is selected (loaded) in the

Load dialog box.

System Database

Displays the EEG data files in the system database saved in the instrument in

the patient file list.

Network Database

Displays the EEG data files in a database saved in a network in the patient file

list.

List Set

Opens the Table Items dialog box to edit the entry items (Refer Dept,

Physician, Operator) for the patient information page of the Database manger

dialog box. Changing the entry item in the database does not change the entry

item in the EEG data file.

About


Database Menu

Help

Tool Menu



Tool Bar

Open button

Opens the Load dialog box to load a database in another drive or folder as a

user database. You can also open the Load dialog box by selecting Load from

the File menu. The patient information in the user database are displayed in the

patient list. You can review, change, add or delete the patient information in

the user database. This operation does not append the user database to the

system database or network database. To append the records, refer to

“Appending Records to the System Database or Network Database”.

Preview button

Displays the list of patient information on the Print Preview window before

printing. You can also display the list of patient information by selecting Print

Preview from the File menu.

Print button

Prints the list of patient information. You can also print the list of patient

information by selecting Print from the File menu.

Delete button

Deletes the record from the database. You can also delete the record by

selecting Delete from the Edit menu.

Edit button

Displays the Patient Information to edit the patient information. You can also

edit the selected patient information by selecting Edit Patient Information from

the Edit menu. Changing the patient information in the database does not

change the patient information in the EEG data file.

Refresh button

Refresh the patient file list. You can also refresh the file list by selecting

Refresh button from the View menu.

Close button

Closes the Database manager program. You can also close the Database

manager program by selecting Close from the File menu.



Selecting Records in the Database

Sorting Files


Before saving, deleting or appending EEG data files to a database, select the record

in the patient file list. You can easily find files by sorting or searching for the files.

To select one record:

Click the record.

To select consecutive records:

1) Click the first record.

2) Press and hold the Shift key while you click the last record.

Or, drag the cursors to select the record.

To select two or more records of sequence:

Press and hold the Ctrl key while you click each record.

The selected records are highlighted.

To sort the files, click the item name at the top of the column. By clicking the

column the files are displayed in ascending or descending order.



Searching for a File You can search for a file by a keyword and/or date. If one or more keywords/dates

are entered, the program searches for all files which satisfy all of the entered

keywords/dates. Searching starts when the keyword is entered.

Searching for a File by a Keyword

1. Select one or two items in the Search By box arrows.

You can select other keywords by opening the More dialog box. To open the

dialog box, click the More button.

ID, Name, EEG No.

Refer Dept, Physician, Operator

• To start searching, click the OK button.

• To clear the entered keyword, click the Clear button.

• To close the dialog box, click the Cancel button

Use of “*”:

*123: Searches for characters which end with “123”.

*123*: Searches for characters which include “123”.

12*3: Searches for characters which start with “12” and end with “3”.

2. Type the keyword for ID, Name and/or EEG No. Searching automatically

starts.

For Refer Dept, Physician and Operator, you can use the box arrow to enter the

keyword.

• To refresh the patient file list, click the Refresh button on the tool bar.

• To display all files in the selected database, select View All Information from

the View menu.



Searching for a File by the Examination Date

1. Click the Search by date box arrow. The calender appears.

2. Click the examination date.

• To search for the files between two dates, select the beginning date with the

left box and the ending date with the right box.

• To select the year, click the year on the top of the calender (The up/down

arrow appears).

• To select the month, click the left/right arrow or month on the top of the

calender

3. Click the Search button.

• To clear the entered date, click the Clear button.

• To refresh the patient file list, click the Refresh button on the tool bar.

• To display all files in the selected database, select View All Information from the

View menu.



Saving the Current Database in Another Folder or Drive

You can save the records in another folder or drive in either EEG-1100 format or

CSV format (text separated with commas). This is useful to back up the current

database or to create a new database from part of an existing database. When

saving the database in a CD-R/CD-RW disk, first save the database in the hard

disk, then copy the database to the CD-R/CD-RW disk.

1 Select the records in the patient file list box. To easily find the records, use the

sort or search function. Refer to “Sorting Files” and “Searching for a File”.

2. Do one of the following

• To save the records as the EEG-1100 format, select Save as → EEG1100

Format from the File menu to open the Save As - EEG1100 Format- dialog

box.

• To save the records as the CSV format, select Save as → CSV from the File

menu to open the Save As - CSV Format- dialog box.

3. Select the folder or drive from the Save in list box by clicking the Save in list

box arrow. If the database files that you want to save are saved in an MO disk,

insert the disk into the MO disk drive.

4. Type a file name in the File name text box.

csv or CSVmdb or MDB

Save AS - EEG1100 Format - dialog box Save AS - CSV Format - dialog box

A: Floppy diskC: Hard diskD: MO disk



5. Click the Save button. The Confirmation - Save As dialog box opens.

6. Select the option.

All: Saves all records in the system database.

Listed: Saves the records that are currently listed in the patient file list.

Selected: Saves only the records that are selected (highlighted) in the patient

file list.

7. Click the OK button. The selected files are saved in the selected database file.


Confirmation - Save As dialog box example: EEG1100 format



Displaying the Patient Information in Another Database

You can display the patient information saved in another database to review,

change, add or delete the patient information. In this procedure, you cannot

append records to the system database or to another database in the EEG-1100

digital EEG or digital EEG system (PC with the QP-111AJ/AK acquisition

program kit) .

To append records to another database, refer to “Appending Records to the System

Database or Network Database”.

When a database was saved with an EEG-1100 digital EEG with system software

version 03-01 or earlier, the database cannot be read. Convert the database with

the conversion utility. Refer to “Converting the Database”

1. Click the Open button on the tool bar, or select Load from the File menu. The

Load dialog box opens.

2. Select the folder or drive from the Look in list box by clicking the Look in list

box arrow. The database files in the selected folder or drive are displayed in

the file list. If the database file that you want to review is saved in a CD-R/RW

disk or MO disk, insert the disk into the CD-R/RW or MO disk drive.

3. Click the file name. The selected file name is displayed in the File name text

box.

4. Click the OK button or double-click the file name. The files in the selected

database are displayed in the patient file list.

• To cancel loading, click the Cancel button.

• To change, add or delete the patient information, refer to “Editing the Patient

Information”.



Converting the DatabaseFile

NOTEA converted database file cannot be read by an the EEG-1100 digital

EEG with software version 03-01 or earlier because the conversion

adds a new field “Original file name”.

1. Click the Start button on the taskbar. The start menu opens.

2. Select Run. The Run dialog box opens.

3. Type the following line in the Open text box.

C:\nfx11\convertdb

4. Click the OK button. The Open dialog box opens.

5. Select the database file.


1

2



Appending Records to the System Database or Network Database

You can append the records saved in another folder or drive to the system database

or database in the EEG-1100 digital EEG or digital EEG system (PC with the QP-

111AJ/AK acquisition program kit) on a network.

1. Display the files in another data base in the patient file list. Refer to

“Displaying the Patient Information in Another Database”.

2. Select the records. Refer to “Selecting Records in the Database”. The

selected records are highlighted.


• To append the records to the system database, select Append → System

database from the File menu.

• To append the records to the database in the EEG-1100 instrument on a

network, select Append → Network database from the File menu.

The Save As dialog box opens.

4. Select an option.

All: Appends all records in the patient file list.

Listed: Appends the records that are currently listed in the patient file list.

Selected: Appends only the records that are selected (highlighted) in the

patient file list.





Deleting Records from the Database

You can delete records from the database.

1. Display the files in the patient file list.



3. Click the Delete button on the tool bar or select Delete from the Edit menu.

The Message dialog box opens. The file information of the selected record is

displayed in the dialog box.

4. Click any of the following button.

All Overwrite: Deletes all selected records from the database.

Yes: Deletes the currently selected record. Deletion is preformed

one by one.

No: Does not delete the currently selected record. The file

information of the next record is displayed in the dialog box.

Cancel: Cancel deletion.



Editing the Patient Information

You can change, add or delete patient information in the database. This does not

change the patient information in the EEG data file.




3. Click the Edit button on the tool bar, click the Patient Information tab or select

Edit Patient Information from the Edit menu. The confirmation message

dialog box opens.

4. Click the Yes button. The Patient Information page 1 is displayed.

5. Edit the patient information.

To change or add the entry items for Refer Dept, Physician and Operator, use

the Table Items dialog box. To open the Table Items dialog box, select List Set

from the Tool menu.

6. Click the Patient List tab. The confirmation dialog box opens.


To cancel your changes, click the No button.

Click here to see page 2.



Printing the Patient Information in the Database

Previewing the List ofPatient Information

You can preview the list of patient information in the database.




3. Click the Preview button on the tool bar or select Print Preview from the File

menu. The Print Preview dialog box opens.

4. Select the option.

All: Previews all records from the database.

Listed: Previews the records that are currently listed in the patient file list

from the database.

Selected: Previews only the records that are selected (highlighted) in the

patient file list from the database.

To close the Print Preview dialog box, click the Cancel button.

5. Click the OK button. The Preview window opens.

6. Click the Close button to close the Preview window.



You can preview the list of patient information in the database.




3. Click the Print button on the tool bar or select Print from the File menu. The

Print dialog box opens.

Printing the List of PatientInformation

4. Select a option.

All: Prints all records from the database.

Listed: Prints the records that are currently listed in the patient file list from

the database.

Selected: Prints only the records that are selected (highlighted) in the patient

file list from the database.

To cancel printing, click the Cancel button.

5. Click the OK button. The Print dialog box opens.

6. Select the options and click the Print button.


Section 8 File Utility Program

General .............................................................................................................................. 8.1

Opening the File Utility Program ........................................................................................ 8.2


About the File Utility Dialog Box .............................................................................. 8.3

Menu Bar ................................................................................................................. 8.4

File Menu ................................................................................................................. 8.4

Move .............................................................................................................. 8.4

Copy .............................................................................................................. 8.4

Delete ............................................................................................................ 8.4

Add to Database ............................................................................................ 8.4

Append .......................................................................................................... 8.4

File append settings ...................................................................................... 8.4

Copy with Initialize ......................................................................................... 8.4

Copy LIF file .................................................................................................. 8.4

Close ............................................................................................................. 8.4

Disk Menu ................................................................................................................ 8.5

Format ........................................................................................................... 8.5

Initialize .......................................................................................................... 8.5

Tool Menu ................................................................................................................ 8.5

Patient Info .................................................................................................... 8.5

Refresh .......................................................................................................... 8.5

Help Menu ............................................................................................................... 8.5

About ............................................................................................................. 8.5

Tool Bar ................................................................................................................... 8.6

Move button ................................................................................................... 8.6

Copy button ................................................................................................... 8.6

Delete button ................................................................................................. 8.6

Add to Database button ................................................................................. 8.6

Append button ............................................................................................... 8.6

Patient button ................................................................................................ 8.6

Refresh button ............................................................................................... 8.6

Close button .................................................................................................. 8.6

Selecting Files in the Patient File List ................................................................................ 8.7

Sorting Files ............................................................................................................. 8.7


Moving Files ....................................................................................................................... 8.8

Copying Files ..................................................................................................................... 8.9

Copying the LIF File ............................................................................................... 8.10

Deleting Files .................................................................................................................... 8.11

Adding Files to the System Database .............................................................................. 8.12

Combining EEG Data Files .............................................................................................. 8.13

Reviewing the Patient Information ................................................................................... 8.15

Refreshing the File List .................................................................................................... 8.16

Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk and Assigning a Volume Number ............................. 8.16


8. FILE UTILITY PROGRAM

General

The File Utility Program lets you move or copy EEG files from one drive to

another drive, delete EEG files from a drive, or register file information to a

database. When using a magneto-optical disk for the first time, you must format it

and assign a volume number. You can do this with the File Utility. Refer to

“Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk” in Section 3.

The following operations can be performed in this program.

• Moving EEG data files from a drive to another drive

• Copying EEG data files from a drive to another folder or drive

• Deleting EEG data files from a drive

• Adding the EEG data file to the system database or network database

• Formatting a magneto-optical disk

• Assigning a volume number to a magneto-optical disk

• Copying LIF (long term EEG monitoring information file) file to another folder

or drive

• Combining an EEG data file to another EEG data file

Initial Setting

Each drive is initially set as follows.

Drive A: 3.5 inch floppy disk drive

Drive C: Built-in hard disk drive

Drive D: Magneto-optical disk drive (Option)

Drive E: CD-ROM drive

The drive letter changes according to the installed storage device.



Opening the File Utility Program



To close the File Utility program, click the Close button or select Close from the

File menu.


opening the File Utility program. Otherwise, the File Utility program

may not function properly.

From the EEG 1000 window, double-click the File Utility icon. The File Utility

dialog box opens.




About the File Utility Dialog Box

Information about the selected file To change the column width, drag here.

Menu bar

Tool bar

Patient file list

Drive selection list box

To view the information beyond theborder use scroll bar.



Menu Bar

File Menu Move

Opens the Move dialog box to move EEG data files from a disk to another

folder or drive. You can also move the EEG data files by clicking the Move

button on the tool bar.

Copy

Opens the Copy dialog box to copy EEG data files from a disk to another

folder or drive. You can also copy the EEG data files by clicking the Copy

button on the tool bar.

Delete

Deletes EEG data files from a folder or drive. You can also delete EEG data

files by clicking the Delete button on the tool bar.

Add to Database

Adds EEG data files to the system database or network database. You can also

add EEG data files by clicking the Add to Database button on the tool bar.

Append

Opens the file append area on the File Utility dialog box to add two EEG data

files for a patient. You can also open the file append area by clicking the

Append button on the tool bar.

File append settings

Opens the File append settings dialog box to select the settings to append the

files when the Append command is selected.

Copy with Initialize

Opens the Copy with Initialize dialog box to assign a disk volume number to a

disk or folder and copy the EEG data file to the disk or folder.

Copy LIF file

When copying the long term EEG waveform data (saved as different EEG data

files for each stage) to another folder or drive, use this command to copy the

LIF file ( long term monitoring information file) to same drive or folder.

Close

Closes the File Utility program. You can also close the File Utility program by

clicking the Close button on the tool bar.



Disk Menu

Tool Menu

Format

Formats the magneto-optical disk. Refer to “Formatting a Magneto-optical

Disk” in Section 3.

NOTE• Format a magneto-optical disk only by this format command.

• When the MO disk has double sides (5 inch MO disk), format both

sides of the disk individually. Assign a disk volume number after

formatting.

Initialize

You can assign a disk volume number to each side of the disk in order to

manage the disks in the EEG-1100 program. The volume number is used by

the EEG-1100 program.

NOTEAssign the disk volume number for each side, then write down the

disk volume number on the label sheet and stick it on each side.

Patient Info

Opens the Patient Information dialog box. You can also open the Patient

Information dialog box by clicking the Patient button on the tool bar.

Refresh

Refresh the patient file list. You can also refresh the file list by clicking the

Refresh button on the tool bar.

About

Displays information about the program.Help Menu



Tool Bar

Move button

Open the Move dialog box to move EEG data files from one disk to another

folder or drive. You can also move the EEG data files by selecting Move from

the File menu.

Copy button

Opens the Copy dialog box to copy EEG data files from one disk to another

folder or drive. You can also copy the EEG data files by selecting Copy from

the File menu.

Delete button

Deletes EEG data files from a folder or drive. You can also delete the EEG

data files by selecting Delete from the File menu.

Add to Database button

Adds the EEG data file to the system database or network database. You can

also add the EEG data files by selecting Add to Database from the File menu.

Append button

Opens the file append area on the File Utility dialog box to add two EEG data

files for a patient. You can also open the file append area by selecting Append

from the File menu.

Patient button

Opens the Patient Information dialog box. You can also open the Patient

Information dialog box by selecting Patient Info from the Tool menu.

Refresh button

Refreshes the patient file list. You can also refresh the patient file list by

selecting Refresh from the Tool menu.

Close button

Closes the File Utility program. You can also close the File Utility program by

selecting Close from the File menu.



Before moving, copying, deleting or adding EEG data files to a database, select the

EEG data files in the patient file list. You can easily find files by sorting them.

To select one file:

Click the record.

To select consecutive files:

1) Click the first file.

2) Press and hold the Shift key while you click the last file.

Or, drag the cursors to select the file.

To select two or more non-consecutive file:

Press and hold the Ctrl key while you click each file.

The selected files are highlighted.

To sort the files, click the item name at the top of the column. By clicking the

column, the files are displayed in ascending or descending order.

Selecting Files in the Patient File List

Sorting Files

Click the item name at the top of thecolumn to sort records.



Moving Files

CAUTIONIt is safer to copy rather than move EEG data files. If there is an error

during moving, the EEG data file is lost with no backup.

NOTEBefore using a new magneto-optical disk, format it and assign a

volume number. Refer to “Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk” in

Section 3.

1. Click the Drive list box arrow to select the EEG data files that you want to

move. The patient information for each EEG data file is displayed in the

patient file list.

2. In the patient file list, select the files that you want to move. Refer to

“Selecting Files in the Patient File List”

3. Click the Move button on the tool bar or select Move from the File menu. The

Move dialog box opens.

4. Click the Drive list box arrow to select the drive that you want to move to.

To cancel moving the files, click the Cancel button.

5. Click the OK button. The confirmation dialog box opens.


To cancel moving the files, click the Cancel button.

Drive list box

Patient file list

NOTEWhen moving long term EEG

waveform monitoring data (saved

as different EEG data files for

each stage), copy the LIF file to

the same drive where the long

term EEG waveform data is

moved to. Otherwise, you cannot

review the long term EEG

waveform data continuously.

Refer to “Copying Files - Copying

the LIF File”.



Copying Files

NOTEBefore using a new magneto-optical disk, format it and assign a

volume number. Refer to “Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk” in

Section 3.


copy. The patient information for each EEG data file is displayed in the

patient file list.

2. In the patient file list, select the files that you want to copy. Refer to

“Selecting Files in the Patient File List”.

3. Click the Copy button on the tool bar or select Copy from the File menu. The

Copy dialog box opens.

4. Select the folder or drive that you want to copy to.

• To select the drive, click the Drive list box arrow.

When you select the drive to copy the EEG data file to, the files are copied

to the subdirectory \NKT\EEG2100 in the selected drive.

• To cancel copying the files, click the Cancel button.

Drive list box

Patient file list

Sele

Add to DB:Select this box to add an EEG data filewhen copying it from another disk orfolder.



• To select the folder:

1) Click the Folder button. The Browse For Folder dialog box

opens.

2) Select the drive and folder that you want to copy to.

3) Click the Save button.

To cancel copying the files, click the Cancel button.

5. Click the Save button. The confirmation dialog box opens.


To cancel copying the files, click the No button.

Copying the LIF File NOTE• When copying the EEG data files that are measured with the long term

EEG monitoring function (saved as different EEG data files for each

stage), copy the LIF (long term monitoring information) file to the

same folder or drive where the long term EEG waveform data is

copied to. Otherwise, you cannot review the long term EEG waveform

data continuously.

• The LIF file can only be copied from the instrument which acquired

the long term EEG waveform monitoring data.

1. Click the Drive list box arrow to select the drive that you copied the long term

EEG waveform data from. The patient list of the selected drive is displayed.

2. In the patient file list, select the EEG data file that is a part of the long term

EEG waveform monitoring data. The selected file is highlighted.

3. Select Copy LIF file from the File menu.



Deleting Files

CAUTIONFiles that are deleted in this procedure cannot be restored. Deleted

files are not moved to the Windows Recycle Bin.


delete. The patient information for each EEG data file is displayed in the

patient file list.

2. In the patient file list, select the files that you want to delete. Refer to

“Selecting Files in the Patient File List”

3. Click the Delete button on the tool bar or select Delete from the File menu.

The confirmation dialog box opens.


To cancel deleting the files, click the No button.

Drive list box

Patient file list



Adding Files to the System Database

The EEG data files saved in an EEG-1100, EEG-2110, EEG-9100 digital EEG and

digital EEG system (PC with the QP-223A/AK or QP-111AJ/AK acquisition

program kit) can be added to the system database (in this instrument).

1. Click the Drive list box arrow to select the EEG data files that you want to add.

The patient information for each EEG data file is displayed in the patient file

list.Drive list box

Patient file list

2. In the patient file list, select the files that you want to add. Refer to “Selecting

Files in the Patient File List”

3. Click the Add to DB button on the tool bar or select Add to Database from the

File menu.



Before appending the files, you can select the following options with the File

append setting dialog box. To open the File append setting dialog box, select

File appending setting from the File menu.

Combining EEG Data Files

During recording, if an EEG data file for a patient ient is accidentally saved as

separate different files, you can append one EEG data file to another EEG data file

for a patient.

NOTE• Up to one file can be appended to another file for each operation.

• If total file space exceeds 2 GB, this operation cannot be performed.

1. Click the Append button on the tool bar, or select Append from the File menu.

The file append area opens on the File Utility dialog box.



2. Click the Drive list box arrow to select the EEG data files to append.

3. In the patient file list, select the first file. The beginning of the first file is

displayed in the File 1 start box.

4. Select the file to append to the first file. The beginning of the second file is

displayed in the File 2 start box.

To cancel file selection, click the Clear button.

5. Click the Destination list box arrow to select the destination drive.

6. Click the Append button on the file append area.

To cancel appending, click the Cancel button. The file append area closes.

7. Click the Refresh button on the tool bar to refresh the patient list. “MERGED”

is displayed in the Original file column of the merged file.

When

Select to use the combined file with an analog video link.

Select and type the eventto delete when the numberof events exceeds 5355.Select the option for the comment in the Patient Information dialog box.

Combine Patient Information Comment:The comments of the first file and second file are combined.

Use newer file: The comment of the second file is usedUse older file: The comment of the first file is used.

Select and type the letters to addan EEG number.

Dialog box options



Reviewing the Patient Information

You can review the patient information in the patient file list. In this procedure

you cannot change, add or delete the patient information.

1. Click the Drive list box arrow to select the EEG data file that you want to

check. The patient information for each EEG data file is displayed in the

patient file list.

Click here to see page 2.

Drive list box

Patient file list

2. In the patient file list, select the file that you want to review the patient

information. Refer to “Selecting Files in the Patient File List”

3. Click the Patient button on the tool bar or select Patient Info from the Tool

menu. The Patient information dialog box opens.




Refreshing the File List

You can refresh the patient file list by clicking the Refresh button on the tool bar

or selecting Refresh from the Tool menu. Use this function when replacing the

MO disk.

When using a magneto-optical disk for the first time, you must format it and assign

a volume number. You can do this with the File Utility. Refer to “Formatting a

Magneto-optical Disk” in Section 3.

Formatting a Magneto-optical Disk and Assigning a Volume

Number

CAUTIONWhen formatting the MO disk, do not change the Capacity, Format type

and Other options in the Format dialog box.


Section 9 Troubleshooting

Instrument .......................................................................................................................... 9.2

Acquiring the EEG Waveforms .......................................................................................... 9.3

MO Disk Drive.................................................................................................................... 9.5

Laser Printer ...................................................................................................................... 9.6

Acquiring Clear EEG Waveforms....................................................................................... 9.7

Instrument Location ................................................................................................. 9.7

AC Interference ....................................................................................................... 9.7

Occasional Noise ..................................................................................................... 9.8

Unstable Waveform Fluctuation ............................................................................... 9.8

ECG Artifact ............................................................................................................. 9.8

Flash Lamp Artifact .................................................................................................. 9.8

9. TROUBLESHOOTING


When trouble occurs, take quick action referring to the table below. If there is any

damage or the instrument is suspected to be faulty, turn the power off, attach a

“Unusable” or “Repair request” label to the instrument and contact your Nihon

Kohden distributor or representative.

CAUTIONTo turn the power off, follow the procedure in “Closing the EEG 1000

Program” in Section 3. Do not press the power button on the main

unit or PC unit. If the power button is pressed while a program is

running, the program, data file in the hard disk and/or MO disk may

be damaged.

To close the program and shut down Windows when program

malfunction occurs:

1. Open the Windows Task Manager.

When the mouse does not operate:

1) Press the Ctrl + Alt + Del key. The Windows Security dialog box opens.

2) Select Task Manager to open the Windows Task Manager dialog box.

When the keyboard does not operate:

1) Right-click the task bar. The pop-up menu opens.

2) Select Task Manager to open the Windows Task Manager dialog box.

2. Select the program to close.

3. Select the End Task button.

4. Shut down Windows.

1) Select Shut Down from the Start menu. Or, press the Ctrl + Esc key, then

press the U key. The Shut Down Windows dialog box opens.

2) Select “Shut Down” in the “What do you want the computer to do ?” list

box.

3) Select the OK button. Windows shuts down and the PC unit power is

automatically turned off.

9. TROUBLESHOOTING


Instrument

Problem Possible Cause Action

The AC power cord is not connected tothe main unit or AC outlet on the wallcorrectly.

Connect the AC power cord correctly.When the power is turnedon, the instrument doesnot operate.

The PC unit is not turned on. Press the PC power switch to turn thePC unit on.

The power of the display is not turnedon.

Press the power switch of the display toturn the display on.

The brightness or contrast of thedisplay is not appropriate.

Adjust the brightness or contrast.Refer to the Operator’s manual of thedisplay.

The display cable is not connected tothe PC unit correctly.

Connect the display cable to the videoconnector on the PC unit correctly.

The input line (BNC/D-Sub) is notcorrect.

Select the correct input line. Refer tothe Operator’s manual of the display.

When the power is turnedon, nothing is displayedon the screen

Dell Optiplex GX1:The display cable from the CRT displayis not connected to the video connectoron the QI-111A Camera Interface Boador display cable of the A/V input cablefrom the Camera Interface Board is notconnected to the 15 pin video connectoron the PC unit.

Connect the display cable from theCRT display and the display cable ofthe A/V cable correctly.

When the power is turnedon, Windows does notstart.

A floppy disk is inserted into the floppydisk drive.

Remove the floppy disk.

The mouse is not connected to the PCunit.

Turn the power off, then connect themouse cable to mouse connector on thePC unit correctly.

The mouse does notfunction.

The mouse is connected to thekeyboard connector.The keyboard is not connected to thePC unit.

Turn the power off, then connect thekeyboard cable to keyboard connectoron the PC unit correctly.

The keyboard does notfunction.

The keyboard is connected to themouse connector.The flash lamp assembly cable is notconnected to the main unit correctly.

Turn the power off and wait for aminutes, then connect the flash lampassembly cable to the PHOTIC LAMPconnector on the main unit correctly.

The photic stimulation mode is set to“Single”.

Select the correct photic stimulationmode.

The photic flash lampdoes not flash.

The photic stimulation lamp is faulty. Replace it with a new one.

A screen saver program is active. Close the screen saver program.The EEG-1100application program doesnot operate correctly. Another Windows application program

is active.Close all Windows applicationprograms. Or, delete the applicationprogram if it conflicts with the EEG-

For a PV-102A Control Panel Unit, refer to “Error Messages - Control Panel Unit” in Section 3 of the

service manual.

9. TROUBLESHOOTING


Acquiring the EEG Waveforms


The electrode lead is faulty. Check the continuity of the electrodelead with the LEAD CHECK terminalon the JE-425A electrode junction box.If it is faulty, replace it with a new one

One of more of the leads from the Z,C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4) input jacksare not attached to the patient.

Attach these leads to the patientbecause the Z electrode and C3 and C4(or F3 and F4) electrodes are necessaryfor EEG measurement.

The bed is not grounded. When the bed is metallic, ground it.The instrument is not grounded. When the AC outlet on the wall does

not have the ground terminal, groundthe instrument with the providedground lead.

Several ME instruments are usedtogether.

Perform equipotential grounding.

There is an AC outlet or table tap nearthe patient or bed.

Arrange the measurement environmentso that there is no influence from an ACpower line.

Display or laser printer is placed nearthe patient or electrode junction box.

Arrange the measurement environmentso that unwanted radio frequency doesnot affect the measurement.

The desk lamp or fluorescent light isturned on.

Turn the desk lamp or fluorescent lightoff.

The patient touches some metal part. Prevent the patient from touching themetal part.

The patient uses an electric blanket. Turn the electric blanket off and useanother warming method.

Noise or artifact issuperimposed on thewaveforms.

There is a cellular phone near thepatient.

Turn the cellular phone off.

One of more of the leads from the Z,C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4) input jacksare not attached to the patient.

Attach these leads to the patientbecause the Z electrode and C3 and C4(or F3 and F4) electrodes are necessaryfor EEG measurement.

The waveform is notstable.

New and old electrodes or differenttypes of electrodes are used together.

Do not use the new and old electrodesor different types of electrodes together.This may cause high polarizationvoltage.

The waveform becomessometime flat.

The skin-electrode contact impedanceof the C3 or C4 (F3 or F4) is high.

Clean the electrode attachment toreduce the impedance, and reattach theelectrode.

The skin-electrodecontact impedance checkcannot be performed.

One of more of the followingelectrodes that are used for theimpedance check is not attached to thepatient:Z, A1 and A2 (or Fp1 and Fp2), C3 andC4

Attach these electrodes for theimpedance check.

9. TROUBLESHOOTING



The color of the waveform andbackground is the same.

Use a different color for waveform andbackground.

The waveform is notdisplayed.

The Display setting in the Patterndialog box is set to “OFF”.

Set the Display setting to “ON” fornecessary channels.

Many channels are displayed.The waveforms do notsweep smoothly. The FFT analysis function is set to on.

The PC unit cannot process all runningprograms. Reduce the channels todisplay or set the FFT analysis functionto off.

The AC filter setting is not correct. Select the correct AC filter setting (50or 60 Hz) in the System program.

AC filter does notfunction.

Noise is not caused by AC lineinfluence.

Use the proper filter according toartifact.

Noise when AVderivation

The unused electrode for AV derivationis not deleted in the AV Delete dialogbox.

Delete unnecessary electrodes for AVderivation in the AV Delete dialog box.

The electrode that is used formeasurement is not selected for thestorage electrode.

Select the electrode for the storageelectrode in the Electrode to be Saveddialog box of the System program.

The electrode name onthe screen is indicated inred.

The electrode is selected for the AVderivation but not selected for thestorage electrode.

Select all electrodes which are selectedfor the AV derivation for the storageelectrode.

9. TROUBLESHOOTING


MO Disk Drive

The following table explains the general troubleshooting in combination with the

instrument. For details, refer to the MO disk drive Operator’s manual.


The MO disk is not specified by NihonKohden.

Use only the specified MO disk (512bytes/sector).

"The SCSI device ID number of theMO disk drive is not set to “4”.

Set the SCSI device ID number to “4”and turn the instrument on, again.

The MO disk is write-protected. Release the write-protect and try again.

Cannot assign the volumenumber to the MO disk.

The MO disk is not formatted. Format the MO disk and try again.The MO disk is not specified by NihonKohden.

Use only the specified MO disk (512bytes/sector).

"The SCSI device ID number of theMO disk drive is not set to “4”.

"Set the SCSI device ID number to “4”and turn the instrument on again.

The MO disk drive is not recognized bythe instrument because the MO diskdrive is not turned on or it is turned onafter the instrument is turned on.

Check that the MO disk drive isrecognized as a Removable Drive in theMy Computer. If not, turn the powerswitch of the MO disk drive on and turnthe instrument on again.

The MO disk drive is not specified byNihon Kohden.

Use only the specified MO disk drive.

The same SCSI device ID number isused for two or more SCSI devices.

Set a different SCSI device ID numberfor each SCSI device. Refer to theOperator's manual of each device.

The terminator is not connected to theend of the SCSI device.

Connect the terminator to the end of theSCSI device.

The MO disk is write-protected. Release the write-protect and try again.The MO disk is not formatted. Format the MO disk and assign the

volume number.The MO drive is not selected as thestorage drive.

Select MO disk drive to the storagedrive in the System Setting dialog boxof the System program.

The SCSI cable is not connected to thePC unit or MO disk drive.

Connect the SCSI cable correctly thenturn the power on again.

Cannot read/write a filefrom/to the MO disk.

The MO disk is faulty. Use the Windows check disk functionto recover the MO disk.

The MO disk cannot beremoved by pressing theeject switch on the MOdisk drive.

The Enable library check box(Computer Management window →Optional Device Properties → Generalpage) is checked.

Uncheck the Enable library check box.Refer to “Setting the Properties for 5inch Magneto-optical Disk” in Section3.

9. TROUBLESHOOTING


Laser Printer

The following table explains general troubleshooting used with the instrument. For

details, refer to the laser printer Operator’s manual.


Malfunction occursduring printing

The printer power cord is connected tothe 3 prong outlet on the rear panel ofthe main unit.

Supply the printer power from amedical isolation transformer.

Both the instrument and isolationtransformer for the printer power cordare connected to the same AC outlet.

Use a different outlet for the instrumentand transformer because the laserprinter consumes a lot of AC power.

9. TROUBLESHOOTING


Avoid locations where the instrument may receive strong electromagnetic

interference such as radio or TV stations, cellular phones or mobile two-way

radios. Electromagnetic interference causes the screen image to bounce, wavy

oscillations, or the trace to become thick. Also, locate the instrument as far away as

possible from devices which emit high radio frequencies.

Refer to “EMC RELATED CAUTIONS” and “Instrument Location” in Section 2.

AC Interference Superimposed on All Channels

If AC interference is superimposed over all channels on the recording, check for

ground connection and other possible external causes around the patient.

If it is difficult to eliminate the AC interference, press the AC Filter On/Off button

on the tool bar. This function reduces a 50 or 60 Hz AC interference to 1/25 or

better of the original amplitude.

AC Interference Superimposed on Specific Channels

Check for poor electrode placement or poor electrode tip connection to the jacks on

the electrode junction box.

Press the IMPEDANCE CHECK key on the electrode junction box or the

Impedance Check button on the tool bar on the Acquisition screen to perform the

electrode-skin impedance check to detect a faulty electrode.

Causes of AC interference

· Dirty or corroded lead wire tips or electrodes

· Loose electrode connection

· Patient or technician touching an electrode during recording

· Patient touching any metal part of a bed or examination table

· Broken lead wire or power cord

· Electrical devices in the immediate area, lighting, concealed wiring in walls

or floors

· Improper equipotential grounding

Acquiring Clear EEG Waveforms

AC Interference

Instrument Location

Constant amplitude and interval

9. TROUBLESHOOTING


Respiration Artifact

ECG Artifact

Occasional noise may be caused by the patient’s movement or by EMG artifacts

due to the patient’s nervous condition. Instruct the patient to relax.

Causes of EMG

· Patient is uncomfortable, tense, nervous or apprehensive

· Patient is cold and shivering

· Patient has a neuro or muscular disorder (e.g. Parkinson’s Disease)

· Examination chair or bed is too narrow or short to support limbs

comfortably

If EMG artifact cannot be removed depending on the examination circumstances,

use the 50RP high-cut filter.

Waveform fluctuation may be caused by the patient’s perspiration or respiration,

unstable electrode mounting, or electrode lead wire movement.

Causes:

• Patient is sweating. Examination room is too warm.

• Dirty or corroded electrodes

• New and old or different types of electrodes are used together.

• Insufficient or dried out EEG paste

• The skin-electrode impedance of the C3 or C4 (F3 or F4) is high.

• Rising and falling of chest during normal or apprehensive respiration

Unstable WaveformFluctuation

Noise appears in synchronized with ECG.

Change the patient position or chnage the reference electrode to A1 + A2 when

monopolar derivation is used. If noise cannot be reduced, use the ECG filter.

An electrode or paste is exposed to the photic stimulation light. Cover the

electrode with a tape to avoide from the flash lamp light.

Occasional Noise

Sweat Artifact

Amplitude and interval vary.

Synchronized with ECG

Flash Lamp Artifact


Section 10 Maintenance

Check Items After Use ..................................................................................................... 10.1

Cleaning, Disinfecting and Sterilizing ............................................................................... 10.2

System Components ............................................................................................. 10.2

Cleaning ...................................................................................................... 10.2

Disinfecting and Sterilizing .......................................................................... 10.2

Electrodes and Leads ...................................................................................................... 10.3

Electrode Cleaning ...................................................................................... 10.3

Sterilization .................................................................................................. 10.3

Electrode Lead Check ................................................................................. 10.4

Cleaning the Magneto-optical Disk Unit ........................................................................... 10.5

Regular Check ................................................................................................................. 10.6

Periodical Replacement Schedule ................................................................................... 10.7

Repair Parts Availability Policy ........................................................................................ 10.8

10. MAINTENANCE


Check Items After Use

After use, check the following items for the next use.

Overview:

• All external instruments power are turned off.



• No peering or tear on the keyboard and control panel unit.

• No key on the keyboard and control panel unit is broken.


• No electrode is frayed or damaged.

Accessories:



• Enough paper.

• Enough formatted magneto-optical disks.

Storage:

• Electrode leads are washed.

• The power is turned off.

• No chemical or water is near the instrument

• Acceptable storage temperature and humidity

• Recording results and magneto-optical disk are properly stored.

10. MAINTENANCE


Cleaning

CAUTION••••• Turn off the system power before doing maintenance. Otherwise you

may receive an electrical shock or the system may function

improperly.

••••• Do not use volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine, because these

will cause the materials to melt or crack.

••••• The system components are not waterproof. Do not let any water get

inside them.

••••• After cleaning, make sure that the system components are

completely dried.

••••• To prevent water from entering the system component, use a slightly

moist, well-wrung cloth with neutral detergent or tap water for

cleaning the panel.

After use, clean the surface of the system components with a soft cloth moistened

with neutral detergent diluted with water, and wipe with a dry cloth.

To remove any attached paste, immediately wipe the paste off the component with

a wet cloth before the paste dries.

For the MO disk drive and laser printer, refer to the Operator’s manual for each

instrument.

Disinfecting and Sterilizing

CAUTION••••• Do not sterilize the system components.

••••• Do not disinfect and sterilize the PC unit.

••••• Follow the instructions of the disinfectant’s manual.

••••• Wipe the system components and completely dry them after

disinfecting them with spray.

••••• Never use ultraviolet sterilization because this may cause the

materials to deform, crack or discolor.

To disinfect the exterior surface of the system components, wipe them with a non-

abrasive cloth moistened with any of the disinfectants listed below. Use the

recommended concentration.

Disinfectant Concentration (%)

Chlorohexidine gluconate solution 0.5

Benzethonium chloride solution 0.2

Glutaraldehyde solution 2.0

Benzalkonium chloride 0.2

Hydrochloric alkyl diaminoethylglycine 0.5

Cleaning, Disinfecting and Sterilizing

System Components

10. MAINTENANCE


Electrodes and Leads

Electrode Cleaning

After using electrodes, EEG paste or ECG paste adheres to them. Clean the

electrodes for their next use.

CAUTION• Do not use steel wool or any other abrasive to wash the electrodes.

• Do not allow any electrode paste to remain on electrode lead tips

because this may cause the tips to rust.

1. Immerse the electrodes in running water for several minutes.

2. Wash the electrodes gently, being careful not to scratch their surfaces.

3. Thoroughly dry them with a dry, soft cloth.

4. Clean the electrode straps using these procedures.

Sterilization

CAUTION••••• Never autoclave the electrode lead and connection cable.

••••• The sterilizer temperature must not exceed 70° C (158° F) because

the connection cable may deform or melt at this temperature.

Use ethylene oxide gas according to the sterilization equipment if sterilization is

necessary.

Sterilization period: 30 minutes with 100 % ethylene oxide gas

60 minutes with 50 % ethylene oxide gas

120 minutes with 25 % ethylene oxide gas

10. MAINTENANCE


Electrode Lead Check

When any of the following trouble occurs during measurement, check the electrode

lead wire.

• An artifact is superimposed on the waveform of a specified channel during

recording.

• An artifact (AC interference) is superimposed on the waveforms of all channels

during recording.

When the JE-425A electrode junction box, or JE-208A, JE-210A mini junction

box is used, the Z, C3, C4, A1 or A2 electrode may be broken or not properly

attached.

When the JE-213A mini junction box is used, the Z, A5, A6, A11 or A12

electrode may be broken or not properly attached.

• The artifact is not decreased even after checking the electrode-skin impedance

and reattaching the electrode.

1. Connect the lead tip of the electrode to be checked to the LEAD CHECK

terminal on the JE-425A electrode junction box.

2. Lightly press the electrode down to the holder (on the left side of the LEAD

CHECK terminal) to touch the electrode to the metal terminal.

When the electrode lead wire is normal, the LEAD CHECK LED lights.

When the electrode lead wire is broken, the LEAD CHECK LED does not

light.

LEAD CHECK

CAUTIONBefore disposing of the lead wire, check with your local solid waste

officials for recycling options or proper disposal.

10. MAINTENANCE


NOTEDo not use alcohol, benzine or acetone. These chemicals will ruin

the surface of the instrument.

For maintenance, refer to the operator’s manual of the magneto-optical disk drive.

Cleaning the Magneto-optical Disk Unit

10. MAINTENANCE


Regular Check

Check the following items regularly to keep your instrument in optimal condition.

• Instrument is not dirty, damaged or rusty.

• No label is torn.

• No key on the keyboard and control panel unit is broken.


• Ground lead is properly connected.


• Calibration waveform is properly recorded.

• Electrode junction box input jacks are connected properly.

• The sensitivities and time constant are correct.

• Fan operates properly.

• Screen brightness can be adjusted.

• Screen display is correct.

• Clock is correct.

• System settings are correct and are saved correctly.

• Flash lamp assembly is properly connected and operates correctly.

• Hyperventilation unit operates properly.

• Laser printer operates properly.

• Mouse operates properly.

• All storage devices operate properly (hard disk drive and magneto-optical disk

drive).

• No current leakage.

10. MAINTENANCE


Periodical Replacement Schedule

To maintain the performance of the instrument, the following parts must be

periodically replaced by qualified service personnel.

Built-in lithium Battery After 3 years

This battery backs up the system clock. When the battery power is low, the time is

not accurately displayed.

CAUTIONBefore disposing of the battery, check with your local solid waste

officials for recycling options or proper disposal.

10. MAINTENANCE


Nihon Kohden Corporation (NKC) shall stock repair parts (parts necessary to

maintain the performance of the instrument) for a period of 6 years after NKC

announces discontinuation of the instrument. In that period NKC or its authorized

agents will repair the instrument. This period may be shorter than 6 years if the

board or part necessary for the faulty section is not available. For discontinuation

announcements, contact your Nihon Kohden representative.

Repair Parts Availability Policy


Section 11 Reference

Specifications.................................................................................................................... 11.1

Standard Accessories ....................................................................................................... 11.5

Optional Accessories ........................................................................................................ 11.7

Input/Output Connector/Jack Pin Assignment .................................................................. 11.9

Main Unit ................................................................................................................. 11.9

PC Unit ................................................................................................................. 11.14

JE-425A Electrode Junction Box .......................................................................... 11.15

11. REFERENCE


Specifications

Data Acquisition

JE-425A Electrode junction box

Number of input jacks

EEG inputs on electrode position layout: 25

Extra inputs: 11 (X1 to X11)

Reference input for feedback: 1 (Z)

Reference inputs for BN derivation: 2 (BN1 and BN2)

Respiration inputs: 3 RESP F (flow), RESP C (chest), RESP A (abdomen)

Input impedance 100 MΩInternal noise level Less than 3 µVp-p (0.53 Hz to 120 Hz)

CMRR 105 dB or greater

Time constant 10 s

High-cut filter 300 Hz (-18 dB/oct)

A/D conversion 16 bits

Sampling and hold All electrodes at a time

Sampling frequency: 1,000 Hz

JE-207A/209A/212A Electrode junction box

Number of input jacks The JE-209A and JE-212A Electrode junction boxes must be used with the

following mini junction box combinations

Mini junction box Total number of input jacks

(Number of input jacks)

JE-207A JE-208A (64) or JE-213A (64) 64

JE-209A JE-210A (128) 128

Or, JE-213A (64) and JE-214A (64) 128

JE-212A JE-213A (64) and two JE-214 (64) 192

Respiration inputs JE-207A: 3 RESP F (flow), RESP C (chest), RESP A (abdomen)

JE-209A: 3 RESP F (flow), RESP C (chest), RESP A (abdomen)

JE-212A : Not provided

Bipolar inputs JE-207A: 4

JE-209A: 8

JE-212A: Not provided

Input impedance 200 MΩInternal noise level Less than 1.5 µVp-p (0.53 Hz to 120 Hz)

CMRR 110 dB or greater

Time constant 2 or 10 s, selectable

High-cut filter 300, 600, 1,200 or 3,000 Hz (-18dB/oct), depending on the sampling

frequency

A/D conversion 16 bits

Sampling and hold All electrodes at a time

Sampling frequency: 1,000, 2,000, 5,000 or 10,000 Hz, selectable

11. REFERENCE


Data Processing

Sensitivity

EEG INPUT: OFF, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200 µV/mm

DC INPUT: OFF, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50, 70, 100, 150, 200 mV/mm

Time constant 0.001, 0.003, 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 0.6, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 10.0 s

(Low-cut filter) 0.016, 0.03, 0.08, 0.16, 0.27, 0.53, 1.6, 5.3, 53, 159 Hz (-6 db/oct)

High-cut filter 15, 30, 35, 60, 70, 120, 300, 600, 1,200 (-12 db/oct),

50 (RAPID), 3,000 Hz (-18 db/oct)

AC filter 50 or 60 Hz, (rejection ratio: 1/25 or more)

Calibration waveform

Waveform shape: 0.25 Hz step wave or 10 Hz sine wave

Voltage: 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1,000 µV (For DC input signal, ×1000)

ECG elimination filter Available in acquisition and review modes

Impedance check

Indication on the screen: All electrodes are displayed on the screen in electrode position layout.

Impedance for each electrode is displayed and electrodes with impedance

higher than the preset impedance threshold are highlighted.

Indication on LED: LEDs on the electrode junction box with impedance higher than the preset

impedance threshold light.

Impedance threshold: 2, 5, 10, 20 and 50 kΩPattern 36 sets of programmable montages combined with programmable individual

amplifier settings

Reference electrode selector A1 → A2, A1 ← A2, A1 ↔ A2, A1 + A2, VX, AV (with unsuitable electrode

deletion function), BN, Aav, Org, SD and OFF.

Marking signal Photic stimulation mark, Hyperventilation mark, External signal mark

Display

Display resolution Up to 1600 dots × 1200 lines

Number of display channels Up to 64 and one mark channel

Display modes Overwrite and page-by-page

Waveform display color 16 colors

Waveform display ON/OFF Provided

Waveform position adjustment Provided

Waveform freeze Provided

Display of patient image through video camera

Available with optional board

Waveform sweep speed 5, 10, 20, 30 s or 5 min/page

Timing mark 0.1, 1 s

Time scale OFF, 0.2, 1 s

Event mark Displays at the bottom of the screen

EEG scale Provided

Acquisition Program

Timer function Elapsed recording time of each pattern indication, up to 99 min 59 s

HV timer function Elapsed recording time of HV and post HV time

Data Storage device Hard disk drive (standard), magneto-optical disk drive (option)

11. REFERENCE


Photic Stimulator

Maximum flash energy 1.28 J or more

Stimulation mode 3 automatic (30 steps, programmable), 1 manual, and single

Mode of operation Continuous operation with intermittent loading

Duty cycle Max. 5 minutes continuous operation in 30 minutes

Automatic stimulation

Stimulus rate 0.5, 1 to 33 (1 Hz steps), 50 and 60 Hz

Stimulation period 1 to 99 seconds in 1 second steps

Pause period 1 to 30 seconds in 1 second steps

Manual stimulation Manually set frequency and stimulation period

Photic frequency 0.5 Hz, 1 to 33 Hz in 1 Hz steps, 50 and 60 Hz

Stimulation time 1 to 99 s in 1 second steps and continuous stimulation (FREE: Max. 5 min)

Pulse mode Normal, random, and double

Random stimulation 1 to 33 Hz in 1 Hz steps within ±50%

Single stimulation Manual key operation single stimulation or automatic single stimulation by

external trigger signal.

Trigger input TRIGGER IN jack (TTL level)

Trigger output TRIGGER OUT jack (TTL level)

Hyperventilation

When the optional ZE-510AK Hyperventilation unit is connected.

Hyperventilation interval 2, 3, 4 or 5 s

Stimulation time 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 min

Review Program

Changeable items Montage, sensitivity, high-cut filter, time constant, reference electrode, and

display speed

Jump functions Specified event, page by page, and specified time

Display modes Continuous, high speed, high speed with pause, manually page-by-page,

and manually second-by-second

Display information Event, channel number, and montage

Safety

Safety standard IEC 60601-1 (1988)

IEC 60601-1 Amendment 1 (1991)

IEC 60601-1 Amendment 2 (1995)

IEC 60601-2-26 (1994)

EN 60601-1-1 (1992-06) with AMI (1995)

Type of protection against electric shock Class I

Degree of protection against electric shock Type CF

Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water Not protected (IPX0)

Degree of safety of application in flammable gas Not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable

anaesthetic mixture with air or oxygen or nitrous oxide

Mode of operation Continuous

11. REFERENCE


Electromagnetic Compatibility

IEC60601-1-2 (1993)

CISPR11(1990) Group1 CLASS B

Dimensions and Weight

KD-015A Cart (option) 620 (W) × 850 (D) × 1,320 (H) mm, 45.5 kg

KD-016A Cart (option) 620 (W) × 850 (D) × 830 (H) mm, 36 kg

PC unit 205 (W) × 439 (D) × 444 (H) mm, 15 kg

Main unit (EEG-1100A/J/K/G) 210 (W) × 470 (D) × 348 (H) mm, 20 kg

JE-425A Electrode junction box 211 (W) × 78 (D) ×183 (H) mm, 1.7 kg

Power Requirements

Line voltage AC 100, 110, 117, 220, 230 or 240 V

Line frequency 50/60 Hz

Power consumption Max. 550 VA

Operation Conditions

Temperature 10 to 35° C (50 to 95° F)

Humidity 30 to 80 %

Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Transport and Storage Conditions

Temperature -20 to 60° C (-4 to 140° F)

Humidity 20 to 90 %

Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa

11. REFERENCE


Standard Accessories

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

10 1112

13 14 -15

NOTEWhen ordering the following accessories/consumables, specify the

supply code No. When the supply code No. is not provided with the

accessory, specify the code No.

11. REFERENCE


The following model or code No. is for the standard accessory only. Please specify the Supply Code No.

Model or Code No.Supply Code No.

EEG paste F510 Z-401CE Elefix 400 g, 3 pcs/set

NE-134A H526 NE-134A Collodion EEG disk electrode 12 pcs/set

No. Description Q.ty Code No. Supply Code No.

1 Electrode junction box, JE-425A 1 - -

2Collodion EEG disk electrode, NE-133A (24 pcs/set)

Head saline pad electrode kit, DIN, BE-413AG (G version only)1 set

2154-000575E

--

3 EEG ear clip electrode NE-311A 2 2144-012527J H540A

4 EEG paste, Elefix (400 g) 1 187753 F510

5 ECG electrode lead, BC-112B 1 set 6144-004111H K512A

6 ECG clip-on electrode 2 2143-002068A H068

7 ECG paste, CardioCream 1 078399A F010

8 Marker cord 1 277825B -

9 Power cord 1 -- -

10 Ground lead 1 098029 L910

11

Fuse (Time-lag)

10A/250V (Line voltage: 110 or 117 V AC ±10%)

5A/250V (Line voltage: 220, 230 or 240 V AC ±10%)1 set

274133

323009

-

-

12 Mouse pad 1 6143-009572 -

13 QP-0037 System program 1 - -

14 Flash lamp assembly, LS-703AA 1 - -

15 Stand for the electrode junction box and flash lamp assembly KC-001A2 - -

11. REFERENCE


Optional Accessories

• Electrode junction box/Mini junction box

Mini junction box, JE-115A

For the JE-425A Electrode junction box

Electrode junction box, JE-207A

Up to 64 electrodes can be used with the JE-208A or JE-213A Mini junction box.

Maximum sampling frequency is 10 kHz

Electrode junction box JE-209A

Up to 128 electrodes can be used with the JE-210A, or JE-213A and JE-214A

Mini junction box. Maximum sampling frequency is 10 kHz

Electrode junction box JE-212A

Up to 128 electrodes can be used with the JE-213A and JE-214A Mini junction

box. Maximum sampling frequency is 10 kHz

Mini junction box JE-208A

10-20 type mini junction box. The number of electrode jacks is 64.

Mini junction box JE-210A

10-10 type mini junction box. The number of electrode jacks is 128.

Mini junction box JE-213A/214A

Matrix type mini junction box. The number of electrode jacks is 64.

Combination examples

Mini junction box (Number of electrode jacks) Total number of electrode jacks

JE-207A JE-208A (64) or JE-213A (64) 64

JE-209A JE-210A (128), or JE-213A (64) and JE-214A (64) 128

JE-212A JE-213A (64) and two JE-214A (64) 192

Sleep apnea unit JE-912A (mini junction box JE-914A included)

11. REFERENCE


• Hyperventilation unit ZE-510AK

• Analog output board QD-101A

32 output channels.

• Analog input board QA-101A

32 input channels.

• Cart KD-015A/016A

KD-015A: With printer table. KD-016A: Without printer table

• Flash lamp assembly LS-706A

• Visual stimulator adaptor YL-104A

• Control panel unit PV-102A

Provides keys, switches and controls which are used to control EEG waveform

acquisition.

11. REFERENCE


4 3

1 2

CAUTIONConnect only the recommended equipment to the instrument input/

output connectors or jacks. Otherwise, there is a risk of electrical


Used connector:NCS-254-RF (Code No.: 269121)

Mating connector: NCS-254-PM (Code No.: 268782)

INPUT/OUTPUT TRIGGER Jacks

Used connector:HLJ2308-01-3030 (Code No.: 094497)

Mating connector: P-108 6.3φ stereo plug (Code No.: 092383)

Input/Output Connector/Jack Pin Assignment

Main Unit

DG

Trigger input (MAX +5 V, Input impedance 100 kΩ)Trigger output (MAX +5 V, Output current 15 mA)

PHOTIC LAMP Connector

WARNING• Before connecting or disconnecting the flash lamp cord, turn the

power off. After the power is turned off, about 600 V is present in the

PHOTIC LAMP connector for several minutes.





Pin No. Signal

1 CG

2 High Voltage, 600 V

3 PG

4 Lamp Trigger

11. REFERENCE


HV Connector

Used connector:SW-1612A-ST (Code No.: 271582)

Mating connector: P-1620BA-C (Code No.: 269513)

1

12

7

6

DSP Connector (on the AD/DA Motherboard)

* Low active

Used connector:DX10-20S (Code No.:343692)

Mating connector: Connector - DX30A-20P

Housing - DX-20-CV

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal

1 Not used 7 Voice

2 -12 VA 8 +12 VA

3 Not used 9 SG

4 HVDTC* 10 +12 VA

5 HVTRG 11 DG

6 Not used 12 DG


1 PHT TRG 11 DC DATA

2 PHT MRK 12 DC CLK

3 EXTTRG IN 13 EEG FRM

4 HV TRG 14 DC INST

5 HV DTC* 15 MARK CLK

6 DA SCLK 16 MARK SW*

7 MARK DATA 17 FILCLK

8 DA DATA 18 +5 VD

9 SAMP 1 19 +5 VD

10 SAMP 2 20 DGND

11. REFERENCE


* Low active

Used connector:DX10-68S (Code No.: 528992)

Mating connector: Connector - DX30A-68P, Housing - DX-68-CV3

PANEL Connector (on the AD/DA Motherboard)


1 MARK DATA 35 FILE CLOSE*

2 MARK CLK 36 TALK*

3 REC DTC 37 DGND

4 PAPER E 38 DGND

5 FOLD D 39 DGND

6 MTCLK 40 DGND

7 SP1/10 41 DGND

8 MTSTR* 42 LD07

9 RESET 34 DGND

10 RESETM 44 LD04

11 PHOTO MRK 45 DGND

12 HV MRK 46 LD03

13 EXT MRK 47 DGND

14 MT SET1 48 LD02

15 MT SET2 49 DGND

16 M TSET3 50 LD01

17 EEG FRM 51 DGND

18 TRYST1 52 LD00

19 TRYST2 53 DGND

20 TRYST3 54 LSL2A

21 TRYRES 55 DGND

22 TRYCLK 56 LSL7

23 TRYSTR* 57 +5 VD

24 MARK* 58 +5 VD

25 FEED* 59 +5 VD

26 INST* 60 -12 VA

27 PEN UP/DOWN* 61 12 VA

11. REFERENCE


1

19

20

37

MAX ±8 V, input impedance 1.5MΩ

Used connector: JCY-37S-1A3G (Code No.: 570696)

Mating connector: Connector - DC-37PF-N (Code No.: 269522)

Housing - DC-C8-J13-F4-1

(Code No.: 270583)

EXT INPUT Connector (on the Optional QA-101A Analog Input Board)


1 1ch 20 20ch

2 2ch 21 21ch

3 3ch 22 22ch

4 4ch 23 23ch

5 5ch 24 24ch

6 6ch 25 25ch

7 7ch 26 26ch

8 8ch 27 27ch

9 9ch 28 28ch

10 10ch 29 29ch

11 11ch 30 30ch

12 12ch 31 31ch

13 13ch 32 32ch

14 14ch 33 Mark1

15 15ch 34 Mark2

16 16ch 35 RESET

17 17ch 36 AG

18 18ch 37 DG

19 19ch - -

11. REFERENCE


REC DATA Connector

(On the Optional QD-101A Analog Output Board, Not used)

1

19

20

37

MAX ±8 V, output current 10 mA

Used connector: JCY-37S-1A3G (Code No.: 570696)

Mating connector: Connector - DC-37PF-N (Code No.: 269522)

Housing - DC-C8-J13-F4-1

(Code No.: 270583)

EXT OUTPUT Connector (on the Optional QD-101A Analog Output Board)


1 1ch 20 20ch

2 2ch 21 21ch

3 3ch 22 22ch

4 4ch 23 23ch

5 5ch 24 24ch

6 6ch 25 25ch

7 7ch 26 26ch

8 8ch 27 27ch

9 9ch 28 28ch

10 10ch 29 29ch

11 11ch 30 30ch

12 12ch 31 31ch

13 13ch 32 32ch

14 14ch 33 Mark1

15 15ch 34 Mark2

16 16ch 35 Not used

17 17ch 36 AG

18 18ch 37 DG

19 19ch - -

11. REFERENCE


Used connector: 57RE-40140-730B (Code No.: 459825)

Mating connector: Connector - FCN-781P014-G/R

(Code No.: 363741)

Housing- FCN-781C014-D/E

(Code No.: 363759)

PC Unit DSP Connector (on the PCI/DSP Board)

Used connector:DX10-20S (Code No.: 343692)


Housing - DX-20-CV

17

814

EEG INPUT Connector


1 PHT TRG 11 DC DATA

2 PHT MRK 12 DC CLK

3 EXTTRG IN 13 EEG FRM

4 HV TRG 14 DC INST

5 HV DTC* 15 MARK CLK

6 DA SCLK 16 MARK SW*

7 MARK DATA 17 FILCLK

8 DA DATA 18 +5 VD

9 SAMP 1 19 +5 VD

10 SAMP 2 20 DGND


1 +15 Vi 8 DGND

2 JBCLK* 9 JBCLK

3 TXDAT* 10 TXDAT

4 PD* 11 PD

5 RXDAT 12 RXDAT*

6 DGND 13 +12 Vi

7 JBX-A* 14 TYPEDTC*

11. REFERENCE


Multiple Connector

EXT MARK Jack (on the PCI/DSP Board)

Used connector: HSJ-0857-01-1310

Mating connector: PJ-2240-P (Code No.: 273348)

DG

REMOTE MARK


Used connector: DX10A-50S

(Code No.:485761)


Housing- DX-50-CV1

WARNINGWhen the JE-115A mini junction box is not used,

make sure that the multiple connecter cover is

firmly attached to the electrode junction box.

Failure to follow this warning may cause

electrical shock to the patient and operator.

PIn No. Signal Pin No. Signal

1 FP1 26 T2

2 FP2 27 Not used

3 F3 28 Not used

4 F4 29 Not used

5 C3 30 X1

6 C4 31 X2

7 P3 32 X3

8 P4 33 X4

9 O1 34 X5

10 O2 35 X6

11 A1 36 X7

12 A2 37 X8

13 F7 38 X9

14 F8 39 X10

15 T3 40 X11

16 T4 41 BN1

17 T5 42 BN2

18 T6 43 Z

19 FZ 44 IG

20 PZ 45 IG

21 Not used 46 Not used

22 PG1 47 RESPV

23 PG2 48 RESPV

24 CZ 49 Not used

25 T1 50 Not used

11. REFERENCE



Eeg1100 Om-e Book

Documents

Transcript of Eeg1100 Om-e Book